JP6680986B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

  Pachinko game machines.

  In recent years, as a pachinko game machine, a jackpot lottery with a predetermined probability is triggered when a game ball enters the starting opening on the game board surface (game area), and if the jackpot lottery is won, a jackpot (special game ) The state is the mainstream Pachinko game machine that can open a large winning opening provided on the game board surface and obtain a large number of prize balls. In the pachinko gaming machine configured in this way, the probability fluctuation game state that increases the winning probability in the big hit lottery and the time shortening game state that increases the efficiency of symbol fluctuation for notifying the lottery result in the big hit lottery There is also a gaming machine that is provided with the above-mentioned, etc. and enhances the enjoyment of the game by creating a gaming progress state advantageous to the player by these gaming states.

JP, 2000-225255, A Patent No. 5297594 Patent No. 5536601 Patent No. 5574745

  However, since many such game machines have existed in the past, there is a problem that development of a model that realizes more novel game play is desired.

Pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect,
A starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information,
A main game unit that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display section that can display effects,
It is provided with a sub game part that controls the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition unit, a random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the acceptance / rejection determination permission condition is satisfied,
In the case where the acceptance / rejection determination permission condition for a certain hold is satisfied, a win / fail determination means for performing a win / fail determination based on the random number related to the certain hold,
Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be displayed in a stopped state after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display part based on the result of the acceptance determination by the acceptance determination means,
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, the variable winning a prize hole may be in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning a prize hole or a predetermined period elapses. Special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game a plurality of times,
Having a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and in the case of the specific game state, the unit from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display has become the specific game state. A gaming state control means that can be controlled so as not to be in a normal gaming state until the one unit is performed a predetermined number of times from the time of calculation,
And a game information transmitting means for transmitting to the sub-game unit the game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit side,
A first fluctuation pattern table as a table to be referred when determining the fluctuation display time of the identification information, a second fluctuation pattern table in which the first fluctuation pattern table is different in the selection tendency of the fluctuation display time of the identification information, A first variation state that has at least a third variation pattern table in which the variation display times of the identification information differ from the variation pattern table and the second variation pattern table, and refers to the first variation pattern table; It has at least a second variation state that refers to the variation pattern table and a third variation state that refers to the third variation pattern table, and the first variation state is a variation state in a specific period of the specific game state, The second variation state is a variation state in the specific game state, and is shifted from the first variation state when the specific period ends. A dynamic state, the third variation state is variable state is migrated from it and a second change state variation state in the normal game state,
The sub game department,
Game information receiving means for receiving the game information transmitted from the main game section side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means capable of displaying the effect on the effect display unit,
When the number of remaining times of the one unit in the specific game state becomes a certain number of times less than the predetermined number of times, it is suggested that the number of remaining times of the one unit in the specific game state is less than or equal to the certain number of times in the specific game state thereafter. It is possible to execute the remaining number suggestion effect, which is the effect
While having at least a first period and a second period that is a period later than the first period as a period that is the first fluctuation state, while the remaining number suggestion production is not executed in the first period in the first fluctuation state. In the second period in the first fluctuation state, the remaining number suggestive effect is configured to be executed,
When the second variation state, the remaining number suggestion effect is configured to be executed,
If the third variation state, the remaining number suggestion effect is configured not to be executed,
In the case of the first fluctuation state, the number of holdings at the time when the acceptance / rejection determination permission condition is satisfied is the first holding number and the number of holdings at the time when the acceptance / rejection determination permission condition is satisfied is the first holding number. When the number of second holdings is larger than the number, the average value of the fluctuation display time of the identification information when the result of the win / loss determination by the win / loss determination means when the win / loss determination permission condition is satisfied becomes non-win While the average value difference for a predetermined time occurs,
In the case of the second fluctuation state, when the number of holdings at the time of satisfying the acceptance / rejection determination permission condition is the first number of holdings and when the number of holdings at the time of satisfying the acceptance / rejection determination permission condition is the second It is configured so that the selection tendency of the variable display time of the identification information is the same when the number of holdings is the same as when the result of the win / loss determination by the win / loss determination means when the win / loss determination permission condition is satisfied is non-winning. Cage,
In both the first period in the first fluctuation state and the second period in the first fluctuation state, it is configured to refer to the first fluctuation pattern table,
The number of candidates related to the variable display time of the identification information that can be selected when the result of the win / fail judgment by the win / win determination means is the non-winning state is the second fluctuation state and the win / fail by the win / fail determination means. It is configured to be larger than the number of candidates related to the variable display time of the identification information that can be selected when the determination result is non-winning,
The number of candidates relating to the variable display time of the identification information that can be selected when the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination unit is in the first fluctuation state is the second fluctuation state and the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination unit. If the result of the above is a win, it is configured to be larger than the number of candidates related to the variable display time of the identification information that can be selected,
The variation of the identification information that is most likely to be taken when the number of holdings at the time when the winning / disapproval determination permission condition is satisfied in the first variation state is the second number of holdings and the result of the determination of win / loss by the win / loss determination means is non-win Rather than the display time, it is most taken when the number of holdings at the time of satisfying the win / loss judgment permission condition in the second variation state is the second number of holdings and the result of the win / fail judgment by the win / loss determination means is non-win. The variation display time of easy identification information is configured to be longer,
The specific background effect executed by the effect display unit in the second variation state is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured not to be executed in the first variation state.
<Appendix>
It should be noted that, although other modes different from the present mode will be listed below, the present invention can be carried out without being limited thereto.
Pachinko gaming machine according to this another aspect,
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into the open state and the closed state, and is open. When the state is displaced, the game ball can enter the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the second starting port (For example, a variable member (eg, second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball in the second main game starting port B10 as compared to the state where the game ball cannot enter or is open. ,
A variable winning a prize opening (for example, a second large winning a prize mouth C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, second big winning opening C20) can enter
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, and the first suspension is controlled to occur. First random number temporary storage means,
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, according to the determination content based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol) First identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display portion A21g),
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, and the second suspension is controlled to occur. Second random number temporary storage means,
In the case where the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) Second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display section B21g),
A first special game control means for executing a first special game which may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode,
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable winning opening (eg, the second special winning opening C20) can be changed from the closed state to the open state. Winning mouth opening game control means,
When the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is a ball in the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C27), a second special game in which a unit game that can be in an advantageous state for the player is executed a plurality of times. A second special game control means for executing,
And a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side.
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), there are a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be in the open state than in the normal game state. , The first special game or the second special game is controlled to be in the specific game state after completion of execution, and in the specific game state, from the start of variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display As a unit, it is configured not to be in the normal game state until the one final unit is played a predetermined number of times after the completion of the execution of the first special game or the second special game,
As the predetermined number of terminations, at least a first number of terminations and a second number of terminations that is a number different from the first number of terminations are included,
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number of two or more is reached,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The variable winning opening opening game is executed by the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific mode, and the second special game executed when there is a ball in the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C27). After the end of, is configured to be in a specific game state,
After the end of the first special game executed by the stop display of the first identification information in a predetermined manner, it is configured to be in either the normal game state or the specific game state,
In the normal game state, when the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, and the special game state is reached after the end of the first special game, it is calculated after the end of the execution of the first special game and It is configured to be in a normal game state after one unit has been played the first final times,
In the normal game state, the variable winning opening opening game is executed by the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific mode, and is executed when there is a ball in a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). When the special game state is entered after the end of the second special game, the unit is counted from the end of execution of the second special game and the normal game state is set after the one unit has been played the second final number of times. Has been done,
In the normal game state, when the stop identification information of the first identification information is stopped and displayed as a predetermined mode and the special game is executed, the probability that the special game state is reached after the execution of the special game is 1 is the second identification information. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured to have a higher probability of being stopped and displayed in a specific mode when it is displayed in a variable manner.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to realize a more novel gaming property in the gaming machine that adopts the concept of creating a gaming progress state advantageous to the player.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an electrical overall configuration diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart of an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the limited frequency A variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the limited frequency B variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a limited frequency table on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the pending information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of special game effect execution processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the determination process after the end of the specific game on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment is finished. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of special game effect execution processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of a stay stage determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 31 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 32 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the limited frequency B variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 35 is a flowchart of an external signal output process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a table related to external terminal transmission contents on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of a variable fixed time determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 40 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of a right-hand hitting instruction display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is a main game table configuration diagram on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a main game table configuration diagram on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of pending information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of a winning prefetch determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the pre-reading effect content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the effect content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the effect content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a main game table configuration diagram on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of a limited frequency B variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 53 is a limited frequency table on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of a stay stage determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 56 is a main game table configuration diagram on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of a shield member drive control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of a stay stage determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 63 is a front view of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 64 is an operation diagram relating to the second special winning opening of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 65 is an operation diagram relating to the electric accessory of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 66 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 67 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 69 is a main game table configuration diagram on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment is completed. FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flow chart of the distribution combination object control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the V winning opening entry determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 74 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of a V winning detection effect display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of special game effect execution processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 77 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a main game table configuration diagram on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 79 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 80 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 81 is a flowchart of the time saving / medium time production content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of an electric auditors product drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 83 is a main game table configuration diagram on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 84 is a flowchart of a V winning detection effect display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 85 is a flowchart of an electric auditors product drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 87 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 4 of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 88 is a flowchart of a limited frequency variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification example 4 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 89 is a limited frequency table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 90 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification example 4 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 91 is a table configuration diagram on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 5 of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 92 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board M side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of special game effect execution processing on the sub control board S side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 5 of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a table configuration diagram on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board M side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification 6 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a flowchart of a V winning detection effect display control process on the sub control board S side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 6 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 98 is a table configuration diagram on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of a limited frequency variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 100 is a limited frequency table on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 101 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 102 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 103 is a flowchart of a stay stage determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 104 is a table configuration diagram on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 106 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 107 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 108 is an example of a stay stage determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 109 is a flowchart of special game effect execution processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 110 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flowchart of a winning game state display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment.

Form for carrying out

First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. "Entering a ball" includes not only award in which prize balls are paid out, but also passing through a "through chucker" in which prize balls are not paid out. The “identification information” may be in any form as long as it can identify the type of information through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but is preferably visual, such as numbers, letters, and patterns. And the like. In addition, in the present specification, the "identification information" is sometimes called a main game pattern / special pattern (special drawing) or a decorative pattern (design), but the "special pattern (special drawing)" is a main control board. The display information is identification information controlled by the side, and the "decorative pattern (design)" is identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-control board side. The "display of identification information" is not limited to any display method, and includes, for example, light emission of a light emitting means (eg, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) (including not only light emission but also color difference), physical Display (for example, a symbol drawn on the reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position). The “draft” refers to display contents that enhance the interest of the game, and includes, for example, identification information fluctuations / stops, advance notices, moving images such as animation and live action, still images such as pictures, photographs, characters, and the like. A combination can be mentioned. The "open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, in a general big winning opening (so-called attacker) configuration, open state = easy winning state, closed state = non-winning state. It becomes easy. Further, for example, a state protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter, may be referred to as an advancing state) and a state retracted in the game board (opposite side to the player side) (hereinafter, referred to as a retracted state) In the configuration (so-called Vero-type attacker), the advance state is the easy winning state, and the withdrawal state is the non-winning state. "Random number" is a random number used in a lottery (a lottery by an electronic computer) for determining some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes pseudo random numbers in addition to random numbers in a narrow sense (for example, as random numbers, hard Soft numbers as random numbers and pseudo-random numbers). For example, a so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically, a "winning random number (random number for winning / non-winning lottery)" related to the transition of the special game, a variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol is determined. "Variation mode determination random number" to do, "Symbol determination random number" to determine stop symbol, "Hit symbol determination random number" to determine whether to move to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It should be noted that it is not necessary to use all of these random numbers when determining the content of the variation mode and the content of the final identification information, and at least one random number that is the same or different from each other may be used. In this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of a number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers. However, once the entrance (for example, starting entrance) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers The random number obtained by entering the ball is called one (that is, in the above example, a random number bundle of winning random number + variation mode determination random number + symbol determination random number ... is called one random number) . Further, for example, one type of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another type of random number (for example, a symbol determining random number). The "gaming state" is, for example, a special gaming state in which the special winning opening can be opened, a transition to the special gaming state, a transition to the special gaming state rather than a non-probability variation gaming state in which the lottery probability is a predetermined value. Probability variation game state with high lottery probability, transition to special game Auxiliary game state with assistance for winning in the starting mouth that triggers the lottery (so-called normal symbol time saving state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting mouth In this case, the open period of the variable member is long, the open probability of the variable member is high, the time of notifying the result of the open lottery of the variable member is short), and the like. "Expected average execution time of easy-entering ball game per unit time" is assumed to be a situation in which the symbol variation of the auxiliary game symbol is continuously performed (for example, a situation in which a hold relating to the auxiliary game symbol is always present). In this case, it means the ratio of the open period per unit time (for example, 5 minutes) of the variable member attached to the starting port, but in terms of internal processing, in other words, based on the above-mentioned gaming state, for example, , When the variable member is attached to the starting port, the length of the variable member opening period (so-called open extension function operating state / non-operating state), the winning of the normal pattern (auxiliary game pattern) that triggers the opening of the variable member High and low probability (so-called universal figure high probability state / low probability state), long and short fluctuation time of ordinary pattern (auxiliary game pattern) that triggers opening of variable member (so-called general pattern variation reduction function Operating condition-actuated state), is realized by any one or more combinations of the like. The “average value of the variable display period of the identification information” is not limited to the meaning of actually measuring the variable display period for each variable display of the identification information and taking the average value based on the measured value. More specifically, when the variable display period is determined for each variable display of the identification information, and there are a plurality of types of variable display period candidates to be determined (selected). , Which is an expected value based on the plurality of types of variable display periods (sum of “selection probability × variable display period”), but if there is one type of variable display period to be selected, one type Is the variable display period itself (that is, it includes both concepts). Furthermore, a concept limited to only the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of loss or a concept limited to only the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of hit, or only the variation display period with the highest selection probability It is also possible to add that the concept is limited to, that is, the purpose of this wording is to use it as an index that indicates the progressing speed of the game that the player can experience (hence, "the variation display period of the identification information As a method of realizing different "average values", different candidates and / or selection probabilities of the variable display period are added, or further variable display periods are added even if the candidates and / or selection probabilities of the variable display period are the same. There are various methods such as changing the period value when doing, but it is not limited to either method). "The first variable period state in which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second period is the second period in which the average value of the variable display period of the identification information is different from the first period. The variable period has at least the state "," may have not only the two states but also three or more states (or any two states in the case of having three or more states). For example, the state transition of “first fluctuation period state” → “second fluctuation period state” → “third fluctuation period state” is performed according to the number of fluctuation display times of identification information. Including what can be taken. In this case, when the average value of the variation display period of the identification information in each state is configured such that “first variation period state” <“second variation period state” <“third variation period state”, It is possible to construct a state transition of high-speed game progress state → medium-speed game progress state → low-speed game progress state (of course, the opposite state transition (game progress state) may be constructed, In that case, it is suitable when used in combination with the probability fluctuation game state that continues until the next big hit + electric Chu open easy state (Despite the situation where the next big hit is almost deterministic, the next big hit can be obtained. As the situation does not continue, the speed of the game progresses, which may eliminate the feeling of fatigue during so-called hamari). Further, as a feature of each state, in the "first variation period state", the difference between the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of loss and the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of hit, " In the "third variation period state", which is smaller than the difference in the "second variation period state", between the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of loss and the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of hitting. In addition to the difference being smaller than the difference in the “second fluctuation period state”, the fluctuation display period of the identification information is particularly likely to be relatively long when compared with the “first fluctuation period state” ( In other words, in the “second fluctuation period state”, the fluctuation display period of the identification information is particularly long during the hit, as compared with other states. (I.e., a short fluctuation fluctuation display period in which the deviation is definite or a medium fluctuation fluctuation fluctuation display period that suggests a hit is not selected (or difficult to select), but reach fluctuation (per long fluctuation)) It is possible to exemplify that the display period is selected (or easily selected)}. The "specific period in the high-probability lottery state after the end of execution of the special game" may be a period immediately after the end of execution of the special game until a predetermined number of symbol variations, or the special game. It may be a period after one or more times of symbol fluctuations are made after the execution of until the symbol fluctuations are made a predetermined number of times (that is, the high-probability lottery state is maintained after the execution of the special game is ended. If it is within the range, it means that it is an arbitrary period within that range, so the above-mentioned "first fluctuation period state" → "second fluctuation period state" → "third fluctuation period state" When the state transitions of and can be taken, the specific period can mean the stay period of the “first variable period state” and / or the “second variable period state”). "When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the information about holding" means, for example, that there is a high possibility that a special game (so-called big hit game) will occur at the time of the holding digestion, but there is a possibility that the special game will occur. The judgment criteria are not particularly limited. More specifically, "winning random number (random number for winning / winning lottery)", "variation mode determination random number" for determining the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol, "symbol determination random number" for determining the stop symbol, A random number value such as a "winning symbol determination random number" for deciding whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game may be used as a criterion for determination, and the content of an event derived from these random number values (the result of the determination as to whether or not the result is true or false) , The length of the fluctuation time, the type of stop symbol, the possibility of moving to a specific game, etc.) may be used as the criterion. In the case of suggesting, "indicating or notifying the existence of the hold" is, for example, an effect at the time when the hold is exhausted until reaching the hold (a pattern variation mode of a decorative pattern or it is performed in conjunction with it). Changing the execution mode of (background effect, etc.), etc., and when notifying, for example, the display mode of the hold indicator (may be an image on the liquid crystal display device) when the hold occurs. (In that case, the display color is changed, the display shape is changed, etc.), the holding sound and the sound such as BGM are changed at the time of the hold occurrence, and the lamp for the effect at the time of the hold occurrence. Changing the lighting mode of (frame lamp, etc.), or the execution mode of other effects that are executed at the time of the occurrence of the hold (symbol variation mode of decorative symbols, background effects that are performed in conjunction with it) To To reduction, and the like. The “average value of the variable display period of the identification information” is not limited to the meaning of actually measuring the variable display period for each variable display of the identification information and taking the average value based on the measured value. More specifically, when the variable display period is determined for each variable display of the identification information, and there are a plurality of types of variable display period candidates to be determined (selected). , Which is an expected value based on the plurality of types of variable display periods (sum of “selection probability × variable display period”), but if there is one type of variable display period to be selected, one type Is the variable display period itself (that is, it includes both concepts). Furthermore, a concept limited to only the average value of the variable display period of the identification information at the time of loss or a concept limited to only the average value of the variable display period of the identification information at the time of hit (including so-called small hit time), or It may be a concept limited to only the variable display period with a high selection probability, that is, it is supplemented that the purpose of this wording is to use it as an index indicating the progress speed of the game that the player can experience (hence, As a method of realizing different "average value of the variable display period of the identification information", different candidates and / or selection probabilities of the variable display period, or the same candidate and / or selection probability of the variable display period are used. There are various methods such as changing the period value when adding a further variable display period, but it is not limited to any one method). The "stay stage" is a stage that is dependent upon controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display device SG, and the tendency of the effect displayed when the stay stage is different {type of notice effect that can be executed, executed. The type of the background effect to be obtained, the execution frequency of the notice effect that can be executed, the execution frequency of the background effect that can be executed, the occurrence frequency of the reach effect (SP reach effect, development effect, etc.)} are different. The "high-probability agitation effect" is an effect that agitates whether or not to shift to a probability variation game state after the jackpot is over, and may be referred to as a probability variation agitation effect. The "high-probability agitation effect" may be an effect that fuels whether or not to shift to a probability variation game state (including both a time-reduced game state and a non-time-reduced game state) after the big hit ends, or after the big hit ends It may be an effect that fuels whether or not to shift to the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, or may be an effect that fuels whether to transition to the probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state after the jackpot. The "specific game incitement effect" is an effect that incites whether or not to shift to the time-reduced game state after the jackpot is over, and may be referred to as a "time saving inspiration effect". In addition, the "specific game incitement effect" may be an effect of inspiring whether or not to shift to a time-reduced game state (including both a probability variation game state and a non-probability variation game state) after the big hit ends, or after the big hit end It may be a production that stirs whether to shift to the stochastic fluctuation game state and the time shortening game state, or may be a production that stirs whether to shift to the non-stochastic fluctuation game state and the time shortening game state after the jackpot is over. The effects such as “incitement effect” and “specific game intoxication effect” that incite to which game state the game state shifts after the big hit may be collectively referred to as incitement effect. The “first notification image” is an image that prompts the player to shoot a game ball with a specific launch strength, and may be referred to as a first right-hit instruction display. The “second notification image” is an image that prompts the player to shoot a game ball with a specific launch strength, and may be referred to as a second right-hit instruction display. In a broader sense, the “first notification image” and the “second notification image” are not limited to the images displayed on the effect display device as the “first notification effect” and the “second notification effect”, The emission intensity (direction of emission) may be indicated by turning on / blinking / turning off the lamp, or the emission intensity (direction of emission) may be indicated by voice notification from the speaker (the first condition is the first notification). The image and the second notification image are the same), and further, a plurality of these notifications may be combined (the first display image is displayed on the effect display device, and a sound "Right strike" is notified, Etc.), and the "first notification effect" and the "second notification effect" may be different notification modes (the first notification effect is displayed on the effect display device, and the second notification effect outputs sound from the speaker). Yes, etc.). The "specific hold notification effect" is an effect that suggests that there is a hold with high profit by the player such as a small hit or a big hit, and may be referred to as a small hit hold notification effect. . "The effect of concealing the number of unit games" is an effect that does not notify the number of execution rounds to be executed in the jackpot definitely and suggests the number of execution rounds during the execution of the jackpot. It may be referred to as a round-up success effect or a round-up failure effect). The "effect that urges the game ball to be launched toward the variable member" is an effect that suggests a launch timing at which the game ball can enter the predetermined entrance, and may be referred to as a right hit execution instruction effect. The "variable winning opening launch effect" is an effect that suggests a launch timing at which a game ball may enter the special winning opening, and may be referred to as a launch instruction effect. The time-saving game state according to this example may be that the main game time saving flag is on, or the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, that is, the time saving game state. May indicate that the opening time extension function is operating, and the non-time reduction game state may indicate that the opening time extension function is not operating. The time-reduced game state may be referred to as a specific game state, and the non-time-reduced game state may be referred to as a normal game state. Further, the probability variation game state may be referred to as a high probability lottery state, and the non-probability variation game state may be referred to as a low probability lottery state.

  The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko game machines are mixed (type 1 type 1 multifunction machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also within the range when applied to other game machines (for example, conventional first-class, second-class, third-class, pachinko game machines such as general electric officers). . Note that the present embodiment is merely an example, and the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning flags on and off, the name of the means responsible for the processing of each step, and the like, It is not limited to the following modes. Further, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification to one embodiment is a modification to another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are described independently. It should be understood that a combination of the modification and the other modification is also described. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be used as the reference table or vice versa. Further, in the present example, the term “table” is not limited to that format, and one or more selection candidates may be selected from the plurality of selection candidates based on one or more information. It should be understood that it is a mode that is associated. Furthermore, the numerical value as a specific example shown in the following embodiments and modified examples (for example, the winning probability at the time of executing the lottery, the maximum number of rounds at the special game, the symbol variation time, the number of continuations in each game state, etc.) is This is merely an example, and in particular, different conditions (for example, conditions of the first main game side and second main game side, conditions of probability variation game and non-probability variation game, time reduction game It is understood that the magnitude relations and combinations of the numerical values shown in (in terms of conditions such as the time shortening game, etc.) may be appropriately changed unless they largely deviate from the spirit of the following embodiments and modified examples. Should. For example, in the first main game side and the second main game side, the relationship between the winning probability at the time of executing the lottery and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of the special game is the first main game side = the second main game side. Even if it is illustrated as such, the size relationship may be changed appropriately such that the first main game side <the second main game side, or the first main game side> the second main game side. Good (same for other values and conditions). Also, for example, when configuring as the number of continuation of the probability variation game state based on the meaning that it continues until the next big hit occurs, is "65535" set as the number of continuation (configured to substantially continue), Alternatively, even if the realization method options based on the same purpose, such as maintaining the probability variation game state until the next big hit occurs without setting the number of continuations, as long as it does not largely deviate from the spirit of the following embodiment or modification example Should be understood to be appropriately changed. The time-saving game state according to this example may be that the main game time saving flag is on or the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, that is, the time saving game state. May indicate that the opening time extension function is operating, and the non-time reduction game state may indicate that the opening time extension function is not operating. The time-reduced game state may be referred to as a specific game state, and the non-time-reduced game state may be referred to as a normal game state. Further, the probability variation game state may be referred to as a high probability lottery state, and the non-probability variation game state may be referred to as a low probability lottery state.

  Here, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described before describing each component. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Pachinko game machines are mainly composed of a game machine frame and a game board. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

  First, the gaming machine frame of the Pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball plate D20, a lower ball plate D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame body for fixing the pachinko game machine at a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body that is aligned with the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for firing a game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating the game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is openably and closably attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball dish D20 has a mechanism for storing the game balls, sending out the game balls to the launch rail, and extracting the game balls to the lower ball dish D22. The lower ball plate D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. In addition, a sub-input button SB that can change the effect mode by the player's operation is provided on a partial surface of the bowl unit D17 (the upper surface of the upper bowl D20 in this example).

  Next, the game board has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. Then, in the game area D30, a mechanism such as a plurality of game nails and a windmill (not shown) and various general winning openings, a first main game starting opening A10, a second main game starting opening B10, an auxiliary game starting opening H10, First big winning opening C10, second big winning opening C20, first main game symbol display device A20, second main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out mouth D36 is installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

  Next, the first main game starting opening A10 is installed as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game starting opening A10 includes a first main game starting opening entrance detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball into the first main game start opening A10, and the first main game start that indicates the entrance of the game ball Generates mouth entrance information.

  Next, the second main game starting port B10 is installed as a starting winning port corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game starting port B10 includes a second main game starting port entrance detection device B11s and a second main game starting port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball into the second main game start opening B10, and the second main game start that indicates the entrance of the game ball Generates mouth entrance information. Next, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d is changed to a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to win the second main game starting opening B10 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win than the normal state.

  Here, in this embodiment, the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10 are arranged so as to overlap with each other, and the presence of the first main game starting opening A10 causes the second main game starting. The upper part of the mouth B10 is closed. The game ball flowing down the game area D30 is configured to be guided to the first main game starting opening A10 and the second main game starting opening B10 from either the right side or the left side.

  In the present embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the second main game starting opening B10 side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric accessory is provided on the first main game starting opening A10 side. May be. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 are arranged so as to overlap, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game starting port A10 and the first main game starting port A10 are arranged. The two main game starting ports B10 may be separated from each other.

  Next, the auxiliary game starting opening H10 is provided with an auxiliary game starting opening entrance detecting device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start entrance ball detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the auxiliary game start entrance H10, and generates the auxiliary game start entrance ball information that indicates the entrance of the game ball. To do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game starting port H10 is a trigger for a lottery for expanding the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting port B10.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game starting opening H10, and the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) The game ball flowing down is configured to be difficult to be guided to the auxiliary game starting port H10. The arrangement of the auxiliary game starting opening H10 is not limited to that of this example, and is arranged so that the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game starting opening H10. It is also possible to provide two auxiliary game starting ports H10 and to flow down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area), with the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). Either of them may be configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game starting port H10.

  Next, the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are provided on the upper right of the outlet D36. Before reaching the outlet D36, it is configured to easily pass through the area where the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20 are arranged.

  Next, the first big winning opening C10 is in the open state when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is a big hit symbol and is in a horizontal rectangular shape, and has an outlet port. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right of D36. As a specific configuration, the first special winning opening C10 is a first special winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a first special winning opening electric prize C11d (and a first big winning). Mouth electric accessory solenoid C13). Here, the 1st special winning opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the 1st special winning opening C10, and the 1st big winning opening entering information that indicates that entering the ball. To generate. The first special winning opening electric prize C11d changes the first special winning opening C10 into a normal state in which the game balls cannot be won or difficult to win in the first special winning port C10 and an open state in which the game balls are easy to win (the first (1) Special winning opening The electric accessory solenoid C13 is excited to be changed). In addition, in the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a lateral rectangular shape and is a mode in which the game ball can be changed to a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to In that case, for example, a mode in which a bar-shaped member provided in the special winning opening can be in an advanced state in which it is projected toward the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted with respect to the player side (so-called, Bello-type attacker), or as a mode (so-called slide-type attacker) in which the opening on the passage through which the game ball can roll can be used as a special winning opening and the opening can be closed or opened. It is often suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the second special winning opening C20, the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is open when the jackpot symbol stops, forming a horizontal rectangular shape out It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right of the mouth D36. As a specific configuration, the second special winning opening C20 is a second special winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second special winning opening electric prize C21d (and a second special winning prize). Mouth electric accessory solenoid C23). Here, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second special winning opening C20, and the second big winning opening entry information indicating the entry when entering. To generate. And the game ball which entered into the second big winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second big winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, in the second special winning opening electric part C21d, the second special winning opening C20 is set in the normal state where the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and the open state where the game ball is easy to win in the second special winning opening C20. Change. In addition, in the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a lateral rectangular shape and is a mode in which the game ball can be changed to a normal state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to In that case, for example, a mode in which a bar-shaped member provided in the special winning opening can be in an advanced state in which it is projected toward the player side and a retracted state in which it is retracted with respect to the player side (so-called, (Vero type attacker) or a mode in which the opening on the passage on which the game ball can roll can be used as a special winning opening and the opening can be closed or opened (so-called slide attacker) This is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). Is a device that executes the displayed information. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20), the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g), the first main game It is provided with a symbol holding display section A21h (second main game symbol holding display section B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, the number of lights of the lamp, the first main game (second main game) It corresponds to the number of reserves of the random number related to (the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol that is not executed). The first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". It is displayed with 10 types of numbers and "-" that is missing (however, it is not limited to this, and a 7-segment LED is used so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. In addition, the number of holdings is not limited to the display of four lamps, and the holding number of up to four can be displayed (for example, one lamp is used. Number 1: lighting, hold number 2: low speed blinking, hold number 3: medium speed blinking, hold number 4: high speed blinking).

  Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have a directing role, in the present embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The size of is set to be inconspicuous. However, when adopting a method in which the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) itself has a directing role and does not display the first decorative symbol (second decorative symbol), a later-described effect A liquid crystal display such as the display device SG may be configured to display the first main game symbol (second main game symbol).

  Next, the effect display device SG is a device for displaying an effect image including a decorative pattern that fluctuates / stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol / second main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which the effect is executed including the variable display of the decorative symbol and the like. Here, the display area SG10 is a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbols that mimics a game of a slot machine, for example, with a first holding display unit SG12 (and a second holding display unit SG13) that displays main game holding information. And a decorative pattern display area SG11 for displaying. Although the effect display device SG is composed of a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, it may be composed of other display means such as a mechanical drum or LED. Next, the 1st reservation display part SG12 (and the 2nd reservation display part SG13) is comprised from four lamps, and the said lamp is interlocked with the reservation lamp of the main game symbol.

  Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes a display related to the auxiliary game symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lights of the lamp corresponds to the number of holding the auxiliary game symbol variations (the number of auxiliary game symbol variations not executed).

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as the flow path of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in the game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role by flashing or the like. In addition, a speaker D24 is provided between the D14 and the game effect lamp D26, and a sound effect according to the game state or the like is output. Also, in this example, when left-handed (shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left side of the board), right-handed (shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the right side of the board) When the game ball is configured to be able to flow down near the second main game starting port B10 during execution, and the game ball is difficult to enter the auxiliary game starting port H10 during execution of a left hit, the left hit is substantially achieved. It is difficult to enter the second main game starting opening B10 at the time of execution (because the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d is closed), and easy to enter the second main game starting opening B10 at the time of right-hand execution ( The second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is open). Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the position of the second main game starting opening B10 is located on the right side of the board, that is, it is difficult for the game ball to reach the vicinity of the second main game starting opening B10 when performing left-handing, and when performing right-handing. 2 The game ball may be configured to easily reach the vicinity of the main game starting opening B10.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 2, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and particularly controls overall gaming operations such as lottery when entering the first main game starting opening A10 (second main game starting opening B10) (that is, the game. Production control means (sub-main control) that performs display control and the like on the main control board M that performs the control directly related to the profit of the person) and the production display device SG that adds interest to the inside of the game U Part) SM, a sub-sub-control part SS that mainly performs an effect display, a prize ball tank KT, a prize ball rail KR, and a game ball supplied from the prize ball tank KT in response to winning of each prize hole. A prize ball payout device (set base) KE including a payout unit KE10 for paying out to the plate D20, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling the payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game ball (reserved ball) for the upper ball plate D20. The game area D30 A launching device D42 that launches one ball at a time, a launching control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launching device D42, a power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine, and the power of the pachinko gaming machine is turned on / off. A power switch Ea, etc., which is a switch, is provided on the rear surface of the front frame D14 (on the side opposite to the game side).

  Next, an electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment pays out the game balls based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled and the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M, various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation and stop of the decorative pattern, sound from the speaker D24, A sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control section SM and the sub-sub-control section SS are arranged on one board) that controls the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, the execution of error notification, etc., and these A power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board is mainly configured. Here, the sub-control board S controls the sub-main control section SM for controlling various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of the decorative pattern, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub-control unit SS that executes display processing such as variable display / stop display of the decorative pattern on the effect display device SG, and hold display, notice display, and the like. The main control board M, the prize-ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control section SM, and the sub-sub-control section SS have a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, a ROM that stores a program that prescribes the arithmetic processes of the CPU, and a CPU. A RAM for temporarily storing data (various data generated during a game, a computer program read from a ROM, etc.) handled by is mounted. The schematic configuration of each board and the electrical connection mode between each board and device will be outlined below.

  First, the main control board M, the winning opening sensor Ns {the above-mentioned first main game starting mouth entrance detecting device A11s, second main game starting entrance detecting device B11s, auxiliary game starting entrance detecting device H11s, 1 big winning opening winning detection device C11s, 2nd big winning opening winning detecting device C21s, general winning detecting device (not shown, the general winning opening is a winning opening, but there is no prize lottery }), Drive solenoids (not shown) (the above-described first special winning opening electric auditors solenoid C13, the second special winning entrance electric auditors solenoid C23, etc.), information display LEDs (not shown), etc. It is electrically connected to an input / output device which is essential to, and controls the progress of the game based on the input signal from each input device. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control section SM / sub-sub control section SS), and based on the progress of the game, the prize-ball payout. It is configured such that information (commands) related to etc. can be transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) related to the production / game progress state etc. can be transmitted to the sub control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M is connected by wiring to the hall computer HC via the external connection terminal. Is configured to output game-related information from an external device.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown by the arrows in FIG. 3, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to be capable of bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub-main board are provided. The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between the control boards (between the control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication. The main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH output game-related information and payout-related information to the hall computer HC as external output information via an external relay terminal board (not shown) (on the side of the hall computer HC). One-way communication to output to) is configured.

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes payout of game balls, and a device that can be operated by the player and accepts a request for paying out the game balls to the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R for transmitting. Further, although not shown, in the present embodiment, a control circuit section of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launching device (the launch handle, the launch motor, and the ball feeding device). Etc.) are also connected. In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is provided separately from the game machine, but it may be integrated with the game machine. In that case, the prize ball payout control board KH is used for lending. The control and management control of the recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be centralized.

  Next, the sub-control board S is connected to the effect display device SG for displaying a decorative pattern or the like, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and the other effect drive device (not shown) as described above. . In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-control board S has the sub-main control section SM and the sub-sub-control section SS, and the sub-main control section SM controls the sound output from the speaker D24 and the game effect ( Lighting control of the (illumination) lamp D26 and determination control of display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub controller SS. Is configured. In addition, in the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S, but the configuration is not limited to this (configured as a separate board. Although it may be possible, there is an advantage in that it is possible to reduce the situation in which noise is mixed in the wiring and the like by configuring it as an integrated unit). Further, the work sharing in both control units can be changed as appropriate, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when a voice control circuit is integrated with the VDP). Further, an electronic value may be given as the award ball without giving a physical award ball.

  Next, various functions of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to a game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first / second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), The sub main control section SM (sub game control means SM) relating to the effect, and the prize ball payout control board KH for controlling the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout instruction from the main control board M, are communicably connected. ing. Further, the sub-main control section SM (sub-game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub-sub-control section SS (production display means SS) for performing image production, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), a speaker D24, etc. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to the prize ball payout device KE including a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, the sub main control section SM (sub game control means SM), the sub sub control section SS (effect display means SS), the prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in terms of hardware. ROM and RAM, and elements such as CPU used for arithmetic processing. Incidentally, each unit which will be included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be mounted on the main control board M. Hereinafter, the details of each means (device) will be described.

  The "random number" in the claims and the specification is, for example, "0" to "65535" or "0" to "0" assigned depending on the type of random number (for example, winning random number or variation mode determining random number). This is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as "255". Further, the random number need not be a mathematically generated random number, but may be a pseudo random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, a method of expressing each value in a random number is a method of sequentially expressing a value along a sequence of random numbers (plus one method), and the next value when the final value of the sequence of random numbers appears (initial value). ) Is defined by a random value (initial value updating method), a combination thereof, and the like.

  Further, the limited frequency, the type and / or selection rate of the variation mode of the main game symbol after the specific symbol is stopped and displayed is the variation mode of the main game symbol before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state (limited frequency state) different from the type and / or the selection rate, and continues for a predetermined period. Further, the table referred to when determining the variation mode related to the main game symbol in the limited frequency state is referred to as a limited frequency table, the limited frequency table may have a plurality of types, the game state and the special game end The limited frequency table to be referred to is determined by the number of changes in the subsequent main game symbol. Further, when the limited frequency table X and the limited frequency table Y are provided as limited frequency tables, the limited frequency table Y is referred to from the state in which the limited frequency table X is referred to (also referred to as the limited frequency X state). Switching to the existing state (also referred to as the limited frequency Y state) is referred to as the transition of the limited frequency state. It should be noted that there can be a plurality of limited frequency states even in one game state, that is, a probability variation game state and a time reduction game state, a probability variation game state and a non-time reduction game state, and a non-probability variation game state and time. Shortened gaming state, non-probability variation gaming state and non-time shortened gaming state are configured to have a plurality of limited frequency states even in any one of the four gaming states, and one gaming state At one or more times, the limited frequency state transitions, that is, the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, the probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state, the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, A non-probability variation game state and a non-time shortening game state, and even in any one of the four game states, the limited frequency state may be transited once or a plurality of times.When determining the variation mode of the main game symbol by referring to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table (sometimes referred to as the limited frequency table), a different limited frequency table when the limited frequency states are different The table may be configured to refer to (a table in which the selection candidates of the variation mode are all different or partially different), or the selection rate of the variation mode may be different by referring to a common limited frequency table (that is, a selection target). The variation mode itself is the same, but the selection rate is different) (or the variation mode to be selected and the selection rate are the same, but the variation time value according to the selected variation mode is further fixed). A method of adding values) may be adopted.

  Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a first / second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C (decrement counter) that can be cleared to zero. Further, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment further includes an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time. In addition, the pachinko game machine which relates to this execution form has the 2nd main game starting mouth electric auditors thing opening timer MP22t-B which measures the drive (opening) time of the 2nd main game starting mouth electric auditors thing B11d. There is. In addition, the pachinko game machine which relates to this execution form has the winning a prize sphere counter MP33c which measures the winning a prize to the 1st large winning a prize mouth C10 and the 2nd large winning a prize mouth C20. The special game time management means MP34 further has a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time.

Here, the pachinko game machine according to the present example has a probability variation number counter MP51c capable of counting the probability variation number and a time saving number counter MP52c capable of counting the time saving number. Here, the "specific game" is, for example, a probability variation game in which the probability of a lottery for a special game is higher than in a normal game, or a time-reducing game in which the variation time of the main game symbol is relatively shorter than in a normal game. Point to.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the time shortening game, the variation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened as compared with the non-time shortening game (time reduction. function). Furthermore, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is also relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the second main game starting port electric auditorium product B11d is relatively extended (opening time extension function). In addition, the time reduction game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number. That is, the time saving number is configured to be subtracted for each variation (stop) of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Incidentally, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment may have a function of performing a lottery for shifting from a specific game (for example, a probability varying game or a time-reducing game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability each time there is a variation in the symbol. Good (so-called, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a falling lottery function).

  Next, the game peripheral device will be described. Since the detailed configurations of some peripheral devices have already been described, the remaining configurations will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral device, the first main game peripheral device A is a peripheral device of the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B is a peripheral device of the second main game side, the first main game side And the first and second main game shared peripheral device C, which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, the auxiliary game peripheral device H related to the auxiliary game, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, the sub sub control unit. It has SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effect controlled by the sub-main control unit SM is the result of the game, including the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol in a time synchronized form. It relates to the display of only information that does not affect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A, the first main game start opening A10 that triggers the transition of the special game, and the first main game symbol display device A20 capable of stop display and variable display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B, the second main game start opening B10 that triggers the transition of the special game, and the second main game symbol display device B20 that can display the stop and change of the second main game symbol. And have.

  Next, the first / second main game common peripheral device C is in a closed state during a normal game, and is opened under predetermined conditions during a special game (big hit). And has a second big winning opening C20.

  Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H, the second main game starting port of the second main game starting port B10, the auxiliary game starting port H10 that triggers the opening of the electric accessory B11d, and the stop display and the variable display of the auxiliary game symbol. It has a possible auxiliary game symbol display device H20.

  Here, the design variation time management timer SM21t is configured to measure the variation time of the decorative symbol.

  Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG that displays the image related to the effect based on the information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

  Here, the display area SG10 has a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying a decorative symbol, and a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) for displaying main game hold information. ing.

  The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so that information can be transmitted, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit). ) SS is connected to the sub game control means (sub main control section) SM so as to be capable of transmitting information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS, the sub game control. It means that it is controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via another peripheral device that is controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication) with the main control board M.

  Next, FIG. 4 is a main flowchart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After the power of the game machine is turned on, the process of FIG. That is, after turning on the power of the gaming machine and performing initial settings (not shown), in step 1002, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button and resets the reset button of the power supply unit E ( It is determined whether or not the RAM clear button) has been operated, that is, whether or not the administrator of the game arcade intentionally performed an operation to clear the contents of the RAM. In the case of Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears all RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control section SM side (transmission at that timing). Alternatively, the command may be set at the timing and transmitted in the control command transmitting process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1002, in step 1008, the CPU MC of the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power interruption and saving in the RAM area). Comparison with the amount of information that is provided). Next, in step 1010, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are not normal based on the check result (whether or not the information at the time of power interruption is accurately backed up in the RAM). To do. If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores the data (backup) in the RAM of the main control board M when the power is cut off. Various information commands are acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (may be transmitted at the timing, or the command may be set at the timing and described later). The control command transmission process may be used for transmission), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, at step 1016, the CPUMC of the main control board M triggers an execution scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in the present example, the interrupt period is set to T) (as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, the process shown in FIG. 9B is executed), and the random number update in step 1018 is performed. The process shifts to, for example, a random number counter increment process. After step 1018, the CPU MC of the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. The CPU MC of the main control board M executes the process shown in FIG. 9B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, when the scheduled interrupt period T is reached (for example, a hardware interrupt about every 1.5 ms), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later in step 1100. . Next, in step 1200, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an electric auditors product drive determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game operating condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, in step 1997, the CPUMC of the main control board M (particularly, the prize ball payout determination means MH) performs a prize ball payout control process (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the winning opening in which the game ball wins. The prize payout control board KH is caused to execute the processing, and the processing for managing the result) is executed. Next, in step 1998, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes an output process of an external signal (information output to the external terminal board, the hall computer HC, etc.). Next, in step 1999, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each process described above to the sub-main control unit SM side), and immediately before execution of this interrupt process. Return to the process that was being executed.

  Next, the NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the CPUMC of the main control board M is configured such that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and when the power is turned off in the gaming machine, the processing of FIG. Is executed. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is shut down (in this example, at the time of NMI interrupt), in step 1020, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the power-off information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. . Next, in step 1022, the CPUMC of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

  Next, FIG. 5 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered (inflow, in the case of a gate) the auxiliary game starting opening H10. If Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls is the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the CPU MC of the main control board M acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the holding sphere in a form of temporarily storing the random number in the RAM area of the main control board M together with the information on the number of holdings. The process shifts to the next process (process of step 1200). Even if No in Step 1102 and Step 1104, the process proceeds to the next process (process in Step 1200).

  Next, FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the electric accessory opening flag is off. If Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a reserve ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. If Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the game state of the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag), and the acquired game state of the auxiliary game side and the acquired state. Auxiliary game symbol win based on the hold ball Determines the stop symbol based on a random number (for example, when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when it is off) and main control It is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the substrate M.

  Here, the right side of the figure is an example of the auxiliary game stop symbol determination lottery table. As shown in the table, in this example, the stop symbol "D0, D1" is present, and the stop symbol which is a winning symbol is "D1", and each of them is released due to the stop. In the non-time shortening game, when the stopped symbol is “D1”, the opening mode of the electric accessory becomes (0.2 seconds open → closed). Further, at the time shortening game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (0.2 seconds open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 3.0 seconds closed → 4. It is configured to be open for 0 seconds → closed). The stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol "D0" during the non-time-reducing game, and the stop symbol is likely to be a hit symbol "D1" during the time-reducing game.

  Next, in step 1218, the CPUMC of the main control board M, based on the game state of the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag), the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H variation time of the auxiliary game symbol A predetermined time (for example, 1 second when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, 10 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the pending information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M (subtracts the auxiliary game holding ball by 1), and for auxiliary game symbol variation management. After starting the timer MP11t-H, the variable display of the auxiliary game symbol is started on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g.

  Next, in step 1224, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. If Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and confirms the stop symbol of the acquired auxiliary game symbol on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g. To do. Then, in step 1228, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is "hit" (D1 in this example). If Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the CPUMC of the main control board M, based on the game state and the stop symbol on the auxiliary game side, the opening mode of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d (for example, the winning symbol " When "D1" is stopped, if the auxiliary game time shortened flag is off, it is an opening mode of "0.2 seconds open → closed", and if the auxiliary game time shortened flag is on, "0.2 second". Open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 3.0 seconds closed → 4.0 seconds open → closed ") and set a predetermined time related to the opening time (opening and closing time) of the electric accessory. The second main game starting opening sets the electric accessory release timer MP22t-B. Next, in step 1234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the electric accessory opening flag. Then, in step 1236, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second main game electric auditors object B11d of the second main game starting opening B10 {based on the opening mode determined in step 1232, the second main game start. The mouth electric accessory B11d is opened (or closed)}. Next, in step 1238, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it has reached the opening end timing of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d. If Yes in step 1238, in step 1240 and step 1242, the CPU MC of the main control board M closes the second main gaming electric auditors product B11d of the second main gaming starting port B10, and sets the electric auditors open flag. It is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1300).

  In addition, if No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1238, if No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224, and if No in step 1206, step 1224, step 1230, or step 1238, the next process The process proceeds to (processing of step 1300).

  Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, immediately after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process proceeds to the next step, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next process after a stop display fixed time of about 500 ms (for example, this process is performed by performing a branch process using a stop display fixed flag and a timer). Achievable).

  Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it has received the first main game starting mouth entrance information from the first main game starting entrance detecting device A11s of the first main game starting mouth A10. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls regarding the main game (particularly the first main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the CPU MC of the main control board M acquires the first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, the winning / non-winning lottery random number for determining the win / fail, the symbol lottery random number for determining the winning symbol, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. Three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random number for performing are acquired. By the way, these three random numbers are generated by random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, and are sequentially acquired at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the CPU MC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1310, the CPU MC of the main control board M sends a command transmission buffer for transmitting information (holding generation command) indicating that the first main game content determination random number has been acquired to the sub-main control section SM. It is set in MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999).

  Next, in step 1312, the CPUMC of the main control board M has received the second main game starting mouth entrance information from the second main game starting entrance detecting device B11s of the second main starting mouth B10. To judge. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls regarding the main game (particularly the second main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers, that is, the winning / missing lottery random number, the symbol lottery random number, and the variation mode lottery random number are acquired, as in the first main game content determining means. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game side and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game side (for example, the acquisition range of the win / loss lot number for the first main game and the win / loss lot number for the second main game) Are set to the same. Next, in step 1318, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number in the RAM area. Next, in step 1320, the CPU MC of the main control board M sends a command transmission buffer for transmitting information (holding generation command) indicating that the second main game content determination random number has been acquired to the sub-main control section SM. It is set in MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). Note that if No in steps 1302 and 1304, the process proceeds to step 1312, and if No in steps 1312 and 1314, the next process (the process of step 1400) is performed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, as information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in steps 1310 and 1320, information indicating that a random number has been acquired is transmitted, but the information of the random number value and the main game symbol are transmitted. The number of reservations may be added and transmitted, and the information indicating that the random number has been obtained may be used as a substitute for the information.

  Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms whether or not there is a hold of the second main game symbol. If Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a first main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 1600}. On the other hand, if No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a second main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 1600}.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a reserve ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the reserve ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the retention of the first main game symbol) Is also configured first, the second main game symbol is configured to execute the pending digest of priority, but is not limited to this (first primary game symbol reserve digest may be prioritized, It may be configured to execute a hold lotion based on the winning order or a parallel lottery in which both main game symbols are simultaneously drawn in parallel).

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display processing (second main game symbol display processing), which is related to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since this process is substantially the same as the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the fluctuation start condition is that the special game is not being performed (or the condition device is operating), and the main game symbol is not being changed, and the condition that the main game symbol is held is present. Although not shown in this example, if a variable fixed time (after the fixed display of the main game symbol is displayed, the fixed display symbol is stopped and displayed) is provided, during the variable fixed time, the variation start condition of the next variation May not be satisfied.

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, in step 1405 and step 1406, the CPU MC of the main control board M is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and the first main game content determination random number related to the present symbol variation ( While reading the second main game content determination random number), the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) is deleted, and the remaining information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M is displayed. Shift (hold digestion process). Next, in step 1408, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the main game symbol winning / winning lottery based on the first main game content determining random number (second main game content determining random number) (particularly, winning lottery random number).

  Here, FIG. 10 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game win / loss lottery table (second main game win / loss lottery table). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability varying gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability varying gaming state. The winning probability is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is not provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a small hit may be provided on the first main game side and / or the second main game side.

  Next, in step 1410, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the main game based on the main game symbol winning and drawing lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, symbol lottery random number). Stop symbols related to the symbols are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area.

  Here, FIG. 10 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game stop symbol determination lottery table (second main game stop symbol determination lottery table). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, from among a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "2A / 3A / 5A / 7A" and "2B / 7B") One main game symbol is configured to be determined as a jackpot symbol. The number of rounds of the special game determined with reference to the main game symbol is 2R for 2A, 4R for 2B, 3A, 5A, 8A for 7A, and 16R for 7B. That is, the number of rounds executed during the big hit is relatively larger in the big hit on the second main game side than in the big hit on the first main game side. It should be noted that the random number value and the type of the stop symbol are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. You may}.

  Next, in step 1411-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the limited frequency flag is off (whether both the limited frequency A flag and the limited frequency B flag are off). To do. If Yes in step 1411-1, in step 1412, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game symbol win / win lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, variation mode lottery). The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined based on (random number), these are temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and the process proceeds to step 1418.

  Here, FIG. 10 (main game table 3) is an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol is configured to be determined based on the win / no win result of the main game symbol. In other words, when the winning / winning lottery result of the main game symbol is a hit, the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long is easily determined. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and the types of stop symbols, the selection rate, and the like are not limited at all. Further, in the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the main game table 3 is not configured to have a different table depending on the number of reserved balls, but is configured to have a different table depending on the number of reserved balls. It goes without saying that it is good. Furthermore, in the time shortening game state (when the main game time saving flag is on), the symbol fluctuation time on the first main game side may be configured to be a relatively long time {the symbol on the second main game side When the variation is configured to be advantageous to the player, it is easy to cause the second main game side to be held by reducing the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (which is advantageous to the player. This is particularly effective in the case where the starting opening on the first main gaming side and the starting opening on the second main gaming side cannot be discriminated from each other for the purpose of constructing a situation}.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1411-1, in step 1411-2, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the limited frequency A flag is on. If Yes in step 1411-2, in step 1450, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the limited frequency A variation mode determination process described later, and proceeds to step 1418. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1411-2, that is, when the limited frequency B flag is ON, in step 1500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the limited frequency B variation mode determination process described later, and then in step 1418. Move to.

  Next, in step 1418, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the command (stop symbol information, attribute information of the stop symbol, variation mode information, etc.) related to the main game symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control substrate M, and A command relating to the current game state (design variation display start instruction command) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (by the control command transmission process of step 1999, the sub-main control unit SM side Sent to). Next, in step 1420, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. Next, in step 1422, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On B21g), according to the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, the variation display of the main game symbol is started. Next, in step 1424, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the changing flag, and proceeds to step 1428.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1403, in step 1426, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the changing flag is on. If Yes in step 1426, the process moves to step 1428, and if No in step 1426, the process moves to the next process (process of step 1600).

  Next, in step 1428, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1428, in step 1430, the CPU MC of the main control board M transmits information (symbol finalization display instruction command) indicating that the symbol variation is finished to the command transmission for transmitting to the sub main control section SM side. It is set in the buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1432, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). B21g) stops the variable display of the main game symbol, and controls the display of the stop symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M as the fixed stop symbol. Next, in step 1434, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the changing flag.

  Next, in step 1436, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. If Yes in step 1436, in step 1438, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to step 1550. On the other hand, if No in step 1436, the process moves to step 1550.

  Next, in step 1550, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a specific game end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1600). Even if No in step 1428, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the limited frequency A variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. 9 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1452, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol by referring to the limited frequency table 1 based on the random number on the main game side and the winning / winning lottery result. Next, in step 1454, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a limited frequency A command (a command to the sub control board S side and a command relating to the variable time relating to the determined main game symbol) (step 1999). It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process). Next, in step 1456, the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the limited frequency A counter MN52c-1. Next, in step 1458, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the count value of the limited frequency A counter MN52c-1 is zero. If Yes in step 1458, in step 1460, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the limited frequency A flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1418). Even if No in step 1458, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1418).

  Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the limited frequency B variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 9 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1502, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the counter value G of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 is within the first stage range (the limited frequency that is the first stage in the limited frequency state having three stages). It is determined whether or not it is within the range of the counter value of the B counter MN52c-2 and 100 ≧ G> 90). In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the random number on the main game side and the result of the lottery, and refers to the limited frequency table 1 to change the main game symbol (change time). Is determined and the process proceeds to step 1512.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1502, in step 1506, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that the counter value G of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 is within the second stage range (in the limited frequency state having three stages). It is determined whether or not it is within the range of the counter value of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2, which is the second stage, and 90 ≧ G> 1). If Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the random number on the main game side and the result of the lottery, and refers to the limited frequency table 2 to change the main game symbol (change time). Is determined and the process proceeds to step 1512. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1506, in other words, the counter value G of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 is within the third stage range (the limited frequency B counter which is the third stage in the limited frequency state having three stages). If it is within the range of the counter value of MN52c-2 and G = 1), in step 1510, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the limited frequency based on the random number on the main game side, the result of the lottery, and the number of holdings. The table 3 is referred to, the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to 1512.

  Next, in step 1512, the CPU MC of the main control board M issues the limited frequency B command {a command to the sub control board S side and a command relating to the variation mode (variation time) regarding the determined main game symbol}. It is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and in step 1514, the CPU MC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2. , And proceeds to the processing of step 1516. Next, in step 1516, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the count value of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1516, in step 1518, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the limited frequency B flag, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1418). Even if No in step 1516, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1418). As described above, in the present embodiment, two types of limited frequency states (a limited frequency A state in which the counter value of the limited frequency A counter MN52c-1 is decremented and a counter value of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 are decremented are subtracted. Has a limited frequency B state).

  Next, FIG. 13 is an example of the limited frequency tables 1 to 3. First, the limitation frequency table 1 will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, when the counter value G of the limitation frequency B counter MN52c-2 is a value within a predetermined range (100 ≧ G> 90), or the limitation frequency A When the counter value of the counter MN52c-1 is larger than 0, the limited frequency table 1 is referred to. The tables referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Further, the variation time at the time of hit is relatively longer than the variation time at the time of losing. It should be noted that, when compared with the limited frequency table 2 and the limited frequency table 3, the limited frequency table 1 is configured to have the shortest average fluctuation time. Further, the limited frequency table 1 is configured to refer to a similar table regardless of the number of reserved balls. Further, in the present embodiment, when the state refers to the limited frequency table 1, the limited frequency table 2 or the limited frequency table 3, that is, the limited frequency A state or the limited frequency B state, it becomes a time-saving game state. That is, the second main game symbol is mainly changed and the game is configured to proceed (the hold on the second main game side is preferentially digested). Regarding the description of the number of holdings in the figure, in the table referred to when determining the variation mode of the first main game side, it is the number of reserves of the first main game side, and the variation mode of the second main game side. In the table that is referred to when determining, it is the number of holdings on the second main game side.

  Next, the limitation frequency table 2 will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, when the counter value G of the limitation frequency B counter MN52c-2 is within a predetermined range (90 ≧ G> 1), the limitation frequency table 2 is referred to. The tables referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Further, the variation time at the time of hit is relatively longer than the variation time at the time of losing (it is easy to select a table having a long variation time). It should be noted that the limited frequency table 2 is configured such that the average variation time is the longest as compared with the limited frequency table 1 and the limited frequency table 3. Further, in the limited frequency table 2, the average fluctuation time at the time of loss is shorter when there are two or three holding balls than when there are zero or one holding balls.

  Next, the limiting frequency table 3 will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, the limiting frequency table 3 is referred to when the counter value G of the limiting frequency counter MN52c-2 is within a predetermined range (G = 1). The tables referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Further, the variation time that can be selected in the limited frequency table 3 is only one type, and is constant regardless of the winning / losing lottery result and the number of reserved balls.

  The content of the limited frequency table is not limited to this, and the content of the limited frequency table to be referred to by the first main game side and the second main game side only at a predetermined stage (for example, the first stage). You may comprise so that it may become the same. Further, at a predetermined stage (for example, the third stage), the variation mode may be determined regardless of the number of holdings (on both the first main game side and the second main game side). If not so configured, the first main game side selects the variation mode from the same table regardless of the number of holdings, and the second main game side, when the number of holdings is a predetermined number or more, the number of holdings It is desirable to configure so that the variation time is relatively shorter than when the number is less than or equal to a predetermined number.

  In the present embodiment, there are three types of limited frequency tables, and the configuration is such that “limited frequency table 1 → limited frequency table 2 → limited frequency table 3” is switched in three stages in this order (so-called three-stage ST). The number of types of the limited frequency table is not limited, and the order of the referenced tables can be changed without any problem. Further, as a mode of three-stage ST, it has two tables, a limited frequency table 1 and a limited frequency table 2, and references tables are switched in the order of limited frequency table 1 → limited frequency table 2 → limited frequency table 1. Good.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the configuration of the limited frequency may be configured as follows.
(1) In the limited frequency state (limited frequency A state or limited frequency B state) to determine the variation time of the first main game symbol (the first main game symbol varies), on the first main game side It does not depend on the number of holdings, that is, when the variation time of the first main game symbol is determined by referring to the limitation frequency table 2, the content of the limitation frequency table 2 relating to the first main game symbol is the first main game. It is configured not to depend on the number of holdings on the side (for example, regardless of the number of holdings on the first main game side, refer to the table when the number of holdings of the limited frequency table 2 in FIG. 13 is 0 or 1). Be done).
(2) Regarding the limited frequency table 1, as in the limited frequency table 2, the contents of the table to be referred to may differ depending on the number of holdings (the number of holdings on the second main game side).
(3) When shifting to the limited frequency B state, the limited frequency table referred to first may be the limited frequency table 2.
(4) In FIG. 13, for the portions having the same time value in the table referred to in the case of a hit and the table referred to in the case of a loss, the time value in the case of a hit is more than the time value in the case of a loss. May be changed over a long period of time. For example, the limited frequency table 3 is configured to select 5 seconds for both winning and losing, but for the limiting frequency table 3, 6 for winning. Seconds may be configured to be 5 seconds when lost. With such a configuration, it is possible to secure the time for notifying the player that the player has won.
(5) The period for referring to the limited frequency table 3 may be plural variations (preferably less than 10 variations). For example, when the limited frequency counter value is 1 to 5, the limited frequency table 3 is referred to. You may.
(6) All the tables in the figure (all the tables referred to in the case of hitting, losing, holding 0 to 1 and holding 2 to 3 in the limited frequency tables 1 to 3 and 16 tables) For any one of the tables), the variation time candidates may be increased by another type, for example, all the tables may have two or more variation time candidates. In such a configuration, as an example of the time value to be added, a time value that is twice as long as the longest time value that each table has may be added. In that case, the random value range is the longest time value. The random value range of the time value may be halved. For example, when changing the table contents at the time of losing on the second main game side in the limited frequency table 1, "random number value 0 to 799 → 1 second", "random number value 800 to 911 → 3 seconds", "random number value" 912 to 1023 → 6 seconds ”.

Further, in a configuration in which the limited frequency table (limited frequency state) referred to in the probability variation gaming state (or time shortened gaming state) is transited, the limited frequency X state and limited frequency table Y referencing the limited frequency table X are displayed. When the limited frequency Y state is referred to,
(1) In the limited frequency Y state, the average value of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation that causes a loss when the number of holdings is the first number of holdings (for example, 0), and the number of holdings is the second number of holdings (for example, 3). The difference between the average value of the variation time of the symbol variation and the average value of the predetermined period causes a difference in the average value of the predetermined period.
(2) In the limited frequency X state, the average value of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation that causes a loss when the number of holdings is the first number of holdings (for example, 0), and the number of holdings is the second number of holdings (for example, 3). The difference between the average value of the variation time of the symbol variation and the average value in the predetermined period does not occur.
(3) The second hold number (for example, 3) in the limited frequency Y state is most selected rather than the variation time that is the most likely to be lost in the second hold number (for example, 3) in the limited frequency X state. The fluctuation time, which is easily lost, becomes longer.
(4) The limited frequency Y state stays longer than the limited frequency X state (the number of fluctuations).
(5) The specific effect that can be displayed in the limited frequency Y state is not displayed in the limited frequency X state.
(6) In the time shortening game state, the prefetch effect related to the first main game side is not displayed.
(7) Although there are multiple effect display formats (stay stages) in the limited frequency Y state, there is only one effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency X state.
(8) The effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency Y state and the effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency X state are different in type.
It may be configured as follows. Also, a plurality of these configurations may be combined, or only one may be applied. It should be noted that each limited frequency state only needs to stay for a period in which one or more symbol variations are executed (at least stay for a period in which one symbol variation is executed). As a modified example, the limited frequency X state may be a state in which the limited frequency table 1 in FIG. 13 is referred to, and the limited frequency Y state may be in a state in which the limited frequency table 2 in FIG. 13 is referred to. The X state may be referred to the limited frequency table 1 in FIG. 13, the limited frequency Y state may be referred to the limited frequency table 3 in FIG. 13, or the limited frequency X state may be referred to as the limited frequency table in FIG. 2 may be referred to and the limited frequency Y state may be referred to the limited frequency table 3 in FIG.

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. First, in step 1552, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability variation flag is off. If Yes in step 1552, in step 1570, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c is larger than 0. If Yes in step 1570, in step 1572, the CPU MC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c by 1. Next, in step 1574, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the time saving counter MP52c and determines whether the counter value is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1574, in step 1576, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the main game time saving flag. Next, in step 1578, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time saving flag and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1600). Even if No in step 1552, step 1570, or step 1574, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is ON. If Yes in step 1602, in step 1604, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the specific game flag (main game probability change flag / main game short time flag / auxiliary game short time flag). Next, in step 1606, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the value of the time saving counter MP52c to zero. Next, in step 1608, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter values of the limited frequency A counter MN52c-1 and the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 to zero. Next, in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the limited frequency A flag and the limited frequency B flag. Next, in step 1612, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game shift permission flag. Next, in step 1614, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1700). Even if No in step 1602, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1700).

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the special game control process related to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. First, in step 1702, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game shift permission flag is on. If Yes in step 1702, in steps 1704 and 1706, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the special game transition permission flag and turns on the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1707, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1708, the CPU MC of the main control board M stores in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information (special game start display instruction command) indicating that the special game is started to the sub-main control section SM side. It is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1711.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1702, in step 1710, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1710, the process moves to step 1711. In the case of No in step 1710, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that the special game permission has not been given, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997).

  Next, in step 1711, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the round currently being executed is the distribution game execution round (the second big winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 will be opened, and this example Then, it is determined whether or not it is the second round). In the case of Yes in step 1711, in step 1800, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the distribution game execution processing described later, and proceeds to step 1734. On the other hand, if No in step 1711, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines in step 1712 whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. If Yes in step 1712, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1714, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an open pattern (for example, an open pattern that continues to open, a pattern that opens and closes). To do. Next, in step 1716, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1718, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1720, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the first special winning opening electric winning combination C11d (or the second special winning opening electric winning combination C21d) of the first special winning opening C10 to make the first big winning. The winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) is opened, and the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to start, and the process proceeds to step 1722. On the other hand, if No in step 1712, that is, if the special winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1722 without performing the processes of steps 1714 to 1720.

  Next, in step 1722, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a game state command relating to the current special game (for example, the current number of rounds or the number of winning game balls) to the sub-main control unit SM side. To the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (in the control command transmission processing of step 1999, it is transmitted to the sub-main control section SM side). Next, in step 1724, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines a predetermined number (for example, 10) for the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning opening C20) in the round. It is determined whether there is a winning ball. If Yes in step 1724, the process moves to step 1728. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1724, at step 1726, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer) and the predetermined time (eg, 30 seconds) related to the opening of the special winning opening. Is determined. If Yes in step 1726, the process moves to step 1728. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1726, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1997).

  Next, in step 1728, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the first special winning opening electric prize C11d of the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning entrance electric prize C21d of the second special winning opening C20). Is stopped and the first special winning opening C10 (or the second special winning opening C20) is closed. Next, in step 1730, the CPU MC of the main control board M resets the special game timer MP34t (particularly the open time timer). Next, in step 1732, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1733, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown), and proceeds to step 1734. Next, in step 1734, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the final round has ended (for example, whether or not the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) has exceeded the maximum round number). . If Yes in step 1734, in step 1736, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1738, the CPU MC of the main control board M stores in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information indicating that the special game is to be ended (special game end display instruction command) to the sub-main control section SM side. It is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Then, in step 1750, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a game state determination process after completion of a special game described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1997). Even if No in step 1734, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing according to the subroutine of step 1800 in FIG. 16 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1802, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the distribution game in-execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1802, the process moves to step 1816. On the other hand, if No in step 1802, in step 1804, the CPU MC of the main control board M indicates that the stopped main game symbol is a long open symbol (the second big winning opening C20 is relatively long in the distribution game execution round). It is a jackpot pattern that allows the game ball to be easily released into the specific area C22 when the time is released, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 3A / 5A / 7A / 7B). If Yes in step 1804, in step 1806, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a long opening pattern (for example, opening for 15 seconds as an opening pattern of the second special winning opening C20 having the specific area C22). , An opening pattern designed to make the entry into the specific area C22 almost deterministic, and the process proceeds to step 1810. On the other hand, if No in step 1804, in other words, if the stop symbol is “2A” or “2B”, in step 1808, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second special winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. As the pattern, a short open pattern (for example, an open pattern designed to be open for 0.1 seconds and non-entering the specific area C22 is substantially definite) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1810. In addition, in the present embodiment, the long open symbol on the first main game side is "3A / 5A / 7A", and the selection rate at the time of a big hit is "524/1024", and the second main The long open symbol on the game side is "7B", and the ratio selected at the time of a big hit is "774/1024". In the distribution game execution round, the second big winning opening C20 has a high rate of being long opened, that is, the game ball is easily inserted into the specific area C22 at the time of a big hit. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine (sometimes referred to as ST machine) in which the probability variation game state ends due to the end of the number of symbol variations after the end of the big hit, the big hit symbol on the second main gaming side is You may comprise so that all may be a long open design. Also, the number of jackpot execution rounds executed by stopping the long-opening symbols "3A, 5A, 7A" on the first main game side is "8R", and the long-opening symbols on the second main game side. The number of jackpot execution rounds executed when a certain “7B” is stopped is “16R”, and the number of execution rounds is different. In addition, the number of execution rounds of the jackpot executed by stopping the short opening symbol "2A" on the first main game side is "2R", and the short opening symbol "2B" on the second main game side. The number of execution rounds of the jackpot that is executed by stopping is "4R", and the number of execution rounds is different.

  Next, in step 1810, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 1812, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution game in-execution flag. Next, in step 1814, the CPU MC of the main control board M opens the second special winning opening C20 in the set opening pattern, and proceeds to step 1816.

  Next, in step 1816, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls have been won in the second special winning opening C20. To determine. If Yes in step 1816, the process moves to step 1820. On the other hand, if No in step 1816, in step 1818, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second special winning opening C20 has ended. If Yes in step 1818, the process moves to step 1820. Next, in step 1820, the CPU MC of the main control board M closes the second special winning opening C20. Next, in step 1822, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the distribution game in-execution flag. Next, in step 1824, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a game ball entering the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. If Yes in step 1824, in step 1826, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag. Next, in step 1827, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a specific area entry command (a command to the side of the sub control board S and a command indicating that a game ball has entered the specific area C22) as the sub-main control. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the section SM side (transmitted to the sub-main control section SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the routine proceeds to step 1828. Even if No in step 1824, the process moves to step 1828. Next, in step 1828, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds (increments) 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) (ends the distribution game execution round), and performs the next process (step 1734). Process). Even if No in step 1818, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1734).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the second special winning opening C20 has the specific area C22, and the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the big hit to shift to the probability variation game state after the big hit ends. Even in such a gaming machine, the ease of entering the specific area C22 varies depending on the jackpot pattern.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot in the probability variation game state is won a predetermined number of times in succession, a gaming machine that shifts to the non-probability variation game state after the predetermined number of times of big hits is called a limiter machine. There may be any), or may be a gaming machine (so-called falling lottery machine) that executes a lottery that shifts to each variation non-stochastic variation game state in the probability variation game state.

A configuration example applicable to this embodiment will be exemplified below.
(1) The expected value of the number of prize balls in the big hit on the second main game side is larger than the expected value of the number of prize balls in the big hit on the first main game side.
(2) The ratio of the long open big hit in the big hit on the second main game side (the big hit that can easily enter the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round) is higher than the long open big hit in the big hit on the first main game side. high.
(3) The variation pattern table to be referred to after the big hit ends depends on whether or not the player hits the specific area C22 during the big hit.
(4) The transition mode of the variation pattern table to be referred to after the jackpot is different depending on whether or not to hit the specific area C22 during the jackpot (for example, jackpot A: 20 variations, table 1 → 30 variations, table 2, jackpot) B: 50 fluctuations, Table 3).
(5) Depending on whether or not to enter the specific area C22 during the big hit, whether or not to be in the probability variation game state after the big hit is different.
(6) Regardless of whether or not to enter the specific area C22 during the big hit, after the big hit ends, the game shifts to the time shortening game state.
(7) The stay stage after the big hit ends depends on whether or not the player hits the specific area C22 during the big hit.
(8) Depending on whether or not to enter the specific area C22 during the big hit, the fluctuation tendency of the final fluctuation of the time shortening game state after the big hit is different (average value of fluctuation time, effect mode, shortest fluctuation that can be selected). time).
(9) The probability variation game state can be terminated by the number of symbol variations after the jackpot is finished (so-called ST machine), and after the jackpot on the second main game side, the probability variation game state is always entered. (There may be a case where the probability variation game state does not shift to after the big hit on the first main game side).
(10) The probability variation game state is configured not to end by the number of symbol variations after the jackpot is finished, and the probability variation game state is set after the jackpot on the first main game side and the jackpot on the second main game side are also ended. There are cases where it shifts and cases where it does not shift (after the big hit on the second main game side, it is easier to shift to the probability varying game state after the big hit ends than after the big hit on the first main game side, that is, the second The big hit on the main game side is more likely than the big hit on the first main game side to be a big hit that is more likely to enter the specific area C22 in the sorting game execution round during the big hit).
In addition, since the above-described configuration is configured to shift to the probability variation game state after the jackpot ends by entering the specific area C22 in the sorting game execution round during the big hit, transition to the probability variation game state. Yes = enter the specific area C22 during the big hit, do not shift to the probability variation game state = do not enter the specific area C22 during the big hit.

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which is related to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. First, in step 1752, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability variation shift reservation flag is ON. If Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability variation shift reservation flag. Next, in step 1755, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability variation flag. Next, in step 1756, the CPU MC of the main control board M causes the hour / hour counter MP52c to have a predetermined value C (65536 in this example, which is substantially definite to continue until the next big hit). The number of times, which may be set to ∞ times), and the processing proceeds to step 1776.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1752, in step 1758, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the jackpot related to the second main game side is over. If Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the predetermined value B (100 in this example) in the time saving counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1776. On the other hand, if No in step 1758, that is, if it is after the big hit related to the first main game side, in step 1762, the CPUMC of the main control board M is after the big hit related to the short open symbol. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 1762, in step 1764 the CPU MC of the main control board M causes the time saving counter MP52c to have a predetermined value A (a value smaller than the above-described predetermined value B and predetermined value C, which is 10 in this example). Set. Next, in step 1766, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency A flag. Next, in step 1768, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value A (10 in this example) in the limited frequency A counter MN52c-1, and proceeds to step 1776. On the other hand, if No in step 1762, a predetermined value B (100 in this example) is set in the time saving counter MP52c in step 1770. Next, in step 1772, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency B flag. Next, in step 1774, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value B (100 in this example) in the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2, and proceeds to step 1776.

  Next, in step 1776, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag. Next, in step 1778, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1997). Thus, in the present embodiment, if the probability fluctuation game state does not shift after the big hit ends, in other words, if the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 during the big hit, the second main game side After the jackpot is over, the game is all shifted to the time-saving game state, and a relatively large number of time saving (100 times in this example) is given. On the other hand, after the big hit on the first main game side, after the big hit ends, the game will all shift to the time shortening game state, but the number of times that can be given is relatively large (100 times in this example). Is relatively small (10 times in this example). Further, when the probability variation game state is not transitioned to after the big hit on the first main game side, a limited frequency A state (when the limited frequency A flag is turned on may be referred to as a limited frequency A state) or limited The frequency B state (a case where the limited frequency B flag is turned on may be referred to as a limited frequency B state) is configured. In other words, when the big hit on the first main game side does not enter the specific area C22 and the non-probability variation game state shifts after the big hit ends, and the big hit on the second main game side enters the specific area C22 Without transition to the non-stochastic variation game state after the end of the big hit, whether or not to transition to the limited frequency state is different (the selection tendency of the variation mode is different).

Moreover, you may comprise as follows.
(1) Regardless of whether or not the game state selected for the special game is the time-reduced game state, when the special game is the special game on the second main game side, the time saving count is 100 times.
(2) When the special game on the first main game side is won in the time-reduced game state, the number of times saved is 100 times, while the special game on the first main game side is won in the non-time-reduced game state. On the basis of the jackpot pattern relating to the special game, the number of time saving is 60 times, 80 times, or 100 times.
(3) When the special game is won in the time shortening game state, the number of time saving is 100 regardless of the big hit symbol.
(4) The average value of the number of times saved when the special game on the first main game side is won in the time shortened game state is the number of times saved when the special game on the second main game side is won in the time shortened game state. Greater than average. In such a configuration, the second main game side is the priority digestion, and "the expected value of the number of prize balls won by the big hit on the first main game side <the expected value of the number of prize balls won by the big hit on the second main game side" When it is configured to be "," it is possible to compensate the disadvantages in the case of winning the big hit on the first main game side in the time reduction game state. In addition, in the gaming machine (so-called ball certain machine) in which the game ball enters the specific area C22 in the special winning opening during the big hit, and the probability variation game state is set after the big hit ends, the "first main game side" If the ratio of the long open big hit is <the ratio of the long open big hit on the second main game side ”, the short open big hit is won and the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the short open big hit. The number of time saving when there is no ball may be configured so that the short open big hit on the first main game side is relatively larger than the short open big hit on the second main game side. In addition, when the player wins the long open big hit on the first main game side and there is no game ball entering the specific area C22 during the long open big hit, the shorter open time on the second main game side is shorter. The number of short wins may be greater than that in the case where the big hit is won and the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 during the short open big hit. In addition, when the long open big hit on the second main game side is won and the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 during the long open big hit, the shorter time is the shorter open on the first main game side. The number of short wins may be greater than that in the case where the big hit is won and the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 during the short open big hit. In addition, the long open big hit is a big winning hole in the sorting game execution round during the big hit (the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the execution of the round to shift to the probability variation game state after the big hit ends). Is a big hit that makes it easy to enter the specific area C22 by opening it for a relatively long time, and a short open big hit is a sorting game execution round during the big hit (the game ball in the specific area C22 during the execution of the round). It is a big hit that makes it difficult to enter the specific area C22 by opening the special winning opening for a relatively short time in the probability variation game state after the big hit ends by entering the ball).
(5) If there is a ball entering the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game, after the special game is completed, the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state are entered, and the limited frequency B state is entered. The time saving counter MP52c is set to 100 times, and the limited frequency counter (limited frequency B counter) is set to 100 times. On the other hand, when there is no ball in the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game, after the special game, the non-stochastic variation game state and the time shortening game state are entered, and the limited frequency A state is entered, The time saving counter MP52c is set to 100 times, and the limited frequency counter (limited frequency A counter) is set to 100 times.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 to 25, control processing executed on the sub-main control section SM side will be described. First, FIG. 19 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control section SM side) in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 10A is a process on the side of the sub-main control unit SM which is executed after resetting when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. That is, when the power of the game machine is turned on, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-main control unit SM executes an initial process based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear). When information is received-> RAM on the sub side is initialized, when various information commands are received-> Performance related information at the time of power interruption is reset in the RAM on the sub side). After that, the process shifts to the loop process of repeatedly executing (b) which is the iterative process routine of the sub-main control unit SM. Here, when (b) is executed, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S first executes a pending information management process, which will be described later, in step 2100, as shown in the process of FIG. Next, in step 2300, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a special game-related display control process described later. Next, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a stay stage determination process described later. Next, in step 2999, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the display command transmission control processing (transmits the commands set by these series of subroutines to the sub-sub-control section SS side), and terminates this repeating processing routine. To do.

  As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a mode in which the sub-main side routine (S2100 to S2999) is looped after reset. Further, the process of FIG. 7C is an interrupt process of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M described above is one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example, , NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S causes the command input port from the main control board M side (described above). Check the input port of the data signal line. Then, in step 2006, the CPUSC of the sub control board S temporarily stores the command transmitted from the main control board M side in the RAM area on the sub main control section SM side based on the confirmation result, and immediately before the main interrupt processing. Return to the process that was being executed.

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the pending information management process related to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a new hold generation command (hold information relating to the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) is received from the main control substrate M side. To do. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the drawing suspension counter (in the present example, a maximum of four for the first main game and a maximum of four for the second main game). 1 ”is added (incremented). Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, based on the hold occurrence command transmitted from the main control board M side, the hold information (particularly, a random number value related to the main game symbol lottery, for example, the winning lottery The random number / design lottery random number / variation mode lottery random number) is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the process proceeds to step 2116.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2102, in step 2108, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2108, in step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S subtracts (decrements) “1” from the drawing suspension counter. Next, in step 2112, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S deletes the suspension information (random number value) related to the symbol variation from the suspension information temporary storage area, and shifts the remaining suspension information. Next, in step 2114, the CPU SC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 2116. In addition, in the case of No in step 2108, the processing of steps 2110 to 2114 is not executed and the process proceeds to step 2116. Next, in step 2116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, on the effect display device SG (particularly, the first hold display section SG12, the second hold display section SG13), hold display lamps of the same number as the drawing hold counter value. Is lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300).

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol content determination permission flag. Next, in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol {for example, if the stop symbol relating to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol, "7,7,7" etc. , If the symbol is a lost pattern, then a variation such as “1/3/5”} and a variation mode are determined and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Next, in step 2308, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). Even if No in step 2302, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2400).

  Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process related to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. If Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol content determination flag. Next, in step 2406, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol variation flag. Next, in step 2408, the CPU SC of the sub control board S starts the mounting variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 2410. Even if No in step 2402, the process proceeds to step 2410.

  Next, in step 2410, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation flag is on. If Yes in step 2410, in step 2412, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S confirms the timer value of the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2414, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the variation start timing of the decorative pattern has been reached. If Yes in step 2414, in step 2416, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a variable display command of the decorative pattern (transmitted to the sub-sub-control section SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). , And proceeds to step 2426.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2414, in step 2418, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the decorative pattern has been reached. If Yes in step 2418, in step 2420, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) for the decorative pattern (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side). To the step 2426.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2418, in step 2422, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has reached the display timing of the advance notice image or reach image based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 2422, in step 2424 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets an image display command related to the notice image or reach image (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub-sub-control unit SS side is set). Is transmitted), and the process proceeds to step 2426. Even if No in step 2422, the process proceeds to step 2426.

  Next, in step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed. In the case of Yes in step 2426, in step 2436, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a stop display command (decision display command) of the decorative pattern (transmits to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). Be done). Next, in step 2438, the CPU SC of the sub control board S stops and resets (zero-clears) the mounting variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2440, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol variation flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 2500). Even if No in step 2410 or step 2426, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2500).

  Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process related to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the special game flag is off. If Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2504, in step 2506 and step 2508, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns on the special game flag and displays the big hit start on the effect display device SG (appropriately based on the kind of big hit. (Display is performed), and the process proceeds to step 2550. On the other hand, if No in step 2502, the process moves to step 2550. Next, in step 2550, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes a special game effect execution process described later.

  Next, in step 2520, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2520, in step 2522, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets a command related to big hit end display on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the kind of big hit). Next, in step 2524, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns off the special game flag and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2600). Even if No in step 2504 or step 2520, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the special game effect execution process according to the subroutine of step 2550 in FIG. First, in step 2552, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether the special game in execution is a special game related to a long open symbol. If Yes in step 2552, in step 2554, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets a command for sequentially displaying the number of rounds and the number of winning prizes in numbers, and then proceeds to step 2558. In addition, in the case of No in step 2552, in step 2556, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sequentially displays the winning numbers by numbers and also displays an object image (for example, a crystal ball image) related to the round number. The command is set, and the process proceeds to step 2558. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of rounds is displayed as a number in the big hit related to the long open design, while the number of rounds is not displayed as a number in the big hit related to the short release design in the object image. It is configured to display. In addition, the number of rounds is not displayed as numbers but is displayed as an object image. Depending on the execution of a round in which the opening time of the special winning opening is relatively short (a round in which a gaming ball cannot be obtained, etc.), the object image may be displayed. The number of object images may increase depending on the execution of a round in which the opening time of the special winning opening is relatively long (such as a round in which a certain number of game balls can be acquired). In such a configuration, the number of rounds may be displayed as a number only in a jackpot in which all the executed rounds are rounds in which the opening time of the special winning opening is relatively long. Good. Further, in the present embodiment, the object image related to the number of rounds is configured to increase, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of object images related to the number of rounds at the start of the special game (opening of the special winning opening). The same number of object images as the number of times of execution of the round whose time is relatively long) are displayed, and the object image is subtracted each time the round in which the special winning opening is relatively long is executed (1 It may be configured to delete each one (for example, when the number of execution rounds is 15 and the actual number of rounds is 8), eight object images are displayed at the start of the special game. To). In addition, the number of prize balls scheduled to be acquired may be displayed at the start of the special game. In such a case, as the number of prize balls to be acquired, "the actual number of rounds x the number of prize balls when one ball enters the big prize hole x the number of prize balls entering the big prize hole that triggers the end of the round" The number may be displayed. Further, in such a configuration, the number of rounds and the object image may be displayed at the same time, or the number of rounds and the object image may not be displayed.

  Next, in step 2558, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a specific area entry command has been received from the main side. If Yes in step 2558, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the specific area entrance flag (a flag that is turned on to execute a later-described entrance effect), and then in step 2562. Move to. Even if No in step 2558, the process proceeds to step 2560.

  Next, in step 2562, the CPUSC of the sub control substrate S determines whether or not the specific area entry flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2562, in step 2564, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the arrival performance execution timing has been reached. If Yes in step 2564, in step 2566 and step 2568, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for executing a specific area entrance effect (an effect that notifies that the game ball has entered the specific area C22). At the same time, the specific area entrance flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2520). Even if No in step 2562 or step 2564, the process moves to the next process (process of step 2520). Here, the entry performance execution timing may be appropriately set if it is a timing later than the timing at which the game ball enters the specific area C22, for example, the game ball enters the first big winning opening C10. It may be the timing that is set, or it may be any timing during the round executed after the distribution game execution round (when the distribution game execution round is executed multiple times, any distribution game execution round). It may be during the big hit end demo time. Further, in the present embodiment, the fact that the player entered the specific area C22 is notified during the execution of the special game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball is displayed in the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game. Even if it is definite that a player enters a ball and shifts to a probability variation game state after the end of the special game, the special game is not notified during the execution of the special game without informing that the player has entered the specific area C22. The stay stage after the end is the same stay stage in the non-stochastic variation game state and the time shortened game state and the probability variation game state and the time shortened game state, and the present game state in the changing production May be configured to be able to notify that it is a probability variation game state. It should be noted that such a configuration may be applied to all long open symbols, or may be applied only to some long open symbols (for example, a big hit that notifies that the player has entered the specific area C22 during a big hit. May be provided).

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, the switching timing of the stay stage {the stay stage switching timing is, for example, the timing when the special game ends (is won), the timing when the gaming state shifts, (same) It may be the timing when the variation mode determination table is switched (even in the game state), or the timing when the number of times of variation reaches a predetermined number (even in the same gaming state). In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current game state is the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state. If Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the “space stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999). Further, in the case of No in step 2604, in step 2608, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the limited frequency A command or the limited frequency B command is received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2608, in step 2610, the CPUSC of the sub control substrate S sets the “night stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999). In addition, in the case of No in step 2608, in step 2612, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is in the time reduction game state. If Yes in step 2612, in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the “evening stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999). Further, in the case of No in step 2612, in other words, in the non-stochastic variation game state and non-time shortened game state, in step 2616, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets "empty stage" as the stay stage Process (process of step 2999). Even if No in step 2602, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999). In this way, when the probability variation game state is not entered after the big hit on the first main game side (when the limited frequency A command or the limited frequency B command is received), the "night stage" is set, and the second stage is set. If the probability variation game state does not shift to after the big hit on the main game side, it shifts to the "evening stage", that is, the big hit without entering the specific area C22 at the big hit on the first main game side. In the case of shifting to the non-stochastic variation game state after the end and in the case of transitioning to the non-stochastic variation game state after the big hit without entering the specific area C22 in the big hit on the second main game side, the stay stage (production The tendency) will be different.

  Regarding the rendering tendency, "the same rendering tendency" may mean that the content of the rendering itself to be executed is the same, or as the rendering group, the rendering group A to which the renderings A1 to A5 belong (for example, to the rendering group A). As a production that belongs, a production in which a character is introduced is executed, and a production group B to which productions B1 to B5 belong (for example, a battle production is performed as a production that belongs to production group B). ), The productions A1 and A2, etc. belong to the same production group (the productions A1 and A2 belong to the same production group A). It may be set as “the same production tendency”. Also, "differences in effect" may mean that effect contents themselves to be executed are different, or as effect groups, effect groups A to which effect A1 to effect A5 belong (for example, effect group A belongs. As an effect, an effect in which a character is introduced is executed), and an effect group B to which the effects B1 to B5 belong (for example, a battle effect is executed as an effect belonging to the effect group B), In the case of having at least the effect, effects belonging to different effect groups such as effect A1 and effect B2 (the effect groups to which effect A1 and effect B2 belong are different between effect group A and effect group B) It may be set as “the production tendency is different”. It should be noted that the concept related to the rendering tendency can be applied to all the configurations (embodiments) according to the present example. Also, "the same effect", "the effect is different", "the effect mode is the same", "the effect mode is different", "the stay stage is the same", "the stay stage is different", "the effect display format is The same concept can be applied to “the same” and “the effect display format is different”. That is, in the present embodiment, the tendency of the effect executed during the change of the design is different according to the effect display format (stay stage), and the "stage A" and the "stage B" are set as the stay stages. If it has, it is a step-up effect in “Stage A” (a notice effect that gradually changes to a display mode with a high jackpot expectation degree, and as an example, the display mode of the character changes. There is a character step-up effect, a dialogue step-up effect in which the content and character color of the dialogue change, and the like) can be executed, but in the "stage B", the step-up effect is not executed, while a movable body accessory Driven and group notice (notice of a form in which a group of characters crosses on the stage display device) or one-time announcement (drive of a character, sound, background color) Effect of effect) or the like for notifying that a jackpot is deterministic by etc. may be configured to be performed be either "stage A" and "Stage B". Further, although the step-up effect can be executed in either “Stage A” or “Stage B”, only character step-up can be executed as the step-up effect in “Stage A”, while “Stage B” is executed. In the above, the system of the step-up effects that can be executed may be different, such that only the dialogue step-up effects can be executed as the step-up effects.

  With the above configuration, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the gaming ball enters the specific area C22 during the big hit to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit ends, A big hit related to a long open symbol that easily enters the specific area C22, and if the probability variation game state does not shift after the big hit ends, is it after the big hit end on the first main game side or the second main Depending on whether or not after the big hit on the game side, the variation tendency after the big hit (the transition to the limited frequency state) and the production tendency (stay stage) are configured to be different, so that the game situation is improved. It is possible to provide various variation time selection tendencies and performance tendencies according to the variation time, which enhances the fun of the game. In addition, by providing a big hit that displays the number of rounds as a number and a big hit that displays the number of rounds as an object image during the execution of big hits, it is possible to prevent the number of rounds from increasing even though a game ball cannot be acquired. Therefore, the stress on the player can be reduced.

(Modification 1 from the present embodiment)
In this embodiment, depending on whether the big hit on the first main game side is over or after the big hit on the second main game side is over, the variation tendency and the production tendency after the big hit are different However, the configuration in which the selection tendency of the variation mode and the effect tendency after the big hit are different is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration different from that of the present embodiment will be referred to as a first modification of the present embodiment, and only the points of change from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. 16 in the first modification from the present embodiment. The change from the present embodiment is Step 1780 (Mod 1), that is, when it is determined in Step 1762 that the CPUMC of the main control board M is after the big hit related to the long open symbol, Step 1780 (Mod 1). In 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it is after the jackpot which is won in the non-time reduction game state. If Yes in step 1780 (variation 1), the process moves to step 1764. On the other hand, if No in step 1780 (Mod 1), the process moves to step 1760.

  With the above-described configuration, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the modified example 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming ball does not enter the specific area C22 in the big hit related to the long open symbol, and there is no probability after the big hit ends. In the case of shifting to the variable gaming state, the time is shortened by configuring so that the tendency of selection of the variation mode after the jackpot is different from the production tendency depending on whether or not the jackpot is won in the gaming state. After the jackpot which is won in the game state, it is possible not to enter the specific area C22 but to have the same variation tendency and selection tendency as the case of entering the specific area C22. The game can be advanced.

  In the present embodiment and the first modified example of the present embodiment, although not shown, from the timing when the last opening of the special winning opening during the execution of the round is completed and closed until the start of the next round There is a round waiting time. The length of the round waiting time may be different depending on the round. For example, the round waiting time (round waiting time before the start of the sorting game execution round) and the sorting game execution in the round immediately before the sorting game execution round. The round waiting time in the round (the round waiting time after the final opening of the special winning opening in the sorting game execution round is finished and closed) may be different. Further, when the second R is a distribution game execution round, “1R round waiting time (round waiting time before starting 2R) = X, 2R round waiting time (round waiting time before 3R starting) ) = Y, X and round waiting time other than Y = Z ”, it may be configured such that“ X> Z and / or Y> Z ”.

(Second embodiment)
In the present embodiment, it is configured to shift to the time-saving game state after the big hit ends, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is a gaming machine that can shift to the non-time-shortening game state after the big hit ends. The configuration applicable to the pachinko game machine according to the present invention is the second embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 9 in the second embodiment. Differences from the present embodiment are step 1554 (second), step 1556 (second), step 1558 (second), and step 1560 (second), that is, step 1554 (second), The CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c is greater than 0. If Yes in step 1554 (second), in step 1556 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c by 1. Next, in step 1558 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1558 (second), in step 1560 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability variation flag, and proceeds to step 1570. Even if No in step 1554 (second) or step 1558 (second), the process proceeds to step 1570. As described above, in the second embodiment, when the probability variation game state is entered after the end of the special game, the probability variation game state ends by executing the symbol variation a predetermined number of times (also referred to as ST machine). Is configured).

  Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 16 in the second embodiment. First, in step 1780-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability variation shift reservation flag is on. If Yes in step 1780-1, in steps 1780-2 and 1780-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability variation transition reservation flag and turns on the main game probability variation flag. Next, in step 1780-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a certain value (60 times in this example) in the probability variation counter MP51c, and proceeds to step 1780-5. Even if No in step 1780-1, the process proceeds to step 1780-5.

  Next, in step 1780-5, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not it is after the jackpot which is won in the time-saving game state. If Yes in step 1780-5, in step 1780-6, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value B (100 times in this example) to the time saving counter MP52c. Next, in steps 1780-7 and 1780-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag and turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag. Next, in step 1780-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a space stage command (a command to the sub side, which means that the "space stage" is set as the stay stage), and then Process (process of step 1997).

  In addition, in the case of No in step 1780-5, in step 1780-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not after the jackpot which is won in the non-probability variation game state is over. If Yes in step 1780-10, in step 1781-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not after the jackpot related to the first main game side is over. In the case of Yes in step 1781-1, in step 1781-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a jackpot pattern without a time saving (it is a jackpot pattern which may not shift to the time shortening game state after the jackpot is finished, in this example, 2A, 3A, 5A) is determined after the jackpot is over. If Yes in step 1781-2, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1997).

  Further, in the case of No in step 1781-1 or step 1781-2, in step 1781-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value B (100 times in this example) to the time saving counter MP52c. . Next, in step 1781-5 and step 1781-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag and turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag. Next, in step 1781-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an evening stage command (a command to the sub side and a command in which "evening stage" is set as the stay stage), and then Process (process of step 1997). If the special game is to be transitioned to the time-reduced game state (when the number of time saving is 100 times), all the stay stages to be transitioned after the special game is configured to be "space stage". Good. Further, when the probability variation game state and the non-time shortened game state are transitioned to after the special game is completed, for example, an "underground stage" is set as the stay stage in the probability variation game state and the non-time reduced game state. You may do (in the "underground stage", perform an effect that suggests or informs you whether it is a probability fluctuation game state, even if it is a non-probability fluctuation game state and a non-time shortening game state, "underground stage" is set May be configured).

  If No in step 1780-10, in step 1781-9, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value B (100 times in this example) in the time saving counter MP52c. Next, in steps 1781-10 and 1781-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag and turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag. Next, in step 1781-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a space stage command (a command to the sub side, which means that the "space stage" is set as the stay stage), and then Process (process of step 1997).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state are entered after the end of the big hit, the value (60 times) set in the probability variation number counter MP51c is set in the time saving number counter MP52c. It is less than the set value (100 times). That is, after the jackpot is finished, the symbol variation is executed, and if the jackpot is not won, "the big jackpot → the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state → the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state remain 60 Non-probability variation game state and time shortening game state transition by the number of symbol variations → Non-stochastic variation game state and time shortening gaming state 40 non-probability variation game state and The game state will be changed such as "Transition to non-time reduction game state". In addition, when the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state are transitioned to after the big hit, the symbol variation of the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state is 60 times, the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state is 40 times. The number of fluctuations in the probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state is greater than the number of fluctuations in the non-stochastic fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state (probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening The number of fluctuations in the gaming state may be smaller than the number of fluctuations in the non-probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state). In the non-probability variation game state and the non-time shortening game state, when the big hit related to the first main game side without the time saving big hit symbol is won, the non-time shortening game state is shifted to after the big hit. In addition, when the big hit is won in the probability variation game state and the non-time shortening game state, regardless of the big hit symbol, after the big hit, it shifts to the time shortening game state and the space stage command is the sub-control board S side. Will be sent to. That is, in the probability variation game state and non-time shortening game state, the big hit is won, and since the player did not enter the specific area C22 during the big hit, in the case of shifting to the non-probability variation game state and time shortening game state after the big hit ends. Also, it is configured to have the same stay stage (performance tendency) as in the case of transitioning to the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state after the big hit ends.

  Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the special game effect execution process according to the subroutine of step 2550 of FIG. 23 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2570 (second) to step 2584 (second), that is, after the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the specific area entry flag in step 2560, or When it is determined in step 2558 that the specific area entry command has not been received from the main control board M side, in step 2570 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the probability variation effect execution timing (during a big hit). It is an arbitrary timing, and it is determined whether or not it has reached a timing earlier than the execution timing of the later-described short-time whirling effect). If Yes in step 2570 (second), in step 2572 (second), the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the specific area entry flag is on. If Yes in step 2572 (second), in step 2574 (second), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets a command to execute the specific area entrance success effect as the probability variation agitation effect, and in step 2578 (second). ). If No in step 2572 (second), in step 2576 (second), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets a command for executing the specific area entry failure effect as the probability variation effect, and then in step 2578 (second). Go to 2). Here, the probability variation agitation effect is an effect that fuels whether or not to shift to the probability variation game state after the end of the big hit, and the specific area entrance success effect notifies the fact that the probability variation game state will be entered after the end of the big hit. The specific area entry failure production is a production mode that notifies that the probability variation game state will not be entered after the jackpot is over. Even if No in step 2570, the process proceeds to step 2578 (second).

  Next, in step 2578 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M reaches the time saving fan production execution timing (arbitrary timing during the big hit, which is later than the above-described execution timing of the probability variation fan production). Or not. If Yes in step 2578 (second), in step 2580 (second), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the game state to be shifted after the end of the special game is the time reduction game state. If Yes in step 2580 (second), in step 2582 (second), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets a command for executing the time saving transition success effect as the time saving fan effect, and performs the next process (step 2520). Process). If No in step 2580, in step 2584 (second), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets a command to execute the time saving transition failure effect as the time saving fan effect, and the next process (process of step 2520) Move to. Here, the time-shortening effect is an effect that fuels whether or not to shift to the time-reduced game state after the big hit ends, and the time-saving transition success effect informs that the time-reduced game state will be entered after the big hit ends, and shifts to the time-saving The failure effect is an effect mode for notifying that the time reduction game state will not be entered after the big hit ends. Even if No in step 2578 (second), the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2520). As described above, in the second embodiment, two effects, that is, a probabilistic change agitation effect and a time saving agitation effect, can be executed as an effect that suggests the game state after the big hit is executed during the big hit. That is, the specific area entry success effect is executed as the probability variation agitation effect, and the time saving transition success effect is executed as the time saving agitation effect, so that the player shifts to the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state after the jackpot is over. It is configured so that it can be recognized. Note that the order in which the probability variation agitation effect and the time saving agitation effect are executed may be reversed, and there is no problem as long as the two effects are not executed at the same time. In addition, as described above, the probability variation agitation effect and the time saving agitation effect are examples of an agitation effect, and depending on the execution result of the agitation effect, (1) shifts to a non-probability variation gaming state and a non-time-reduced gaming state after the end of the special game. Whether or not (there is no entry to the specific area and it shifts to the non-time-reducing game state), (2) transition to the non-stochastic variation game state and the time-reduction game state after the end of the special game (the entry to the specific area is Whether or not to shift to the time-reduced game state), (3) After the special game is finished, transition to the probability variation game state and the non-time-reduced game state (there is a ball entering a specific area and transition to the non-time-reduced game state) ) Or not, and (4) whether or not to move to a probability variation game state and a time-reducing game state after the special game is completed (whether there is a ball in a specific area and to move to a time-reducing game state) The tendency is differentFurther, the fanning effect is executed during the execution of the special game won in the non-stochastic variation game state and the non-time-reduced game state, that is, in the game state other than the non-probability variation game state and the non-time-reduced game state. During the execution of the special game, it is configured so as not to carry out the stirrup production, and after the special game won in a game state other than the non-stochastic variation game state and the non-time-reduced game state, the total number of times saved is 100 times. You may comprise so that it may shift to a time shortening game state and a "space stage" may be set as a stay stage.

  Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 of FIG. 19 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2618 (second) and step 2620 (second), that is, it is determined in step 2602 whether the CPUSC of the sub control board S has reached the stay stage switching timing. After that, in step 2618 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the space stage command from the main control board M side is received. If Yes in step 2618 (second), the process moves to step 2606. In addition, in the case of No in step 2618 (second), in step 2620 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the "space stage" as the stay stage, and the next process (process of step 2999) Move to. If No in step 2618 (second), in step 2620 (second), the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an evening stage command from the main control board M side has been received. If Yes in step 2620 (second), the process moves to step 2614. If No in step 2620 (second), the process moves to step 2616. Incidentally, as the timing of switching the stay stage, the change of the main game symbol elapses (the symbol variation is executed a predetermined number of times), so that the game state of the main game side is shifted, so that the stay stage may be switched. Good, even if the game state of the main game side does not shift, based on the change in the main game symbol has passed (because it has changed a predetermined number of times since the game state started) to switch the stay stage You may comprise.

  With the above-described configuration, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, there are two effects, a probability variation incentive effect and a time saving inspiratory effect, as effects that suggest the game state after the jackpot is executed during the jackpot. By configuring so that the production can be performed, the player pays attention to the result of the two-stage production, that is, whether or not to shift to the probability variation game state and whether or not to shift to the time shortening game state. The entertainingness of the production can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, by entering the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game, the so-called ball-determining machine is configured so that it can shift to the probability variation game state after the special game ends. A configuration for performing a stirrer effect such as a form may be applied to a device other than a ball-making machine, for example, a configuration in which the gaming state after the jackpot is determined based on the jackpot pattern and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. May be applied to.

(Modification 1 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, an example of a configuration in which the probability variation game state ends with the execution of the symbol variation a predetermined number of times, the number of time saving times is larger than the number of probability variation, is exemplified. The configuration of the machine is not limited to that of the second embodiment. Therefore, a configuration different from that of the second embodiment will be referred to as a first modification of the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 31 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M in the first modification from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is step 1850 (second variation 1), that is, after the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the prize ball payout control process in step 1997, step 1850 (second variation 1). ), The CPU MC of the main control board M executes an external signal output process described later, and proceeds to step 1999.

  Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 8 in the first modification from the second embodiment. . The changes from the second embodiment are step 1411-3 (second variation 1), step 1439 (second variation 1), step 1440 (second variation 1), step 1441 (second variation 1), step 1442. (Second variation 1), and step 1443 (second variation 1), that is, in step 1410, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the main game table 2 and determines a stop symbol relating to the main game symbol. After that, in step 1411-3 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the limited frequency B flag is off. If Yes in step 1411-3 (second variation 1), the process moves to step 1412. In addition, in the case of No in step 1411-3 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1500.

  If the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1426 that the changing flag is off, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the changing fixed flag (main game) in step 1439 (second variation 1). It is determined whether or not a flag which is turned on for a fixed time period from the fixed stop of the symbol to the start of the next symbol variation). If Yes at step 1439 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1442 (second variation 1), and if No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600).

  Further, in step 1434, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the changing flag, and then in step 1440 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M changes the fixed time (0 in this example). .3 seconds) in the variation fixed time timer SH10t to start, and in step 1441 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the variation fixed flag, and in step 1442 (second variation 1). ). Next, in step 1442 (second variation 1), the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the timer value of the variable fixed time timer SH10t is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1442 (second variation 1), in step 1443 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the variation fixing flag and moves to step 1436. On the other hand, if No in step 1442 (second variation 1), the process moves to the next process (process of step 1600). As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the variable fixed time is provided and the time values are all predetermined values (0.3 seconds in this example). The present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to have a time value of a plurality of types of fluctuation fixed time, for example, whether or not the probability fluctuation game state, whether or not the time reduction game state, the first main game symbol The variable fixed time may be different depending on whether it is the second main game symbol or the like, or the variable fixed time may be changed by a combination of a plurality of these.

  Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the limited frequency B variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 of FIG. 32 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 1502 (second variation 1) and step 1506 (second variation 1), that is, in step 1502 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M: The counter value G of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 is within the range of the first stage (the range of the counter value of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2, which is the first stage in the limited frequency B state having three stages). , 100 ≧ G> 60). If Yes in step 1502 (second variation 1), the process moves to step 1504. If No in step 1502 (second variation 1), in step 1506 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the counter value G of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 is in the second range. It is determined whether or not (59 ≧ G> 1) within the range of the counter value of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 which is the second stage in the limited frequency B state having three stages. If Yes in step 1506 (second variation 1), the process moves to step 1508. If No in step 1506 (second variation 1), the process moves to step 1510.

  Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 (second) of FIG. 16 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 1780-4 (second variation 1) and steps 1782-1 (second variation 1) to step 1782-9 (second variation 1), that is, 1780-3. After the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability variation flag, in step 1780-4 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the probability variation number counter MP51c to have a predetermined value (in this example, 40) is set and the process proceeds to step 1780-5. Further, after the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game shortened flag in step 1780-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the limited frequency B counter MN52c- in step 1782-1 (second variation 1). A predetermined value (100 in this example) is set in 2. Next, in step 1782-2 (second variation 1), the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency B flag, and proceeds to step 1780-9.

  Further, after the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game shortened flag in step 1781-6, in step 1782-6 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the limited frequency B counter MN52c- A predetermined value (100 in this example) is set in 2. Next, in step 1782-7 (second variation 1), the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency B flag, and proceeds to step 1781-8. Further, after the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game shortened flag in step 1781-11, in step 1782-8 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the limited frequency B counter MN52c- A predetermined value (100 in this example) is set in 2. Next, in step 1782-9 (second variation 1), the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency B flag, and proceeds to step 1781-12. In this way, in the first modification from the second embodiment, when the time shortening game state is entered, the limited frequency B state is entered, and then the variation time selection tendency is changed in three stages, and the big hit ends. When the state is changed to the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state later, it is the big hit end → the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, and the state of determining the variation mode with reference to the limited frequency table 1 is 40 times → Non-probability variation game state and time reduction game state, the state of determining the variation mode by referring to the limited frequency table 2 is 59 times → non-probability variation game state and time reduction game state, refer to the limited frequency table 3 Then, the state in which the variation mode is determined is changed to "1 time". In this example, the variation time of the main game symbol when referring to the limited frequency table 3 is configured to be selected only 5 seconds, but is not limited to this, a long time such as 30 seconds It may be configured such that only the variation time of is selected (particularly, a symbol variation that causes a loss), and an effect dedicated to the time-saving final variation is executed. Also, when the probability change game state and the time shortening game state are transitioned after the big hit ends, the probability change game state and the time shortening game state are 40 times symbol fluctuation, the non-probability change game state and the time shortening game state are 60 times. The number of fluctuations in the non-stochastic fluctuation game state and the time reduction game state is larger than the number of fluctuations in the probability fluctuation game state and the time reduction game state. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of fluctuations in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the number of changes in the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state are the same number (for example, 50 times). However, such a configuration of the number of probability changes and the number of time reductions can be applied to all the embodiments according to the present example. In addition, as a configuration that transitions to a non-stochastic variation game state and a time-reduction game state after the probability variation game state and the time-reduction game state ends by executing a predetermined number of symbol variations, (1) non-stochastic variation game state and After the jackpot that is won in the non-time-reduced game state, after the probability variation game state and the time-reduced game state are executed a predetermined number of times, a jackpot is provided to shift to the probability variation game state and the non-time-reduced game state. (2) After the jackpot that is won in the non-probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state, after the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state are executed a predetermined number of times, the non-probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game It may be configured to provide a big hit for shifting to a state. Further, in the modified example 1 from the second embodiment, the stay stage after the big hit ends when the big hit hits the specific area C22 without depending on the gaming state or the big hit symbol. Is the "space stage", and if there is no entry into the specific area C22 during the big hit, the stay stage after the big hit may be the "evening stage". In that case, if it is the "space stage", the limited frequency B state If it is the “evening stage”, it may be in the limited frequency A state (or the limited frequency state in which the variation time selection tendencies may be different depending on the number of holdings, such as the limited frequency C state).

  Next, FIG. 35 is a flowchart of the external signal output processing according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second variation 1) of FIG. 31 according to the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 1852, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the state of the gaming machine. Next, in step 1854, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the external terminal transmission content determination table 1 based on the confirmed result, and determines the external relay terminal board G based on the confirmed result of the gaming machine. Via, a signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output to the hall computer HC, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1999).

(External relay terminal board)
Here, the signal output via the external relay terminal board G according to the first modification from the second embodiment will be described with reference to the lower part of the figure (image diagram of signal output). On the external relay terminal board G, a plurality of external connection terminals as output terminal parts to which various cable connectors are connected {for example, information on prize ball payout, information on winning or winning of symbols, current game state (normal game state, Specific game state, special game state, etc.) output terminal for game state information output, error information for outputting various error information detected by opening detection sensor etc. when the door is open Output terminals and the like} are provided. Then, as will be described later, the output terminals are connected to the hall computer HC by a cable harness so that information can be output from the output terminals to the hall computer HC. Here, in the modified example 1 from the second embodiment, one output terminal is assigned as an output terminal of payout related information which is information output from the prize ball payout control board KH and is a plurality of types of information. Has been. The output terminals other than the one output terminal are terminals for outputting a signal output from the main control board M. For example, a jackpot output terminal that outputs a signal during a jackpot during jackpot (there are a plurality of jacks depending on the type of jackpot). ), A door opening output terminal that outputs a signal while the glass door D18 is open, a starting opening winning time output terminal that outputs a signal when a winning is won, and there is not enough balls in the prize ball tank KT. While the output terminal for outputting the signal while the ball is running, the output terminal for the number of special symbol confirmation times that outputs the signal when the special symbol determination stop, etc. of the game-related information that is important information for the game hall operator side It is an output terminal. That is, by using the output terminal of the payout related information as one output terminal, it is possible to avoid exhaustion of the output terminals of these important game related information.

  Further, in the modified example 1 from the second embodiment, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are in the form of one-way serial transmission of game-related information and payout-related information to the external relay terminal board G. It is configured to send. That is, no transmission line is provided from the external relay terminal board G to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH (the same applies to information transmission from the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC).

  Here, the outline of the information transmission system of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modified example 1 from the second embodiment will be explained. First, between the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH and the external relay terminal board G. , And the external relay terminal board G and the hall computer HC are connected by a cable harness. On the other hand, as shown in this example, since the external relay terminal board G is configured by a communication relay (so-called relay), the main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, and the hall computer HC are always in conduction. It does not mean that That is, an electrical signal (a binary logic signal whose voltage is Hi level / Low level) input from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G is the relay. After being replaced by a physical signal (a binary logic signal whose switch state is ON / OFF) by the section, the signal is output from the output terminal of the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC. More specifically, the external relay terminal board G has a plurality of relay coils G1 and contact portions G2 corresponding to the respective input / output terminals. Then, when the relay coil G1 is excited based on the pulse signal input to the input terminal, a magnetic force is generated, and the generated magnetic force brings the contact portion G2 into a closed state, so that the output terminal and the hall computer HC are electrically connected. Further, when the relay coil G1 is demagnetized, the contact portion G2 returns to the open state, so that the output terminal and the hall computer HC are not electrically connected. Therefore, on the side of the hall computer HC, it is possible to obtain a pulse signal substantially the same as the pulse signal input to the input terminal of the external relay terminal board G by detecting the conducting period. With such a configuration, it is possible to physically secure one-way communication from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC, and from the hall computer HC side to the main control board M and This prevents a goto action (so-called remote operation goto) that illegally operates the prize ball payout control board KH. In this example, the mechanism using the relay coil is configured to enable the one-way communication to the hall computer HC while preventing the goto action, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, a pair of light emitting units and One-way communication is also possible by a photosensor having a light receiving unit (for example, light from a light emitting unit connected to the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH is connected to the hall computer HC to receive light). It is possible to receive a signal by reading with a section).

  However, since the physical signal (switch state is turned on / off) is once replaced, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are connected to the hall computer HC by one of the external relay terminal boards G. It is difficult to transmit complicated information using the input / output terminal, and one type of information is transmitted using the one input / output terminal (for example, if it is an output terminal for the special symbol determination frequency, It is customary to configure such that only the information indicating that "one variation of the special symbol has ended" can be transmitted).

  Next, a transmission signal to the external relay terminal board G in the first modification from the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the specific contents of the signals shown in this example (numerical values, notification modes, measures in case of duplication, etc.) are merely examples, and can be changed without departing from the concept of this example. Keep it.

Signal number: 1
Signal type: Symbol variation system Outline of signal: A part of the symbol variation (for example, the symbol variation on the first main game side) that triggers the opening of the special winning opening (attacker) is targeted, and the number of symbol variations is output. The signal is; when the variable display of the first main game symbol is completed (for example, in the step 1424 in the first main game symbol display process, the changing flag is turned on → off) {* Incidentally, the variable display is After the end, the output timing may be when the period in which the symbols are fixedly displayed has ended (or has started or is in the period)}.
1 signal structure: [output timing] timing when the variable display of the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is ended {After the variable display is terminated, the period in which the symbol is fixedly displayed is ended (or started) If it is during the period,) may be the output timing}
[Output period] Output ON signal for 0.5 seconds Duplication of output period: [Possibility of duplication] There is no duplication of the same signal, but other signals (such as signal number 2 and signal number 3 described later) Signals of the big hit type, signals of the security type of signal number 4, etc.) may be duplicated (note that signals other than the signal number 1 in which the possibility of duplication is described as “none”) are also similar. Signal may overlap)
None Remarks: It is preferable that the output period is configured to be shorter than the shortest possible period for which the variable display period of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol can be adopted. Further, the output period of the signal is the same 0.5 seconds for the signal relating to the first main game symbol and the signal relating to the second main gaming symbol, and a time value different from the variable fixed time of 0.3 seconds. Has become.

Signal number: 2
Signal type: Big hit system Signal overview: Outputs that big hit and time shortening game state is output 1 signal configuration: [output timing] special game start timing [output period] special game is not being executed, and Until it becomes a non-time-reduced game state (it remains on even from the stop of the big hit symbol in the time-reduced game state to the start of the big hit)
Duplication of output period: [Duplicate possibility] None Remarks: It can be continuously output even when the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state are changed to the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state. Also, it is not output in the probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state.

Signal number: 3
Signal type: Big hit system Signal overview: Output that big hit is in progress 1 Signal configuration: [Output timing] Special game start timing [Output period] Special game end timing (Big hit start demo time and big hit end demo time including)
Duplication of output period: [possibility of duplication] None Remarks: The output period at the big hit start demo time and the big hit end demo time is a big hit in the time shortening game state than when the big hit is won in the non-time shortening game state It is shorter when you win

Signal number: 4
Signal type: Security system Outline of signal: Outputs that the RAM initialization operation has been performed on the gaming machine and that the fraudulent activity detectable by the gaming machine has been performed. Is a regular number (5) or more that is detected in the special winning opening (attacker) during a period other than the period during which the special winning opening (attacker) can be opened (when the special electric auditor is operating), During the period when the electric accessory cannot be opened, more than a predetermined number (5) of balls entering the ordinary electric accessory are detected (illegal winning)
Configuration of 1 signal: [output timing] At any timing after the RAM initialization operation is performed and when the illegal winning is detected [output period] the ON signal is output for the first period (30 seconds) of the output period. Duplication: [Possibility of duplication] Yes [Processing when duplication is possible] Duplication of all output periods, maintaining output of ON signal until all output periods expire Remark: Output after illegal winning and RAM clear The period may be different

Signal number: 5
Signal type: Outline of winning detection system signals: Targeting all of the starting openings related to the symbol variation that triggers opening of the special winning opening (attacker), the configuration of one signal that outputs the number of times of entry into each starting opening: [Output Timing] When one ball is detected by the switch for detecting the ball entering the first main game starting port, and when one switch is detected for detecting the ball entering the second main game starting port When an incoming ball is detected [Output period] After outputting an ON signal for 0.1 seconds, an OFF signal is output for 0.1 seconds Duplication of output period: [Duplicate possibility] Yes [Duplicate Processing in case of obtaining] Waiting for the next output until the output period of one signal being output this time expires Remarks: Even in the final fluctuation of the time shortening game state (symbol fluctuation in which the time saving number counter MP52c value = 1) Can be output twice. In addition, when an illegal ball entering the second main game starting opening is detected, the output timing may not be satisfied with the ball entering as a trigger.

  With the above-described configuration, in the gaming machine in which the probability variation game state according to the first modification from the second embodiment is finished by executing the symbol variation a predetermined number of times, the number of time saving is greater than the number of probability variation. Even in the case of such a configuration, when the information regarding the game progress status and the error occurrence information is externally output (for example, output to the hall computer HC), appropriate information matching the characteristics of the gaming machine is externally output. Will be possible.

  In the first modification from the second embodiment, in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, and in the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, the first main game symbol and While the output period of the symbol determination signal of the above-mentioned signal number 1 related to the second main game symbol is basically the same time value (for example, 0.5 seconds), the fixed fixed time is also basically the same time. Value (for example, 0.3 seconds), but only in the final variation of the time-reduced gaming state (final variation of the non-stochastic gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state), the output period and the variation of the symbol determination signal of signal number 1 Fixed time is (in both the symbol variation related to the first main game symbol and the symbol variation related to the second main game symbol) long time (for example, variation fixed time 0.5 seconds, signal number 2 symbol) Output period of confirmation signal is 0.7 seconds) Cormorant may be configured. In addition, the variation fixed time becomes long only in the final variation of the time shortening game state, but the output period of the symbol determination signal of the signal number 1 may be the same as the previous symbol variation execution time.

(Modification 2 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, an example of a configuration in which the probability variation game state ends with the execution of the symbol variation a predetermined number of times, the number of time saving times is larger than the number of probability variation, is exemplified. The configuration of the machine is not limited to that of the second embodiment. Therefore, a configuration different from that of the second embodiment will be referred to as a second modification of the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 of FIG. 4 in the second modification from the second embodiment. The change from the first modification from the second embodiment is step 1326 (second variation 2), that is, in step 1302, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the ball to enter the first main game starting opening A10. When it is determined that it has been detected, in step 1326 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M has a first main game starting opening entry command (a command to the sub control board S side, and the first main game). A command relating to the detection of a ball entering the starting opening A10) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1304. In the second modification from the second embodiment, when the ball entering the first main game starting port A10 is detected, the first starting port entering command is transmitted to the sub control board S side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only when the entry into the first main game starting opening A10 is detected in the time shortening game state, the first starting opening entry command is transmitted to the sub control board S side. You may comprise.

  Next, FIG. 38 shows a first main game symbol display process (second main) related to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. 8 in the second modification from the second embodiment. It is a flowchart of a game symbol display processing). The changes from the second embodiment are step 1411-3 (second variation 1), step 1650 (second variation 2) and step 1435 (second variation 2), step 1441 (second variation 1), step 1442. (Second variation 1), Step 1443 (Second variation 1), and Step 1439 (Second variation 1), that is, after the CPU MC of the main control board M determines the stop symbol related to the main game symbol in Step 1410. In step 1411-3 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the limited frequency B flag is off. If Yes in step 1411-3 (second variation 1), in step 1412, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines and temporarily stores a variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol, or in step 1500. After the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the limited frequency B variation mode determination processing, in step 1650 (second variation 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the variation fixed time determination processing described later, and then step 1418. Move to. After the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the changing flag in step 1434, the CPUMC of the main control board M performs the processing of step 1650 (second change 2) in step 1435 (second change 2). The variable fixed time determined by the above is set in the variable fixed time timer SH10t to start, and the routine proceeds to step 1441. Next, in step 1441 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the variation fixing flag, and proceeds to step 1442 (second variation 1). Further, in step 1439 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the fluctuation fixing flag is ON. If Yes in step 1439 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1442 (second variation 1). If No in step 1439 (second variation 1), the process moves to the next process (process of step 1600). Next, in step 1442 (second variation 1), the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the variable fixed time timer SH10t value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1442 (second variation 1), in step 1443 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the variation fixed flag, and proceeds to step 1436. If No in step 1442 (second variation 1), the process moves to the next process (process in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the variable fixed time determination process according to the subroutine of step 1650 (second variation 2) of FIG. 38 in the second modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 1652, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the symbol variation is the final variation (100th variation from after the jackpot end) in the time shortened gaming state. If Yes in step 1652, in step 1654, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the variation fixed time to a long time (longer than the variation fixed time in step 1656, 0.5 second in this example). The determination is made, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1418). Further, in the case of No in step 1652, in step 1656, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the fluctuation fixed time to a short time (shorter than the fluctuation fixed time related to step 1654, and in this example, 0.3 seconds). ), And the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1418). In addition, the output period of the ON signal of the external terminal output signal related to the number of times the symbol number 1 changes, the variation fixed time is 0.7 seconds when the variation fixed time is long, when the variation fixed time is short In the case where the fixed time is 0.5 seconds and the fixed time is long, the output period of the ON signal of the external terminal output signal related to the number of times the symbol of signal number 1 changes is also long.

  Next, FIG. 40 is a main flowchart on the side of the sub-control board S (particularly on the side of the sub-main control unit SM) in the second modification from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is step 2200 (second variation 2), that is, in step 2600, after the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the stay stage determination processing, step 2200 (second variation 2). In 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a right-hand hitting instruction display control process described later, and proceeds to step 2999.

  Next, FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the right-handing instruction display control process according to the subroutine of step 2200 (second variation 2) of FIG. 40 in the second modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 2202, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. If Yes in step 2202, the process moves to step 2204. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the special game flag is off, in other words, whether or not the special game is being executed. If No in step 2203, the process moves to step 2204.

  Next, in step 2204, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying the second right-hand hitting instruction display on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2206, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a command set by the first main game start entrance ball entry command {step 1326 (second variation 2) from the main control board M side, and the first It is determined whether or not a command to the effect that there is a ball entering the main game starting opening A10 is received. If Yes in step 2206, in step 2208, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets a command to display the first right-handing instruction display (for example, display for 5 seconds and then delete) on the effect display device SG. , The next process (process of step 2999) is performed.

  Further, in the case of No in step 2202, in step 2203, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the special game flag is off, in other words, whether or not the special game is being executed. If No in step 2203, the process moves to step 2204. It should be noted that during the execution of the special game, a right-handing instruction display different from the first right-handing instruction display and the second right-handing instruction display may be displayed, for example, at least during the execution of at least a predetermined round in the special game. A fourth right-handing instruction display having a relatively small display area is displayed as the right-handing instruction display to be displayed, and a predetermined condition (for example, detection of entry into the first main game starting opening) is satisfied during the special game. Thus, the third right-hand hitting instruction display having a relatively large display area may be displayed. It should be noted that both the third right-handing instruction display and the fourth right-handing instruction display may be simultaneously displayable. It should be noted that a configuration may also be adopted in which audio notification from the speaker D24 can be output (for example, "Right hit !!") at the timing when the display of the first right hit instruction display or the third right hit instruction display is started. Good.

  If Yes in step 2203, in step 2212, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S deletes the right-handing instruction display displayed from the effect display device SG (first right-handing instruction display and second right-handing instruction). If the right-handing instruction display is not displayed, the process is not executed) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999). Even if No in step 2206, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2999). With this configuration, the second right-handing instruction display is displayed on the effect display device SG as the right-handing instruction display during the execution of the special game and the time shortening game state (the state in which the player should perform the right-handing). In addition to being able to display, while the second right-handing instruction display is being displayed, if the player executes left-handing and a ball is detected at the first main game starting opening A10, the first A right-handed instruction display may also be displayed together on the effect display device SG to prompt the player to play the game by right-handing.

  Next, the lower part of the figure is a display image diagram of the right-handing instruction display. First, the left side is the first right-handing instruction display displayed on the effect display device SG, and the right side is the second right-handing instruction display displayed on the effect display device SG. The first right-handing instruction display has a relatively larger area to be displayed than the second right-handing instruction display, and has a conspicuous display mode. With this configuration, it is clearer for the player who plays the game by left-handing, although the right-handing instruction display (second right-handing instruction display) indicates that the player should right-hand. Can be instructed to make a right hit. Here, the right hitting is to hit the game ball by adjusting the launch strength of the game ball to a relatively high strength so that the game ball flows down the right side of the game area D30, and is called rubber hitting. is there. Further, the left hitting is to hit the game ball by adjusting the launch strength of the game ball to a relatively weak strength so that the game ball flows down the left side of the game area D30. Incidentally, the structure for urging the player to play the game by right-handing is not limited to this, and when it is determined that the player has left-handed for a predetermined time (a predetermined number of entrances to the entrance that can be entered by left-handing). The first right hitting instruction display may be displayed in (detection of the number of balls entered, etc.), or a sensor capable of detecting a game ball flowing down the game area D30 is provided, and the sensor executes left hitting. When the fact is detected, the first right-hand hitting instruction display may be displayed. Further, when the player is performing left-handed striking, the present invention is not limited to displaying the first right-hand striking instruction display, but may be configured so that a warning sound can be generated by the speaker D24. Further, the first right-handing instruction display may be configured to be erased after being displayed for a predetermined time, or may be configured to be erased when it is determined that the right-handing has been performed for a predetermined time or more.

The configuration related to the right-hand hitting instruction display according to the second modification from the second embodiment has the following configuration.
(1) When the first right-handed instruction display is displayed due to the game ball entering the first main game starting opening A10 one second before the fluctuation of the final fluctuation in the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state is stopped. In the non-stochastic fluctuation gaming state and the time, the first right-handing instruction display can be continuously displayed even during the symbol fluctuation in the non-stochastic fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state which is the next fluctuation. When the first right-handed instruction display is displayed due to the game ball entering the first main game starting opening A10 one second before the stop of the final fluctuation in the shortened game state, the next fluctuation is the non-probability. At the start point of the symbol variation in the variation game state and the non-time reduction game state, the first right-handing instruction display will be erased. That is, the first right-handed instruction display can be displayed from the final variation in the probability variation game state and the time-reduced game state to the subsequent symbol variation, but the first right-handed instruction display is the non-probability variation game state and the time-reduced game. It is not displayed from the final change in the state to the subsequent pattern change. It should be noted that the configuration may be applied only to the symbol variation in which the final variation in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the final variation in the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state are lost.
(2) Although the display mode of the first right-handed instruction display and the second right-handed instruction display is the same in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, Probability change game state and time reduction game state and non-probability change game state and time reduction game state, stay stage (production tendency) and / or specific production (for example, production related to the end of the time reduction game state) May or may not be performed.
(3) The second right hitting instruction display continues to be displayed on the effect display device SG in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, and the second right It is possible to display only the hitting instruction display alone or to overlap with the first right hitting instruction display (the first right hitting instruction display and the second right hitting instruction display can be displayed simultaneously). In such a case, the display priority of the first right-handing instruction display may be higher than that of the second right-handing instruction display (displayed on the front). Further, it may be configured such that only the first right-handing instruction display cannot be displayed alone. In addition, the configuration may be configured to be applied only at least during a variable display of a predetermined decorative symbol (for example, a symbol variation that does not reach the reach related to a loss).

Further, the configuration related to the right-hand hitting instruction display according to the second modification from the second embodiment may have the following configuration.
(1) Similar to the limited frequency B state in the present embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortened gaming state, the limited frequency is transited to three levels {state referring to limited frequency table 1 (set to limited frequency B1. ) → a state in which the limited frequency table 2 is referred to (defined as limited frequency B2) → a state in which the limited frequency table 3 is referenced (defined as limited frequency B3)} When the first right-handed instruction display is displayed due to the game ball entering the first main game starting opening A10 seconds before, during the symbol variation in the limited frequency B3 (the limited frequency B3 is only one variation). When it is finished, the first right-handing instruction display can be continuously displayed even in the case of showing the one fluctuation), but the final fluctuation (probability) in the limited frequency B3 is set. It is the final variation in the dynamic gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state, and when the limited frequency B3 ends with only one variation, it indicates that one variation)) The first main game one second before the stop of variation When the first right-handed instruction display is displayed due to the game ball entering the starting opening A10, in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (not the limited frequency state) which is the next variation. At the start of the symbol variation, the first right-handing instruction display will be erased. That is, the first right-handing instruction display can be displayed from the final variation in the limited frequency B2 to the subsequent symbol variation (the first right-handing instruction display is displayed from the final variation in the limited frequency B1 to the subsequent symbol variation. However, since the first right-handing instruction display is the final variation in the limited frequency B3 (in the case where the limited frequency B3 ends with only one variation, it indicates the one variation). It is not displayed over the subsequent symbol variations.
(2) Similar to the limited frequency B state in the present embodiment, in the non-stochastic variation game state and the time-reduced game state, the limited frequency is changed to three levels {a state referring to the limited frequency table 1 (limited frequency B1 and ) → a state in which the limited frequency table 2 is referenced (defined as limited frequency B2) → a state in which the limited frequency table 3 is referenced (defined as limited frequency B3)} When the first right-handed instruction display is displayed due to the game ball entering the first main game starting opening A10 one second ago, the symbol variation in the limited frequency B3 (the limited frequency B3 is only one variation). Although the first right-handing instruction display can be continuously displayed during the end of the change (indicating that one change has occurred), the final change (non-change) in the limited frequency B3 It is the final fluctuation in the rate fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, and when the limited frequency B3 ends with only one fluctuation, it indicates that one fluctuation). When the first right-handed instruction display is displayed due to the game ball entering the game starting opening A10, the next variation is the non-stochastic variation game state and the non-time shortened game state (not the limited frequency state). At the start of the symbol fluctuation in, the first right-handing instruction display is erased. That is, the first right-handing instruction display can be displayed from the final variation in the limited frequency B2 to the subsequent symbol variation (the first right-handing instruction display is displayed from the final variation in the limited frequency B1 to the subsequent symbol variation. However, since the first right-handing instruction display is the final variation in the limited frequency B3 (in the case where the limited frequency B3 ends with only one variation, it indicates the one variation). It is not displayed over the subsequent symbol variations.
(3) While the predetermined decorative pattern is changing (for example, a change that does not reach the game related to losing), the first right-handing instruction display and the second right-handing instruction display are displayed in front of the decorative pattern display {display High priority (display priority)}. For example, as the display layers on the effect display device SG, there are a first layer, a second layer, and a third layer from the front, the first layer is the forefront, the third layer is the back, and an image to be displayed In the case of overlapping, the decorative pattern is displayed on the third layer when the image displayed on the front layer is preferentially displayed, and the first right-handing instruction display and the second right-handing instruction are displayed. The display may be displayed on the first layer or the second layer.
(4) The first right-handing instruction display can be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative design. The second right-handing instruction display can also be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern. The first right-handing instruction display may be displayed at a position overlapping with a specific notice effect such as a step-up effect (effect similar to that described above). The second right-handing instruction display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with a specific notice effect such as a step-up effect. The first right-handing instruction display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the hold display image. The second right-handing instruction display is also displayed at a position that does not overlap the hold display image.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine in which the probability variation game state according to the second modification from the second embodiment is finished by executing the symbol variation a predetermined number of times, an appropriate right based on the transition of the game state A hit instruction display can be displayed, and the game machine can be user-friendly.

(Modification 3 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, an example of a configuration in which the probability variation game state ends with the execution of the symbol variation a predetermined number of times, the number of time saving times is larger than the number of probability variation, is exemplified. The configuration of the machine is not limited to that of the second embodiment. Therefore, a configuration different from that of the second embodiment will be referred to as a third modification from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described below in detail.

  First, FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 (second variation 3) of FIG. 4 in the modification 3 from the second embodiment. First, in step 1321, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game starting mouth entrance information is received from the first main game starting entrance detecting device A11s. In the case of Yes in step 1321, in step 1322, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserve balls regarding the main game (especially the first main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1322, in step 1323, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the first main game content determination random number. In this example, as the first main game content determination random number, a random number for win / loss for determining the win / loss, a random number for design to determine the winning symbol, and a variation pattern (variation time) for the special symbol are determined. Three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random number for are acquired. By the way, these three random numbers are generated by random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, and are sequentially acquired at this timing. Next, in step 1324, the CPU MC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number. Next, in step 1325, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is off. If Yes in step 1325, in step 1326, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game time saving flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1326, in step 1327, the CPUMC of the main control board M pre-determines the hit / non-win result and the stop symbol related to the stored hold, based on the hold information (win / win lottery random number and symbol determination random number). Next, in step 1328, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a command relating to the newly generated pending success / failure result and the stop symbol information in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM. (Transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and then proceeds to step 1329.

  Next, in step 1329, the CPUMC of the main control board M, based on the suspension information (variation mode determination random number), the stored variation mode random number delimiter information and variation mode group (non-time saving variation mode group and time variation). Aspect group) is determined in advance (for the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group, refer to the main game table 3 in FIG. 43), and the process proceeds to step 1330. It should be noted that the third modification from the second embodiment is configured such that one variation mode group can include a plurality of types of variation modes (variation times). Even if No at Step 1325 or Step 1326, the process proceeds to Step 1330. Next, in step 1330, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a sub-main control of a command relating to a new generation of suspension (a suspension generation command of the first main game content determination random number, a command relating to variation mode random number delimiter information, etc.). It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1331. When the symbol information is configured to be transmitted to the sub-control board S side as in the third modification from the second embodiment, even if a big hit is suggested as an effect to be executed on the sub-control board S side. Well, in the case of such a configuration, it is desirable to be configured to be able to inform the player of the stop symbol of the main game symbol that is the big hit (stop only when the stop symbol of the main game symbol is the big hit) Notify the pattern). Also, in the case of No in step 1321 or step 1322, the process moves to step 1331. Although the first main game content determination random number is temporarily stored in step 1324, the processing relating to the first main game content determination random number will be described in detail. (1) Entering into the first main game starting opening A10 As a trigger, the first main game content determination random number is acquired and the random number is stored in the register. (2) The first main game content determination random number stored in the register is stored in the RAM of the main control board M, and based on the first main game content determination random number stored in the register, the variation start of the main game symbol is started. Execute pre-reading lottery in front. (3) The first main game content determination random number stored in the RAM of the main control board M is stored in the register at the start of fluctuation of the main game symbol, and based on the first main game content determination random number stored in the register. To determine whether to win or not (may be performed based on the first main game content determination random number stored in the RAM of the main control board M). Incidentally, if the prefetch lottery can be executed on the second main game side, the same process may be executed for the second main game content determination random number.

  As described above, in the third modification from the second embodiment, the variation mode random number when the main game content determination random number (the first main game content determination random number or the second main game content determination random number) is acquired (or when the hold occurs). It is configured to determine the delimiter information and the variation mode group.

  The main game content determination random number information, the winning / discarding random number segment information, the variation mode random number segment information, and the variation mode group information may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side at the timing when the hold occurs. The information to be transmitted to the sub-control board S side is not limited to this, information relating to the stop symbol of the main game symbol, information relating to the profit mode of the main game symbol which is a big hit (special relating to the main game symbol to be stopped) The number of rounds of the game, etc.), the number of holdings immediately after the holding winning (only the number of holdings of the winning side of the first main gaming side or the second main gaming side, both the first main gaming side and the second main gaming side) May be configured to be able to transmit information relating to the number of holdings), etc. {The winning / discarding random number segment information is each gaming state on the first main gaming side (second main gaming side) and the random number value. (Or random number range) and win / win lottery result It is one of the random number division information divided into groups. For example, whether it is a probability variation game state or a non-stochastic variation game state, it is lost, whether it is a probability variation game state or a non-stochastic variation game state. Hit, if it is a probability variation game state, it is a hit, but if it is a non-probability variation game state, it can be classified into groups such as losing}.

  Next, in step 1331, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game starting mouth entrance detecting information is received from the second main game starting entrance detecting device B11s. In the case of Yes in step 1331, in step 1332, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserve balls regarding the main game (particularly the second main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1332, in step 1333, the CPU MC of the main control board M acquires the second main game content determination random number. In addition, in the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers, that is, the winning / missing lottery random number, the symbol lottery random number, and the variation mode lottery random number are acquired, as in the first main game symbol determining means. By the way, an acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and an acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, a win / loss lot number for the first main game and a win / loss lot number for the second main game) The acquisition range) is set to the same. Next, in step 1334, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number. Next, in step 1335, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1335, in step 1337, the CPUMC of the main control board M pre-determines the hit result and the stop symbol relating to the stored hold, based on the hold information (win / win lottery random number and symbol determination random number). Next, in step 1338, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the command relating to the newly generated pending success / failure result and the stop symbol information in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM. (Transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1339, the CPUMC of the main control board M, based on the suspension information (variation mode determination random number), the stored variation mode random number delimiter information and variation mode group (non-time saving variation mode group and time variation). Aspect group) is determined in advance (for the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group, refer to the main game table 3 in FIG. 44), and the process proceeds to step 1340.

  In addition, in the case of No in step 1335, in step 1336, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game shortened flag is off. If Yes in step 1336, the process moves to step 1340. On the other hand, if No in step 1336, the process moves to step 1337.

  Next, in step 1340, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a command relating to a new generation of suspension (a suspension generation command of a second main game content determination random number, a command relating to variation mode random number delimiter information, etc.) It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400). Also, in the case of No in step 1331 or step 1332, the process moves to the next process (process of step 1400).

  Here, the main game table 3 shown in FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 is an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this figure, in the modification 3 from the second embodiment, the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol with respect to a certain random number value is determined based on the winning / non-winning lottery result of the main game symbol and the main game time saving flag state. Is configured to be determined. For example, for a random number value, if the winning / winning lottery result of the main game symbol is a hit, it is easy to determine the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long, and the main game time saving flag is on (time saving game The state is configured so that the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short can be easily determined. Note that this example is merely an example, and there is no limitation on the type of variation mode (variation time), the selection rate, or the like. Further, the symbol variation time of the first main game side in the time shortening game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long {the symbol variation on the second main game side. When it is configured to be advantageous for the player to be executed, the second main game side is likely to be held by decreasing the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (which is advantageous for the player. It is particularly effective in the case where the starting opening on the first main gaming side and the starting opening on the second main gaming side cannot be discriminated from each other for the purpose of constructing a situation}. 43 and 44, the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group are provided in all the situations (game state, etc.), but the invention is not limited to this, and the situation is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. When the number is limited, the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group may be provided only in that case. For example, on the first main game side, the variation mode random number division information and the variation mode group are not provided in the time reduction game state, and on the second main game side, the variation mode random number in the non-time reduction game state. The delimiter information and the variation mode group may not be provided. Further, in the non-time shortening game state, the prefetch lottery is not executed for the second main game side hold, and in the time reduction game state, the prefetch lottery is not executed for the first main game side hold. You may comprise. In such a case, it is preferable that the hold of the second main game side is configured to be given priority over the hold of the first main game side. Further, the table referred to in the "during loss, time reduction game" in FIG. 43 may be configured such that the variable time is determined without depending on the number of holdings (the number of holdings is 0 to 3 and all are the same. See table of contents). Further, the table referred to in the "during loss, non-time reduction game" in FIG. 44 may be configured such that the variable time is determined without depending on the number of holdings (the number of holdings is 0 to 3 and all are the same. Refer to the table of contents)

  Further, as shown in this example, in the third modification from the second embodiment, the variation mode group is determined by the variation mode determination random number. The variation mode group is determined as a group 1 (group A) when the variation time of the main game symbol is short, and a group 3 (group C) when the variation time of the main game symbol is long. It is configured to be easily performed (if it does not correspond to any group, it becomes group 2 (group B)). In addition, in the third modification from the second embodiment, only the hold determined as the group C or the group B is configured to be the hold (trigger hold) that triggers the generation of the prefetching effect.

  Although the storage of the first main game content determination random number and the storage of the second main game content determination random number are executed in steps 1324 and 1334, the main game content determination is performed in the storage area of the RAM of the main control board M. When storing a random number, a dedicated storage area is secured, and only the information relating to the "main game content determining random number" is stored in the byte storing the information relating to the main game content determining random number (various types). It is preferable to configure so as not to store other information such as a timer value (when operating another data stored in the same 1 byte, information relating to the main game content determination random number is rewritten by noise or the like. To prevent it from happening). Further, for the win / loss lottery random number, a change in the game state (from the already-recorded holding game state Not only the change but also the change of the game state may occur due to the newly generated hold, so the game state at the time of executing the win / win lottery related to the lottery random number may be unpredictable), so the win / win lottery The lottery random number is stored until the process is executed. In the third modification from the second embodiment, the command to the sub-main control unit SM relating to the hold information can be transmitted only in the non-time shortening game state only at the time of the hold occurrence relating to the first main game. In the time shortening game state, it is configured so that it can be transmitted only when the hold related to the second main game occurs, but in any of the game states, the hold related to the first main game or the hold related to the second main game However, in such a case, the sub-main control unit SM is configured to determine whether to use the received command. You may. In addition, in the modification 3 from the second embodiment, when the first main game content determination random number is stored, the special game is not executed, and it is a non-time shortened game state. It is configured to transmit the success / failure result related to the hold, the stop symbol, and the information regarding the variation mode group to the sub-control board S side. Further, when the second main game content determination random number is stored, the special game is being executed, or in the time shortening game state, in the case of a new hold result result, stop symbol, variation mode group The information is transmitted to the sub control board S side. Also, a small hit may be provided, and in such a case, when a small hit is being executed, a new holding is performed when the first main game content determination random number is acquired. Win / No result, stop symbol, information on variation mode group is not transmitted to the sub-control board S side, win / loss result on new hold when the second main game content determination random number is obtained, information on stop symbol, variation mode group Is configured to transmit to the sub-control board S side, and when the small hit is not executed, the result of the new holding when the first main game content determination random number is acquired, the stop symbol, the variation mode Information about the group is transmitted to the sub-control board S side, the result of the new hold when the second main game content determination random number is acquired, the stop symbol, the information about the variation mode group is transmitted to the sub-control board S side. Sending It may be configured so that it does not.

  Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. 19 in the third modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has received a command related to a new hold occurrence from the main control board M side (hold information related to the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol). To judge. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the drawing suspension counter (in this example, maximum four for the first main game and maximum four for the second main game). 1 ”is added. Next, in step 2106 (second variation 3), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sends a command relating to the new hold success / failure result and the stop symbol information transmitted from the main control board M side to the hold information temporary storage area ( It is temporarily stored in the area for temporarily storing the information related to the hold on the side of the sub-control board S). Next, in step 2107 (second variation 3), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, based on the hold generation command transmitted from the main control board M side, holds information (particularly, variation mode group, variation mode random number delimiter information). , Etc.) are temporarily stored in the suspension information temporary storage area. In addition, when the information related to the win / fail result, the stop symbol, the variation mode group, and the variation mode random number division information is not transmitted from the main control board M side, step 2106 (second variation 3) or step 2107 (second variation). In the second variation 3), the information is not temporarily stored in the pending information temporary storage area. Next, in step 2117 (second variation 3), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the new hold is the second main game side hold. In the case of Yes in step 2117 (second variation 3), in step 2150 (second variation 3), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a prize prefetching determination process, which will be described later, and then executes step 2118 (second variation 3). ). Next, in step 2118 (second variation 3), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the information indicating that the trigger hold is added to the new hold, in other words, the new hold triggers. It is determined whether it is on hold. In the modified example 3 from the second embodiment, the information indicating that the trigger is held is added to the holding held in the prefetch lottery, and is added in the process of step 2170. If Yes in step 2118 (second variation 3), in step 2250 (second variation 3), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a prefetching effect content determination process, which will be described later, and then step 2116 (second variation 3). ). In addition, in the case of No in step 2117 (second variation 3) (when the new suspension is the suspension of the second main game side) or in the case of No in step 2118 (second variation 3), step 2116 ( Go to the second change 3).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2102, in step 2108, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2108, in step 2110, the CPU SC of the sub control board S subtracts “1” from the counter value of the drawing suspension counter. Next, in step 2112 (second variation 3), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, the hold information related to the symbol variation (especially, hit result, stop symbol information, variation mode group and variation mode random number delimiter information), While deleting from the temporary storage area of the drawing pending information, the remaining pending information is shifted. Next, in step 2114, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 2116 (second variation 3). Even if No in step 2108, the process proceeds to step 2116 (second variation 3).

  Next, in step 2116 (second variation 3), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S causes the display suspension counter value to be displayed on the effect display device SG (particularly, the first suspension display unit SG12 and the second suspension display unit SG13). Is displayed on the effect display device SG in the hold display mode in which the same number of hold display images is determined (the hold display mode is white when the hold display mode does not change), and the next process (step 2300) Process). The display of the hold on the side of the sub-control board S may be displaying the hold image object on the effect display device SG, or may be lighting the LED corresponding to the hold.

  Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the winning pre-reading determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2150 (second variation 3) in FIG. 45 in the third modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 2154, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current game state is a time-reduced game. As described above, in the third modification from the second embodiment, since the prefetch lottery at the time of winning is executed in the time shortening game state, the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the non-probability variation are performed. The pre-reading lottery can be executed in the gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, that is, the pre-reading effect can be executed across the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state to the non-probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. There is. In the case of Yes in step 2154, in step 2155, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, the new hold is a hold that is consumed by the symbol change one time before the final change of the time-saving game state (time-saving final change). Whether or not there is, in other words, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead effect is completed by the end of the symbol variation one time before in the time shortening game state. That is, in the modification example 3 from the second embodiment, the prefetch effect is not executed in the final variation (time saving final variation) of the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state. If Yes in step 2155, in step 2156, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not there is a big hit in the hold that is consumed before the new hold. If Yes in step 2156, in step 2158, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not all of the holds that are consumed before the new hold is consumed of the group A. If Yes in step 2158, in step 2162, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the new hold is the hold of group C. If Yes in step 2162, in step 2163, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a winning prefetch lottery to win with a predetermined probability A (for example, 1/3), and proceeds to step 2168. The predetermined probability A does not have to be ⅓, and by changing the predetermined probability A, it is possible to adjust the degree of expectation that a big hit will occur due to a pattern change that triggers the execution of the look-ahead effect. On the other hand, if No in step 2162, in step 2164 the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the new suspension is that of group B. If Yes in step 2164, in step 2166, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a winning prefetch lottery to win with a predetermined probability B (lower than the above-mentioned predetermined probability A, for example, 1/40). Then, the process proceeds to step 2168. In this way, the probability of winning is relatively higher when the new hold is the hold of group B than when the hold is of group C. Further, in the modified example 3 from the second embodiment, when the newly generated suspension is the suspension of the group A, the pre-winning lottery at winning is not executed for the newly generated suspension. It is configured. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible that the prefetch lottery at the time of winning may be executed even if the group A is held. In that case, the probability of winning the prefetch lottery at winning is “group C> group B> You may comprise so that it may become "group A." On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2164 (that is, when the new hold is the hold of the group A), the next process {process of step 2118 (second variation 3)} is executed without executing the prefetch lottery during winning. Move to.

  Next, in step 2168, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the player has won the winning prefetch lottery executed in step 2163 or step 2166. If Yes in step 2168, in step 2170, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S adds information indicating that “trigger hold” is added to the hold information of the new hold that has been won in the executed prefetch lottery at the time of winning. The data is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the control board S, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2118 (second variation 3)}. Even if No in step 2154, step 2155, step 2156, step 2158, or step 2168, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2118 (second variation 3)}. Here, the trigger hold is a hold that has been won in the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning, and is a hold that triggers a look-ahead effect described later.

In this example, the prefetching may be configured as follows.
(1) Similar to the limited frequency B state in the present embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortened gaming state, the limited frequency is transited to three levels {state referring to limited frequency table 1 (set to limited frequency B1. ) → state of referring to the limited frequency table 2 (defined as the limited frequency B2) → state of referring to the limited frequency table 3 (defined as limited frequency B3)}, in the case of the next variation from the final variation in the limited frequency B2 The look-ahead effect can be executed over the first symbol variation in the limited frequency B3 that is a variation (in the case where the limited frequency B3 ends with only one variation, this one variation) (the limited frequency B2. In such a situation, the look-ahead lottery can be executed for the hold that is scheduled to be exhausted after the transition to the limited frequency B3), and the final fluctuation (probability change) in the limited frequency B3. It is the final variation in the gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, and when the limited frequency B3 ends with only one variation, it indicates that one variation). From the next symbol variation, a non-probability variation gaming state And pre-reading effect is not executed over the symbol variation in the non-time-reduced game state (for the hold that is scheduled to be digested after the transition to the non-probability variation game state and the non-time-reduced game state in the situation of the limited frequency B3) Look-ahead lottery is not executed). That is, in the final change in the limited frequency B2, the look-ahead effect can be executed over the subsequent symbol changes, but the final change in the limited frequency B3 (if the limited frequency B3 ends with only one change, the one change In the above), the look-ahead effect is not executed over the subsequent symbol variation.
(2) Similar to the limited frequency B state in the present embodiment, in the non-stochastic variation game state and the time-reduced game state, the limited frequency is changed to three levels {a state referring to the limited frequency table 1 (limited frequency B1 and ) → a state in which the limited frequency table 2 is referred to (the limited frequency B2 is set) → a state in which the limited frequency table 3 is referred to (the limited frequency B3 is set)}. The look-ahead effect can be executed over the first symbol variation in the limited frequency B3 that is the symbol variation (in the case where the limited frequency B3 ends with only one variation, this one variation). In the situation of B2, the read-ahead lottery can be executed for the hold scheduled to be exhausted after the transition to the limited frequency B3), and the final fluctuation (probability) in the limited frequency B3. It is the final variation in the dynamic gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, and when the limited frequency B3 ends with only one variation, it indicates that one variation) to non-probability variation game which is the next symbol variation. The prefetch effect is not executed over the symbol variation in the state and the non-time-reduced game state (for the hold scheduled to be digested after the transition to the non-probability variation game state and the non-time-reduced game state in the situation of the limited frequency B3) Look-ahead lottery is not performed). That is, in the final change in the limited frequency B2, the look-ahead effect can be executed over the subsequent symbol changes, but the final change in the limited frequency B3 (if the limited frequency B3 ends with only one change, the one change In the above), the look-ahead effect is not executed over the subsequent symbol variation.

  In this way, in the modified example 3 from the second embodiment, in the case of the time reduction game state, only the hold related to the second main game can be the trigger hold related to the prefetch effect, but to the last This is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold related to the first main game side that occurs during the non-time-reduced game state may also be the trigger hold. In addition, the pre-fetch lottery at the time of winning is configured to be executed when the hold that is digested before the newly generated hold is not a big hit hold and all are hold of group A. There is no limitation, and even if there is a big hit on the hold that is digested before the newly-generated hold, the look-ahead lottery at the time of winning may be executed, and in that case, the profit for the player is relatively high. If the jackpot is a low jackpot (for example, 8R jackpot and the gaming state after the special game is a non-stochastic variation gaming state), or if it is a jackpot that is newly executed rather than the jackpot executed first If the big hit is a big hit with a relatively high profit (the number of execution rounds is large, etc.), the prefetch lottery at the time of winning may be executed. In this example, the prefetch lottery for winning is executed only for the holding of the groups B and C, but it may be executed in all the groups. In that case, the winning probability of the group A read-ahead lottery may be the lowest (eg, 1/80). Further, the prefetch lottery at the time of winning may be configured to be executed when there is no "trigger hold" in the hold that is consumed before the new hold.

  Further, in the modified example 3 from the second embodiment, the pre-reading lottery is configured so that only the winning pre-reading lottery can be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the symbol fluctuation is stopped or the symbol fluctuation is changing. The prefetch lottery may be executed at the timing. Specifically, for example, even if the group C that has not won the prefetch lottery at the time of winning is held, the prefetch lottery (preliminary lottery at the time of fluctuation stop) can be executed again when the symbol fluctuation is stopped. Good.

  Next, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the prefetching effect content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2250 (second variation 3) of FIG. 45 in the third modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 2252, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S refers to the prefetch effect type determination table and determines the prefetch effect type by lottery. Here, the upper right part of the figure is an example of a look-ahead effect type determination table, and the look-ahead effect in the third modification from the second embodiment is divided into three effect types: effect type A, effect type B, and effect type C. Therefore, the look-ahead effect to be executed is determined by the contents of the table. It should be noted that each effect type is configured to be randomly selected, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, depending on the degree of expectation of a big hit due to the variation related to the look-ahead effect, the effect-type selection rate May be changed (when the big hit expectation is high, the effect type C is easily selected, etc.).

  Next, in step 2254, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S preliminarily determines whether or not the trigger is held based on the game state and the holding information (random number for winning / losing). Next, in step 2256, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the trigger hold that triggers the prefetching effect is a big hit hold based on the preliminary determination result. If Yes in step 2256, in step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the table for big hit in the hold display mode determination table based on the determined look-ahead effect type, and randomly selects the hold display mode for trigger hold. Then, the process proceeds to step 2268. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2256, in other words, if the trigger hold is a hold that causes a loss, in step 2260, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, based on the determined look-ahead effect type, loses the hold display mode determination table. The hold display mode of the trigger hold is determined by lottery with reference to the time table, and the process proceeds to step 2268.

  Here, the lower right part of the figure is an example of the hold display mode determination table, and in the modified example 3 of the second embodiment, the hold display mode is determined by a random number. When there is no change in the hold, the hold display mode is displayed in white regardless of the random number value. It should be noted that the iridescent color is configured to be selected only when the big hit is held.

  Next, in step 2268, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the determined pre-reading effect type is a pre-reading effect type (in this example, effect type B and effect type C) for executing the background effect. To do. If Yes in step 2268, in step 2270, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns on the background effect execution flag, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 2116 (second variation 3)}. Even if No in step 2268, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2116 (second variation 3)}. The pre-reading effect may be executed a plurality of times during execution of the pre-reading effect (from the timing when the pre-reading lottery is won to the end of variation of the main game symbol related to trigger hold). With such a configuration, for example, in the case where the hold change effect is executed twice during the execution of the prefetching effect, when the hold display mode that changes in the first hold change effect is “blue”, The display mode of the hold changed in the second hold change effect is set to "green" or "red", that is, the hold display mode with a high jackpot expectation is changed every time the hold change effect is executed. It is desirable to configure (ranking up) (in order not to spoil the player's expectation). In addition, the effect related to the hold display change is not limited to this, and as a result, an effect mode that does not involve the hold display change may be provided, and for example, the hold shakes at the start of fluctuation (or when the hold is exhausted). An effect mode (so-called gaze pattern) in which an effect occurs and the hold display does not change as it is, and an effect mode in which the hold display change is subsequently executed may be provided.

  Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2300 of FIG. 19 in the third modification from the second embodiment. The change from the second embodiment is step 2350 (second variation 3), that is, in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative pattern and determines the sub control board S. After being temporarily stored in the RAM area, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes effect content determination processing, which will be described later, in step 2350 (second variation 3), and proceeds to step 2308.

  Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the effect contents determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2350 (second variation 3) in FIG. 48 in the third modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 2352, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the background effect execution flag (a flag that is turned on when the background effect is the background for exclusive use during prefetch as the prefetch effect) is off. If Yes in step 2352, in step 2354 the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not there is a trigger hold in the hold. If Yes in step 2354, in step 2356, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is in the time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 2356, in step 2358, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is the final fluctuation in the time reduction game state. If Yes in step 2358, in step 2360, the CPU SC of the sub control board S, based on the variation mode of the main game symbol, directs the production contents to the final variation of the time-reduced gaming state {final variation in the time-reduced gaming state (big hit) In the 100th variation after the end), the special effect limited to the first variation is executed}, and the process proceeds to step 2366. Next, in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying “non-prefetching background” as the background effect in the fluctuation (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub-sub control unit). (Sent to the SS side), and shifts to the next process (process 2308 of step). Here, the "background for non-prefetching" means that the prefetching effect has not been executed, or the prefetching effect has been executed, but "no background effect" has been determined by lottery in step 2252 (ie, , The background effect displayed when the effect type A is determined as the prefetch effect type). In addition, in the modified example 3 from the second embodiment, when the pre-reading lottery is won, the background effect and / or the pending change effect are executed as the pre-reading effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. , When the pre-reading lottery is won, as a pre-reading effect, the stop display mode of the decorative design is stopped at a chance (the decorative design is stopped at the appearance of a loss, but all three columns are displayed in odd or all even numbers). It is an effect that informs that there may be a trigger hold in the undigested hold by stopping it by, for example, odd chances are the possibility of trigger hold and the likelihood of big hit of trigger hold. May be configured to be stopped at a relatively high value). It should be noted that, in such a configuration, the chance eye is configured to be stopped even when the trigger hold is not present, and the trigger hold is not present even when the chance eye is stopped. By doing so, it is possible to increase the probability of appearance of chance eyes and also to make the player frequently have a sense of expectation.

  Here, the lower right part of the figure is a background effect display image diagram. As shown in the image, the background for non-lookahead is the background of daytime, and the background for prefetch is the background of night (displayed as "readahead zone"). It is configured to notify whether or not there is a trigger hold. In this embodiment, the background for exclusive use during prefetching is displayed when the background effect execution flag is on, and the background for non-prefetching is displayed when the background effect execution flag is off.

  In the case of No in step 2352, in step 2368, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the change is a change related to trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 2368, in step 2370, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines the effect contents (for example, story effect) dedicated to the trigger hold digestion based on the variation mode of the main game symbol. Next, in step 2372, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns off the background effect execution flag, and proceeds to step 2376.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2368, the CPUSC of the sub control board S in step 2374, based on the variation mode of the main game symbol, the effect contents dedicated to before trigger hold digestion (for example, the effect of displaying a countdown until trigger hold digestion, etc.) ) Is determined and the process proceeds to step 2376 (hereinafter, the effect of displaying the countdown until the trigger hold is exhausted may be referred to as a countdown effect).

  Next, in step 2376, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets a command for displaying "a background exclusively for prefetching" as the background effect in the change (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2308).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2354 or step 2356, in step 2364, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines the effect contents based on the variation mode of the main game symbol, and proceeds to the processing of step 2366. If No in step 2358, in step 2362, the CPU SC of the sub control board S, based on the variation mode of the main game symbol, changes the effect contents to the final variation of the time-reduced gaming state. (The 100th variation after the jackpot is over), the special effect limited to the one variation is executed}, and the process proceeds to step 2366. Thus, in the third modification from the second embodiment, the pre-reading effect is not executed in the final variation in the time-reduced game state, but the final variation exclusive effect in the time-reduced game state is executed. .

  In the modified example 3 from the second embodiment, different effect contents are used for the effect contents for exclusive use of trigger hold digestion and the effect contents for exclusive use before trigger hold digestion, but the present invention is not limited to this and the same effect. It may be the content. Further, in the variation related to the trigger hold, both the effect contents dedicated to before trigger hold exhaustion and the effect contents dedicated to trigger hold exhaustion may be executed.

  With the above configuration, in the gaming machine in which the probability variation game state according to the modification 3 from the second embodiment is finished by executing the symbol variation a predetermined number of times, the final variation of the time reduction game state, that is, In the final variation of the non-stochastic variation game state and the time-reduced game state, the special effect limited to one variation is configured to be executed, so that the interest in the time-reduced game state can be improved.

  In the modified example 3 from the second embodiment, the same effect is produced by the final variation of the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the next variation (the first variation of the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state). On the other hand, in the final variation of the non-stochastic variation game state and the time reduction game state, the common effect is not executed. In addition, it is possible to execute over the look-ahead production over the final variation of the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the next variation (the first variation of the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state) It is configured not to execute the look-ahead production over the final variation of the variation game state and the final variation of the time reduction game state and the final variation of the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state.

(Modification 4 from the second embodiment)
In the modified example 3 from the second embodiment, in the gaming machine in which the probability variation game state ends by executing the symbol variation a predetermined number of times, in the time shortening game state in the configuration in which the number of time saving is greater than the number of probability variation Although an example of the performance mode executed is illustrated, the configuration of such a gaming machine is not limited to the configuration of Modification 3 from the second embodiment. Therefore, a configuration different from the modification 3 of the second embodiment will be referred to as a modification 4 of the second embodiment, and only the modifications from the modification 3 of the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the effect content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2350 (second variation 3) of FIG. 48 in the modification 4 from the second embodiment. First, the points of change from the third modification from the second embodiment are step 2378 (second variation 4) to step 2382 (second variation 4). That is, in step 2356, after the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that it is in the time-saving game state, in step 2378 (second variation 4), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the remaining number of time saving (time-saving game). It is the number of remaining fluctuations until the state ends, and it is determined whether or not the time count counter MP52c has the same value as the counter value, a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) or more. If Yes in step 2378 (second variation 4), in step 2380 (second variation 4), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes in the first half of the time reduction game state based on the variation mode of the main game symbol. The effect contents are determined from a plurality of effect candidates (at least the cut-in effect is included, and the remaining number suggestion effect is not included), and the process proceeds to step 2366. Incidentally, the process of step 2380 (second variation 4) and the process of step 2383 (second variation 4), that is, the case where the number of remaining shortening times is 30 times or more, and the number of remaining shortening times is less than 30 times and the time-saving game state The table to be referred to when determining the variation mode of the main game symbol is the same as the case where it is not the final variation (the same tendency of selection of the variation time). Incidentally, in the final variation in the time shortening game state, as a plurality of effect candidates of the effect content to be executed, it is an effect candidate such that the remaining number suggestive effect is performed but the cut-in effect is not performed, and the main game symbol The table to be referred to when determining the variation mode is different from the case where the time reduction game state is not the final variation of the time reduction game state (the variation time selection tendency is different). In addition, the above-mentioned structure is a structure that can be applied regardless of whether the winning / winning lottery result of the main game symbol is a win or a loss.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2378 (second variation 4), that is, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the remaining number of time saving is not more than a predetermined number (for example, 30 times) (the remaining number of time saving is less than 30). If determined), in step 2382 (second variation 4), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S, based on the variation mode of the main game symbol, the effect contents to be executed in the latter half of the time-reduced game state, a plurality of effect candidates ( (At least the cut-in effect and the remaining number suggesting effect are included), and the process proceeds to step 2366.

  By configuring as above, in the gaming machine according to the modification 4 from the second embodiment, the probability variation game state ends by execution of a predetermined number of symbol variations, the final variation of the time-reducing game state, that is, Non-stochastic variation In the gaming state and the final variation of the time shortened gaming state and the variation one time before the final variation of the time shortened gaming state, the selection tendency of the variation mode of the main game symbol is different, but common effects are executed. Is configured to get. In addition, the production tendency of the time-saving game state is different from the big hit end to 70 fluctuations (first half hour reduction) and from 71th fluctuation to 100th change (last half hour reduction) (last half hour reduction) from the end of the big hit. (For example, the cut-in effect can be executed in the first half of the time saving but the countdown effect is not executed, while the count-down effect can be executed in the latter half of the time saving but the cut-in effect is not executed). Even in the state and the time shortening game state, the symbol variation one time before the time saving final variation and the symbol variation 35 times before the time saving final variation have the same tendency of selecting the variation mode (the reference table for determining the variation mode). Despite the existence, the performance tendency to be executed is different, or whether or not a specific performance (for example, remaining number suggestion performance or cut-in performance) is executed It is configured to differ. It should be noted that the specific effect may not be executed in the time variation final variation or in the symbol variation one time before the time reduction final variation.

In addition, in this example, the following may be configured as a configuration related to an effect executed in the time-reduced game state.
(1) Similar to the limited frequency B state in the present embodiment, when the probability variation game state and the time shortened game state are transitioned after the special game is finished, the limited frequency is transitioned to three levels (see the limited frequency table 1). State (referred to as limit frequency B1) → state referring to limit frequency table 2 (referred to as limit frequency B2) → state referring to limit frequency table 3 (referred to as limit frequency B3)} The cut-in effect may be executed at the time of the symbol change before the predetermined number of times, which is a number smaller than the number of stays of the limited frequency B2 from the final change in B2 (the number of symbol changes from the start to the end of the limited frequency B2). The remaining number suggestion effect is configured not to be executed, and the number of stays of the limited frequency B2 is changed from the final change in the limited frequency B2 (from the start to the end of the limited frequency B2). In symbol time fluctuations within the predetermined number is fewer than the pattern change number), may be performed also the remaining number of suggested effect cut-in effect. In the limited frequency B3, the cut-in effect is not executed, but the remaining number suggestion effect can be executed. In addition, the above-mentioned structure is a structure that can be applied to the case where the winning / winning lottery result of the main game symbol is a win or a loss.
(2) Similar to the limited frequency B state in the present embodiment, in the case of shifting to the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the time shortened gaming state after the end of the special game, the limited frequency is transitioned to three levels {Limit frequency table 1 Reference state (defined as limited frequency B1) → State that refers to limited frequency table 2 (defined as limited frequency B2) → State that refers to limited frequency table 3 (defined as limited frequency B3)} The cut-in effect can be executed at the time of a symbol change that is a predetermined number of times or more before the final change in the frequency B2 and is less than the number of stays of the limited frequency B2 (the number of symbol changes from the start to the end of the limited frequency B2). Is configured so that the remaining number suggestion effect is not executed, and from the final change in the limited frequency B2 to the number of stays of the limited frequency B2 (from the start to the end of the limited frequency B2). In symbol time fluctuations within the predetermined number is fewer than the symbol variation count) may be performed also the remaining number of suggested effect cut-in effect. In the limited frequency B3, the cut-in effect is not executed, but the remaining number suggestion effect can be executed. In addition, the above-mentioned structure is a structure that can be applied to the case where the winning / winning lottery result of the main game symbol is a win or a loss.

(Third Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, an example of a gaming machine configured to be able to shift to the limited frequency state after the end of the big hit is illustrated, but the configuration of such a gaming machine is not limited to this embodiment. Therefore, a configuration different from the third embodiment will be referred to as a third embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 51 is an example of the main game tables 1 to 3 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the jackpot probability in the probability varying game state is designed to be "22/1022". Although the details will be described later, by changing the jackpot probability, it is possible to adjust the probability of winning the jackpot in the probability varying gaming state. Also, it is not designed to shift to the probability variation game state after the big hit related to "4A" or "4B", that is, to shift to the probability variation game state after the end of all big hits.

  Next, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the limited frequency B variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 of FIG. 9 in the third embodiment. The changes from the present embodiment are step 1502 (third) and step 1506 (third). First, in step 1502 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2. Within the range of the first stage (the range of the counter value of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2, which is the first stage in the limited frequency state having three stages, 80 ≧ G> 50). Determine if there is. If Yes in step 1502 (third), the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined by referring to the limited frequency table 1 in step 1504, and if No, the process proceeds to step 1506 (third). Next, in step 1506 (third), the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that the counter value G of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 is within the second stage range (three stages in the limited frequency state having three stages). It is determined whether or not it is within the range of the counter value of the noticeable limited frequency B counter MN52c-2, and 50 ≧ G> 10). In the case of Yes in step 1506 (third), the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined by referring to the limited frequency table 2 in step 1508, and in the case of No, the limited frequency table 3 is referred in step 1510 The variation mode of the game symbol is determined.

  Next, FIG. 53 is an example of the limited frequency tables 1 to 3 according to the third embodiment. The contents of the limited frequency tables 1 to 3 have the same configuration as that of the present embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted. In the third embodiment, the counter value of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 when referring to the limited frequency tables 1 to 3 is different from that of the present embodiment.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the configuration of the limited frequency may be configured as follows.
(1) In the limited frequency state (limited frequency A state or limited frequency B state) to determine the variation time of the first main game symbol (the first main game symbol varies), on the first main game side It does not depend on the number of holdings, that is, when the variation time of the first main game symbol is determined by referring to the limitation frequency table 2, the content of the limitation frequency table 2 relating to the first main game symbol is the first main game. It is configured not to depend on the number of holdings on the side (for example, regardless of the number of holdings on the first main game side, refer to the table when the number of holdings of the limited frequency table 2 in FIG. 13 is 0 or 1). Be done).
(2) Regarding the limited frequency table 1, as in the limited frequency table 2, the contents of the table to be referred to may differ depending on the number of holdings (the number of holdings on the second main game side).
(3) When shifting to the limited frequency B state, the limited frequency table referred to first may be the limited frequency table 2.
(4) In FIG. 13, for the portions having the same time value in the table referred to in the case of a hit and the table referred to in the case of a loss, the time value in the case of a hit is more than the time value in the case of a loss. May be changed over a long period of time. For example, the limited frequency table 3 is configured to select 5 seconds for both winning and losing, but for the limiting frequency table 3, 6 for winning. Seconds may be configured to be 5 seconds when lost. With such a configuration, it is possible to secure the time for notifying the player that the player has won.
(5) The period for referring to the limited frequency table 3 may be plural variations (preferably less than 10 variations). For example, when the limited frequency counter value is 1 to 5, the limited frequency table 3 is referred to. You may.
(6) All the tables in the figure (all the tables referred to in the case of hitting, losing, holding 0 to 1 and holding 2 to 3 in the limited frequency tables 1 to 3 and 16 tables) For any one of the tables), the variation time candidates may be increased by another type, for example, all the tables may have two or more variation time candidates. In such a configuration, as an example of the time value to be added, a time value that is twice as long as the longest time value that each table has may be added. In that case, the random value range is the longest time value. The random value range of the time value may be halved. For example, when changing the table contents at the time of losing on the second main game side in the limited frequency table 1, "random number value 0 to 799 → 1 second", "random number value 800 to 911 → 3 seconds", "random number value" 912 to 1023 → 6 seconds ”.

Next, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 (third) of FIG. 16 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1783-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the probability variation big hit symbol (a big hit symbol that shifts to a probability variation game state and a time shortening game state after the big hit is finished, in this example, 5A, 7A, 5B, It is determined whether or not after the big hit according to 7B). If Yes in step 1783-1, in step 1783-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability variation flag. Next, in step 1783-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a certain value (80 in this example) in the probability variation counter MP51c, and proceeds to step 1783-4. Even in the case of No in step 1783-1 (that is, when the stopped big hit symbol is 4A / 4B which is an uncertain variation big hit), the process proceeds to step 1783.4. Next, in step 1783-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (80 in this example) to the time saving counter MP52c. Next, in steps 1783-5, 1783-6, and 1783-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game short time flag, the auxiliary game short time flag, and the limited frequency B flag, respectively. Next, in step 1783-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (80 in this example) to the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1997). . Further, the lower part of the figure is a formula for calculating the jackpot loop rate in the probability variation game state. With the jackpot loop rate in the probability variation game state, the probability variation game state at the time of transition to the probability variation game state after the end of the big jackpot is won without winning the probability variation game state, and the probability variation game state after the jackpot It is a probability that {the first hit (the non-probability fluctuation jackpot won in the non-probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state is the big jackpot that shifts to the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state after the jackpot, and the probability after the jackpot It may be the probability of winning the jackpot again in the period of the variable gaming state and the time shortening gaming state)}. Incidentally, in the probability variation game state (and time shortening game state), since it is configured to advance the game by changing the second main game symbol by right-handing, if only the second main game symbol is changed. It is illustrated. In this example, the transition rate to the probability variation game state after the jackpot is "800/1024" (probability that either 5B or 7B is selected from all the jackpots on the second main game side). Yes, the probability of winning the big hit in the probability variation game state (since the number of continuations is 80 in this example, the probability of winning the big jackpot in one of the 80 win / loss lots in the probability variation game state) is , "1-{(1-22 / 1024) ⁸⁰ } = 0.809" (80.9%). Therefore, the jackpot loop rate (%) in the probability variation game state, that is, the probability (%) that the probability variation game state continues is “800/1024 × 0.809 × 100 = 64.4 (%). As described above, in the third embodiment, the big hit in the probability varying game state is caused by two factors, that is, the probability of shifting to the probability varying game state after the big hit ends and the probability of winning the big hit during the probability varying game state. It is configured to be able to adjust so that the loop rate does not become an excessively high value.In addition, by designing the big hit loop rate in the probability fluctuation game state by a plurality of elements in this way, the probability fluctuation game state after the big hit ends It is possible to design the probability of shifting to or the probability of winning the big hit during the probability varying game state to be a value higher than the big hit loop rate in the probability varying game state.

  Next, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process according to the subroutine of step 2600 (third) of FIG. First, in step 2624, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the switching timing of the stay stage {the stay stage switching timing is, for example, the timing at which the special game ends (is won), the timing at which the game state transitions, Whether the variation mode determination table is switched (even in the same gaming state), the variation frequency is a predetermined number of times (even in the same gaming state), or not} is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2624, in step 2626, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is in the time reduction game state. If Yes in step 2626, in step 2628, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the "space stage" as the stay stage, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999). Further, in the case of No in step 2626, in step 2630, the CPUSC of the sub control substrate S sets the "empty stage" as the stay stage, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999). Even if No in step 2624, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999). In this way, the "space stage" will be set in the same manner whether in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, or in the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, that is, the probability variation The game state and the time-reduced game state and the non-probability variation game state and the time-reduced game state have the same production tendency. If a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, "777" or "333") is displayed as a stop and a big hit occurs, even if the stay stage is a "space stage", it shifts to the probability variation game state after the big hit ends. However, if a combination of other decorative patterns (for example, "222" etc.) is stopped and displayed as a big hit, even if the stay stage is "Space stage", there is a probability after the big hit ends. It may be configured so that it is not known whether or not it is in the variable gaming state. It should be noted that the number of types of combinations of specific decorative symbols such as “777” and “333” may be smaller than the number of types of combinations of other decorative symbols such as “222”.

  With the above configuration, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the probability variation game state ends in a predetermined number of symbol variations, and the probability variation game state is transitioned to after the jackpot. Providing a big hit and a big hit that shifts to a non-probability variation game state after the big hit ends, probability variation due to two factors: the probability of transitioning to the probability variation game state after the big hit ends and the probability of winning the big hit during the probability variation game state By configuring so that the jackpot loop rate in the gaming state does not become an excessively high value, the probability of shifting to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot ends or the probability of winning the jackpot during the probability variation gaming state, the probability variation It can be designed to a value higher than the jackpot loop rate in the gaming state.

The gaming machine according to this example may be designed as follows.
(1) Non-probability fluctuation The jackpot probability in the game state is 1 / 3199.7
(2) Probability fluctuation The jackpot probability in the game state is 1 / 60.96
(3) The rate of transition to the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state after the jackpot is 80%, and the number of symbol variations (ST number) in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state is 100 times (4 ) Probability fluctuation after the jackpot is over and the transition rate to the time shortening game state x Probability of winning the jackpot in the probability varying game state and the time shortening game state = 1- (1-1 / 60.96) ¹⁰⁰ × 80/100 = 0.647
(5) Non-stochastic fluctuation game state after completion of jackpot and transition rate to time shortening game state × probability of winning jackpot in non-stochastic fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state = 1- (1-1 / 319. 7) ¹⁰⁰ × 20/100 = 0.054
(6) The above “(4) + (5)” = 0.701 may be set as the substantial condominium continuation rate.

(First modification from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the jackpot loop rate in the probability varying game state is excessively high due to two factors: the probability of transitioning to the probability varying game state after the jackpot and the probability of winning the jackpot during the probability varying game state. Although an example of the gaming machine configured to be adjustable so as not to have a value has been illustrated, the configuration of such a gaming machine is not limited to the configuration of the third embodiment. Therefore, a configuration different from that of the third embodiment will be referred to as a first modification of the third embodiment, and only the changes from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 56 is an example of the main game tables 1 to 3 according to the first modification from the third embodiment. In the modified example 1 from the third embodiment, as illustrated in the present embodiment, the probability ball game after the big hit ends by the game ball entering the specific area C22 provided in the big winning hole during the big hit. It has a configuration (sometimes referred to as a ball-making machine) that shifts to the state, the long open big hit on the first main game side is "5A / 7A", and the long open big hit on the first main game side is The probability of being selected is “524/1024”, the long open jackpot on the second main game side is “5B · 7B”, and the probability of selecting the long open jackpot on the second main game side is “800”. / 1024 ", the jackpot on the second main gaming side is more likely to be a long open jackpot than the jackpot on the first main gaming side, that is, the second main jackpot is larger than the jackpot on the first main gaming side. The big jackpot on the game side moves to the probability fluctuation game state after the big hit ends It is configured easily. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 16R for all jackpots, and a round in which a game ball is easy to enter and a round in which a game ball is difficult to enter are provided based on the jackpot symbol. Here, the number of times a round in which a game ball is easy to enter in a jackpot is executed is set as a real round number, and the real round numbers of “2A” and “2B” are “4R”, “5A” and “5B” The actual number of rounds for the numbers "8R", "7A" and "7B" is "16R".

  Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1700 of FIG. 4 in the first modification from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 1711 (third variation 1), step 1745-1 (third variation 1) to step 1745-8 (third variation 1), and step 1750 (third variation 1). ), That is, in step 1708, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a special game start display instruction command to the sub control board S side, or in step 1710, the CPUMC of the main control board M, When it is determined that the special game execution flag is ON, in step 1711 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the round to be executed is a round related to opening the second special winning opening C20. To determine. If Yes in step 1711 (third variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1800, and if No, the process proceeds to step 1712.

  Further, in step 1718, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag, and then in step 1745-1 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M shows that the stopped jackpot symbol is It is determined whether or not it is a 1 long open design (a big winning design in which the first special winning opening C10 is long open, 5B, 7B, 7A). In the case of Yes in step 1745-1 (third variation 1), in step 1745-2 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the long opening pattern (relative pattern) as the opening pattern of the first special winning opening C10. Set for a long time, and the process proceeds to step 1745-4 (third variation 1). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1745-1 (third variation 1) (when the big hit symbol is 2A, 5A, 2B), in step 1745-2 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M is As the opening pattern of the first big winning opening C10, a short opening pattern (an opening pattern that is opened for a relatively short time, and an opening pattern in which a game ball is hard to enter) is set, and step 1745-4 (third variation 1) Move to. Next, in Step 1745-4 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the first special winning opening C10 (the first special winning opening C10 is opened in the 14th and 16th rounds). Then, the release timer is started and the process proceeds to step 1722. In the modified example 1 from the third embodiment, the jackpot pattern (long open jackpot pattern) that is easy to enter the specific area C22 is “5A / 7A / 5B / 7B”, while the first big winning opening C10 is long. The jackpot pattern that will be opened (first long open pattern) is "7A / 5B / 7B". In addition, although details will be described later, in the first modification from the third embodiment, when the game ball enters the specific area C22, the fact that the game ball enters the specific area C22 is not notified, and thereafter, , Is configured to notify that the game ball has entered the specific area C22 upon the entry of the game ball into the first special winning opening C10. Here, "5A" is a big hit pattern that is easy to enter the specific area C22, but the first big winning opening C10 is a short opening and the game ball is difficult to enter the first big winning opening C10 ( No sphere) is configured. That is, after the big hit related to "5A", it shifts to a probability variation game state (because it is easy to enter the specific area C22), but it is a big hit that is not notified that the specific area C22 is entered, and a hidden probability variation pattern. Sometimes referred to.

  Further, in the present example, when the game ball passes through the specific area C22, it may be configured to notify that there is a ball entering the specific area C22. In such a case, further, in the distribution game execution round in the long open big hit (big hit relatively easy to enter the specific area C22), "Aim for V!" On the effect display device SG. As described above, it may be configured to execute an effect (may be referred to as a specific area emission effect) instructing the player to shoot a game ball toward the special winning opening (sorting game execution round in all big hits) May be executed in). In addition, in the round before the sorting game execution round, a production is performed to instruct the player to shoot a game ball toward the special winning opening, such as "Aim for V in the next round". It may be configured as follows. Also, in the case of being configured to be able to execute the specific area firing effect in the distribution game execution round or the round one time before the distribution game execution round, at the time of first hit (non-probability fluctuation game state and non-time shortened game) It may be configured such that the production mode of the specific area launching effect in the state of winning big hits) and the performance of the specific area launching in the condominium (during the time reduction gaming state of the big hits) are different from each other. It may be configured not to execute the specific area firing effect. As an example, the display area of "Aim for V!" May be configured to be larger in the specific area launch effect at the time of first hit than in the specific area launch effect at the time of continuous vacation. In addition, an ending effect (a predetermined condition (for example, one or a combination of conditions such as the number of consecutive games during a specific game, the total number of coins obtained during a continuous game, a plurality of types of specific effects, etc.) Even when it is configured to be able to execute the effect during the special game or the specific game that is displayed only when it is satisfied, it may be configured such that the specific area firing effect can be executed, and the ending effect is executed. The effect mode of the specific area firing effect executed during the big hit that is present and the effect mode of the specific area firing effect executed during the big hit that is not performing the ending effect may be configured to be different. The specific area firing effect may not be executed during the big hit. As an example, the display area of "Aim for V!" Is larger in the specific area launching effect during the big hit not performing the ending effect than in the particular area launching effect during the big hit performing the ending effect. You may.

  Further, in step 1722, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a game state information command (command indicating that a special game is in the game state) relating to the special game to the sub control board S side, and then step 1745. At -5 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M is turned on by the specific area entry flag {step 1832 (third variation 1), which is turned on when the game ball enters the specific area C22. Flag is set to ON. In the case of Yes in step 1745-5 (third variation 1), in step 1745-6 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M detects whether or not the entry into the first special winning opening C10 is detected. Determine whether. If Yes in step 1745-6 (third variation 1), in step 1745-7 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a specific area entry command (command to the sub-control board S side). Yes, a command indicating that a game ball has entered the specific area C22) is set. Next, in step 1745-8 (third variation 1), the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the specific area entry flag, and proceeds to step 1724. In addition, in the case of No in step 1745-5 (third variation 1) or step 1745-6 (third variation 1), the processing shifts to step 1724. Further, after the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a special game end display instruction command to the side of the sub control board S in step 1738, in step 1750 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M will be described later. The game state determination process after the end of the special game is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing according to the subroutine of step 1800 of FIG. 57 in the first modification from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 1830 (third variation 1), step 1831 (third variation 1), step 1900 (third variation 1), and step 1832 (third variation 1), that is, When the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1802 that the distribution game in-execution flag is off, the CPUMC of the main control board M has the specific area C22 in step 1830 (third variation 1). The opening pattern of the second special winning opening C20 is set, and the process proceeds to step 1810. The structure of the special winning opening is not limited to this, and only one big winning opening is provided, and a shielding member that can shield the entry into the specific area C22 and can be driven is provided, and the distribution game execution round. In the rounds other than the above, the shielding member remains closed, and in the distribution game execution round, the shielding member may be opened upon detection of the entry of the game ball into the special winning opening. Further, in step 1812, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution game in-execution flag, and then in step 1831 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M becomes the set release pattern. To open the second special winning opening C20 (in the distribution game execution round, the second special winning opening C20 will be opened for a long time), start the opening timer, and go to step 1900 (third variation 1). Transition. In addition, in step 1802, when the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the distribution game in-execution flag is on, the process proceeds to step 1900 (third variation 1). Next, in step 1900 (third variation 1), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a shielding member drive control process described later, and proceeds to step 1816. Further, in step 1826, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability variation shift reservation flag, and then in step 1832 (third variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the specific area entry flag. It is turned on and the process proceeds to step 1828.

  Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the shielding member drive control processing according to the subroutine of step 1900 (third variation 1) in FIG. 58 in the first modification from the third embodiment. First, in step 1901, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the round currently being executed is a distribution game execution round (a round in which the shielding member C28 can be opened, and in the present example, 4R, 6R, 8R). ) Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1901, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1902 whether or not the entry of the first game ball in the special game being executed has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 1902, in step 1904, the CPUMC of the main control board M makes a short opening (in the specific area C22 when the game ball is continuously fired toward the second special winning opening C20 during the execution of the special game). The opening time during which the game ball is difficult to enter is set to a short opening time) and the driving of the shielding member C28 is started, and the process proceeds to step 1906. On the other hand, if No in step 1902, the process moves to step 1906.

  Next, in step 1906, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the big hit symbol in the stop is the second main game length open big hit symbol (the big hit on the second main game side, in any distribution game execution round). The shielding member C28 is a jackpot pattern that can be opened long, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 5B / 7B). If Yes in step 1906, in step 1908, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the round being executed is the sixth round. In the case of Yes in step 1908, in step 1910, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the entry of the second game ball in the running round (the sixth R in this example) is detected. . In the case of Yes in step 1910, in step 1912, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens long (in the specific area C22 when the game ball is continuously fired toward the second special winning opening C20 during the execution of the special game). The driving of the shielding member C28 is started at the time when the game ball is almost definitely entered or the opening time is set to be long so that the ball can be easily entered), and the process proceeds to step 1914. Even if No in step 1906, step 1908 or step 1910, the process moves to step 1914.

  Next, in step 1914, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the big hit symbol in the stop is the first main game shielding member length open big hit symbol (one of the big hits on the first main game side, the sorting game execution round). At, it is determined whether or not the shielding member C28 is a big hit pattern that can be opened long, and in this example, 5A and 7A). If Yes in step 1914, in step 1916, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the round being executed is the eighth round. In the case of Yes in step 1916, in step 1918, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the entry of the sixth game ball in the running round (in the present example, the 8R) is detected. . If Yes in step 1918, in step 1920, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts driving the shielding member C28 in the long open state, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1816). On the other hand, if No in step 1901, step 1914, step 1916, or step 1918, the process moves to the next process (process in step 1816). The opening time of the shielding member C28 is 50 ms for short opening and 29000 ms for long opening. The driving of the shielding member C28 is forcibly terminated (closed) when the opening period of the second special winning opening C20 is finished while the shielding member C28 is being driven (opening).

  Here, the right part of the figure is a list of count numbers that the shielding member C28 is opened in the distribution game execution round. First, in the case of the first main game shield member short open big hit pattern (2A), the shield member C28 is opened only at the first count in any of the 4R, 6R, and 8R. The first count means the first ball entered in the running round. Further, when the shielding member C28 is opened at the first count, the shielding member C28 is shortly opened, and when the shielding member C28 is opened at the second or sixth count, the shielding member C28 is long opened. There is. Next, in the case of the first main game shielding member length open big hit pattern (5A, 7A), the 4R and 6R are only the 1st count, and the 8R is the 1st count and the 6th count. . That is, when the game ball is continuously fired toward the second special winning opening C20 during the execution of the special game related to the first main game shielding member length open big hit symbol (5A, 7A), the 8R 6 ball The game ball that has entered the eye enters the specific area C22. Next, in the case of the second main game short open big hit symbol (2B), like the first main game shield member short open big hit symbol, all of the 4R, 6R, and 8R are shielded only at the first count. The member C28 opens. Next, in the case of the second main game length open big hit symbol (5B, 7B), the 4R and 8R are only the first count, and the 6R is the first count and the second count. That is, in the case of continuing to shoot the game ball toward the second special winning opening C20 during the execution of the special game related to the second main game jackpot pattern (5B, 7B), the second ball of the 6R ball The game ball that has become will enter the specific area C22. Further, in the distribution game execution round, regardless of the special game relating to any big hit symbol, in all the distribution game execution rounds (4R, 6R and 8R), the first ball of the game ball enters Thus, the shielding member C28 is opened (in this example, opened by a short opening). In addition, the round in which the shielding member C28 for each big hit symbol is long opened, and the configuration of the count is not limited to this. For example, the first main game side is divided into three groups only by the big hit symbol. Alternatively, specifically, at the time of executing the big hit related to "7A", the shielding member C28 is opened long by the entry of the game ball of the second round in the sixth round, and when the big hit related to "5A" is executed, The shielding member C28 may be opened long by the entry of the game ball of the sixth count in the eighth round, and the shielding member C28 may not be opened long when the big hit related to "2A" is executed.

  Further, in the modified example 1 from the third embodiment, as the distribution game execution round, any one of the even rounds of the second R, the fourth R, the sixth R, the eighth R, the tenth R, and the twelfth, or a combination of a plurality of rounds. Alternatively, the distribution game execution round may be a combination of one or a plurality of odd rounds. Further, in the rounds other than the distribution game execution round, the shielding member C28 is not driven. Furthermore, the round and the number of rounds in which the shield member C28 opens long (or short open) are not limited to the configuration of this example, and, for example, (1) the first main game shield member long open big hit symbol (5A / 7A) In the big hit of 4R, the shielding member C28 is long open, and (2) In the case of big hit of 5A, the shielding member C28 is long open and is 7A. In the case of a big hit, the shielding member C28 is long open at the 6th count of the 6R, (3) The shielding member C28 at the 6th count of the 8R in the big hit related to the second main game big hit design (5B / 7B). Is long open, (4) 3B is newly provided as a big hit symbol on the second main game side, and in the case of a big hit related to 3B, the shielding member C28 is long open at the second count of the 4R and becomes 5B. In case of such a big hit, Shielding member C28 to sixth count of 6R is long opened, when the jackpot according to 7B, the shielding member C28 two count th first 8R may be long open.

  Further, the first modification from the third embodiment may be configured as follows. (1) 1st main game shield member short open big hit design, 1st main game shield member long open big hit design, 2nd main game short open big hit design, and 2nd main game long open design, plural types exist, ( 2) There are a plurality of types of the first main game shielding member length open big hit pattern, divided into A group and B group, during the big hit according to the A group, the 6R is a shielding member at the 1st count and the 6th count C28 opens, during the big hit according to the B group, the 4R opens the shield member C28 at the 1st and 6th counts, (3) during the big hit related to the first main game shield member short open big hit pattern. May have a round in which the shielding member C28 is opened at the 1st and 6th counts, but in such a case, it is preferable that the opening of any shielding member C28 is short. (4) First Lord Technique shield member length open big hit pattern is divided into A group, B group and C group, during the big hit according to A group, 6R is the shield member C28 is open at the first and sixth count, B During the big hit related to the group, the 4R opens the shielding member C28 at the 1st and 6th counts, and during the big hit related to the C group, the 6R releases the shielding member C28 at the 1st and 2nd counts. (5) The big hit on the first main game side and the big hit on the second main game side, the big hit (the same round and same) (A big hit that the shielding member C28 opens at the time of counting) may be provided, and in such a case, the same round and the same cover for all big hits on the first main game side. The proportion of the big hits on the first main game side that the shield member C28 opens in the slot is the same round for all big hits on the second main game side, and the shield member C28 opens at the same count. It is preferable to configure the jackpot on the second main game side to be lower than the selected proportion. Specifically, in the case of a big hit according to 7A, the shielding member C28 is opened at the first count and the second count of the 6R, which is the same as the big hit according to the second main game length open big hit pattern, and is related to 5A. In the case of a big hit, the shielding member C28 opens at the first and sixth counts of the 8th round. In addition, during the big hit related to 7A, an effect that informs that it is easy to enter a game ball into the specific area C22 from the start of the big hit, and a battle victory effect (the player can easily enter the specific area C22. After insulting against, the production of notifying that it is easy to enter the game ball into the specific area C22 is executed, and during the big hit related to 5B, the battle defeat production (entering the specific area C22 is entered). After the ease of playing for the player, a performance that does not notify that it is easy for a game ball to enter the specific area C22 is executed (a battle defeat production is executed during the big hit related to 5B). However, in reality, it is easy to enter the game ball into the specific area C22).

  With such a configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to predict at which timing the shielding member C28 is to be opened long, that is, at what timing the game ball enters the specific area C22. As a result, during the special game, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation for the probability varying game state, and the interest of the game is enhanced. Incidentally, in the modified example 1 from the third embodiment, the shielding member C28 is shortly opened at the entrance of the game ball of the first count in all the sorting game execution rounds in the big hit relating to all the big hit symbols. Although configured, it is not limited to this, it is not necessary to apply the configuration of the short opening, specifically, when the big hit related to the first main game shielding member short open big hit symbol, 4R, 6R And the shield member C28 does not open in the 8R, when the big hit related to the first main game shield member length open big hit symbol is executed, the shield member C28 does not open in the 4R and 6R, and 6 counts in the 8R. The shielding member C28 is opened long by the entry of the game ball of the eye, when the big hit related to the second main game long opening big hit symbol is executed, the shielding member C28 is not opened in the fourth R and the eighth R. The shielding member C28 by ball entrance of 2 counts th game ball may be configured to long opening in the first 6R. Further, in the modified example 1 from the third embodiment, regardless of whether the jackpot is the jackpot according to the first main game shield member short open jackpot pattern or the jackpot according to the first main game shield member long open jackpot pattern. It may be configured to have one or more distribution game execution rounds in which the shielding member C28 is opened by the game balls entering the first and sixth count big winning openings. In such a configuration, in both the big hit according to the first main game shield member short open big hit pattern and the big hit according to the first main game shield member long open big hit pattern, the 1st count and the 6th count of the 6R When the shielding member C28 is configured to be opened by entering the game ball into the special winning opening, the first main game shield member short opening big hit in the big hit related to the design, the game ball enters the sixth winning opening While the shield member C28 is shortly opened in the ball, in the big hit related to the first main game shield member long open big hit pattern, the shield member C28 is long opened when the game ball enters the sixth winning hole. It may be configured as follows. In the case of such a configuration, the number of distribution game execution rounds in which the shielding member C28 is opened by the game balls entering the first and sixth count big winning openings is the first. The big hit according to the main game shield member short open big hit pattern and the big hit according to the first main game shield member long open big hit pattern may be the same number of times or different numbers of times. In addition, the distribution game execution round in which the shielding member C28 is opened by the entry of the game ball into the special winning opening of the first count and the sixth count, the big hit related to the first main game shield member short open big hit pattern. It is 4R, and may be configured to be 6R in the big hit related to the first main game shielding member length open big hit symbol.

  Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 (third variation 1) of FIG. 57 in the first modification from the third embodiment. First, in step 1784-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability variation shift reservation flag is on. If Yes in step 1784-1, in step 1784-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability variation shift reservation flag. Next, in step 1784-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability variation flag. Next, at step 1784-4, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (80 in this example) to the probability variation counter MP51c.

Next, in step 1784-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M makes a hidden probability variation pattern (a big hit that easily enters the specific area C22, but does not notify that the player has entered the specific area C22. It is a big hit pattern related to the big hit, and in this example, it is determined whether or not after the big hit related to 5A). If Yes in step 1784-11, in step 1784-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency B flag. Next, in step 1784-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (80 in this example) to the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2. Next, in step 1784-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a space stage command (a command to the side of the sub control board S and a command to set the background to "space stage"), and in step 1784 Move to -8. In this example, the main control board M side is configured to transmit the command regarding the stay stage to the sub control board S side so that the stay stage on the sub control board S side can be determined. Is not limited, the command related to the game state transmitted from the main control board M side (command related to which the symbol variation is transmitted at the start timing of the symbol variation, and which gaming state after the end of the big hit The sub-control board S receives an end demo command for transmitting whether to shift, etc.), and the sub-control board S determines which stage the stay stage is based on the command related to the game state. May be. In addition, the said structure is applicable to the structure regarding all the stay stages in this example. Also, in the case of No in step 1784-1 or step 1784-1, the process proceeds to step 1784-8. Next, in step 1784-8, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (80 in this example) to the time saving counter MP52c. Next, in step 1784-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game short time flag, and in step 1784-10 turns on the auxiliary game short time flag, and proceeds to step 1997. Here, the lower part of the figure is a formula for calculating the jackpot loop rate in the probability variation game state. Similar to the third embodiment described above, also in the first modification from the third embodiment, the case where only the second main game symbol is changed is illustrated. The transition rate to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot is "800/1024" (all jackpots related to the long open symbol are to enter the specific area C22), and the probability variation gaming state (the number of continuations However, in this example, the probability of winning the big hit in 80 times is “1-{(1-22 / 1024) ⁸⁰ } = 0.809”. Therefore, the jackpot loop rate (%) in the probability variation game state, that is, the probability (%) that the probability variation game state continues is “800/1024 × 0.809 × 100 = 64.4 (%). There is.

The gaming machine according to this example may be configured as follows.
(1) When the probability change game state and the time shortening game state are transferred after the big hit, 200 times are given as the number of STs. (2) When the non-stochastic fluctuation game state and the time shortening game state are changed after the big hit. Is given 100 times as a shortened number of times.
(4) Probability fluctuation Big hit probability in gaming state = 1 / 12.8
(5) Substantial probability fluctuation after the big hit on the first main game side Game state transition rate = 50%, that is, long open big hit on the first main game side: short open big hit = 5: 5
(6) Substantial probability fluctuation after the big hit on the second main game side game state transition rate = 80%, that is, long open big hit on the second main game side: short open big hit = 8: 2
With such a configuration, the number of times saved when the probability variation game state shifts after the big hit ends is larger than the number of times saved when the non-probability change game state changes after the big hit end.

  Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 19 in the first modification from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 2530-1 (third variation 1) to step 2530-9 (third variation 1), that is, it is determined in step 2502 that the special game flag is on. If, or after turning on the special game flag in step 2506, in step 2530-1 (third variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S informs that the jackpot being executed is the second main game length open. Big hit pattern (a big hit on the second main game side that is easy to enter the specific area C22, and, when entering the specific area C22, is a big hit symbol to be notified at that time, in this example, 5B · 7B ) Is a jackpot or not. In the case of Yes in step 2530-1 (third variation 1), in step 2530-2 (third variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S continues production (probability change after end of big jackpot) as the production during the big hit. A command for displaying an effect for notifying the shift to the game state) on the effect display device SG is set, and the process proceeds to step 2530-6 (third variation 1). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2530-1, in step 2530-3 (third variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, the big jackpot being executed is the first main game length open notification big jackpot pattern (in the specific area C22). It is a big hit on the first main game side that is easy to enter, and is a big hit design to be notified at that time when entering a specific area C22, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit according to 7A). To do. In the case of Yes in step 2530-3 (third variation 1), in step 2530-4 (third variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the battle win effect (probability after completion of big hit) A command for displaying an effect for notifying that the player will enter the variable game state) on the effect display device SG is set, and the process moves to step 2530-6 (third variation 1). In addition, in the case of No in step 2530-3 (third variation 1), in step 2530-5 (third variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the battle is being lost (the big hit is over). A command for displaying an effect that does not definitely notify the subsequent game state) on the effect display device SG is set, and the process proceeds to step 2530-6 (third variation 1). Next, in step 2530-6 (third variation 1), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets a command for sequentially displaying the winning number. Next, in step 2530-7 (third variation 1), the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the specific area entry command is received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2530-7 (third variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is step 2530-8 (third variation 1), and the big jackpot being executed is a long open notification big jackpot pattern (first main game). It is a big hit symbol that is a combination of the long open notice symbol and the second main game long release notice symbol, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit according to 7A, 5B, 7B). If Yes in step 2530-8 (third variation 1), in step 2530-9 (third variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has a specific area entrance effect (there is a specific area C22. Command for executing the effect) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2520. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2530-7 (third variation 1) (the big hit being executed is 2A / 5A / 2B in this example), or in the case of No in step 2530-8 (third variation 1) Also, the process proceeds to step 2520. As described above, in the first modification from the third embodiment, even if there is a ball in the specific area C22, the notification is not made at that time, and the player is specified at the time of entering the first special winning opening C10. It is configured to be able to execute a specific area entrance effect, which is an effect that informs that there is an entrance in the area C22.

  Next, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 (third variation 1) in FIG. 19 in the first modification from the third embodiment. First, in step 2632, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, the stay stage switching timing {here, the stay stage switching timing is, for example, the timing when the special game ends (is won), the timing when the gaming state shifts, Whether the variation mode determination table is switched (even in the same gaming state), the variation count may be a predetermined number of times (even in the same gaming state), etc. judge. If Yes in step 2632, in step 2634, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. If Yes in step 2634, in step 2635, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the space stage command (command set in step 1784-7) from the main control board M side is received. . In the case of Yes in step 2635, in step 2636, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S has different stay stages (types of effect contents, and effects (background effects, notice effects, etc.) that can be executed when the stay stages are different. Then, the "space stage" is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999).

  If No in step 2634, in step 2638, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the “empty stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999). In addition, in the case of No in step 2635, in step 2637, the CPUSC of the sub control substrate S sets the “evening stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2999). Even if No in step 2632, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2999). Thus, in the modification 1 from the third embodiment, the space stage command is received from the main control board M side, that is, in the time-saving game state, the hidden probability variation design (5A in this example) is not a design. When the player hits the specific area C22 in the big hit related to (shifts to the probability fluctuation game state after the big hit ends), the "space stage" is set as the stay stage, while the big hit hits the specific area C22. If the ball does not enter (does not shift to the probability variation game state after the big hit ends) or after the big hit related to the hidden probability variation pattern (5A in this example), the "evening stage" is set as the stay stage. . That is, the stay stage that is basically set is different between the case where the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state are achieved after the jackpot is over, and the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state is established after the jackpot is over. However, after the jackpot related to the hidden probability variation pattern (5A in this example), even if the game shifts to the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state after the jackpot, the non-stochastic variation game as the stay stage. The same "evening stage" as in the case of shifting to the state and the time shortening game state will be set. If you win the big hit in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, it will be decided which stay stage will be after the big hit depending on the type of effect during the symbol change related to the big hit. You may comprise. As an example, if you win in a battle production while symbols are changing or if a character is suddenly activated while symbols are changing and a big hit is announced, the stay stage after the big hit is "Space Stage". (It will be definite that it is in the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state), and if the defeat in the battle production during the symbol change is executed, the stay stage after the jackpot is the "evening stage" ( It may be difficult to determine from the stay stage whether it is the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state or the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state).

  With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment, the gaming sphere that triggers the opening of the shielding member C28 can enter the specific area C22 as it is. Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player does not enter the specific area C22 despite the fact that the shielding member C28 is opened long, which is disadvantageous to the player.

  Further, by configuring as in the modified example 1 from the third embodiment, the special winning opening having the specific area C22 for determining whether or not to shift to the probability variation game state after the end of the special game is the second special winning opening. On the other hand, by setting C20, the opportunity to execute the effect related to entering the specific area C22 (the effect that suggests the game state after the end of the special game) is to enter the game ball into the first big winning opening C10. (That is, by changing the winning opening having a specific area C22 relating to the transition to the probability variation gaming state and the winning opening relating to the performance suggesting the transition to the probability variation gaming state upon entry of the ball) Even when the player actually enters C22, it is possible to configure so that the effect that the game ball has entered the specific area C22 is not executed, and such an effect mode is a big hit (in this example, 5A Jackpot) As a result, the player recognizes that he does not shift to the probability variation game state by seeing the effect during the special game triggered by the entry into the first big winning opening C10, and when he is discouraged, he actually receives the special The game state after the game is the probability variation game state (because the shielding member C28 inside the second special winning opening C20 is long open and the game ball has entered), and then the probability variation game state. At the moment of recognizing that (the effect to that effect is executed), it becomes possible to be excited, and the enjoyment of the game is enhanced. In addition, even when there is no ball in the specific area C22 of the second special winning opening C20, a transition to the probability variation game state or a continuation is suggested with the entrance to the first special winning opening as a trigger. Can be executed. In addition, when the game ball enters the specific area C22 in the second special winning opening C20, the same production effect as that of the above-described production mode in which the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area C22 is reported. In the case where it is configured to be able to execute, a predetermined condition (when an ascending effect, which is a specific effect during a big hit, occurs, not the first hit on the first main game side, but the second main game side's double hits. If it is a big hit after a solitary eye, etc.), the notification mode of the effect may be different from that when it is not under a predetermined condition (the effect mode under the predetermined condition has a smaller display area and is inconspicuous) , Etc.), and under a predetermined condition, the same effect as the effect mode as if the notification that the game ball entered the specific area C22 is notified may not be executed. In addition, the ascension effect is a certain condition (a state where the big hit symbols are stopped in the time-reduced game state continuously) during a condominium (when the number of condominiums reaches a predetermined number of times, after the occurrence of the particular rendition, The number of game balls that can be acquired is relatively large, such as a specific jackpot (the number of rounds to be executed is 16 rounds) executed after satisfying the total number of prize balls to be acquired in the hall, etc. It is a production that occurs in big hits etc.).

  In the first modification from the third embodiment, when the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state are entered after the big hit ends, the effect display format A (stay stage A) and the effect display format B (stay stage). While it can be set to either of B), when the non-stochastic variation game state and the time shortening game state are entered after the end of the big hit, the effect display format A (stay stage A) is not set, but the effect display format B It may be configured such that it can be set in (stay stage B). In such a case, as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol which is stopped and displayed when the big hit symbol is stopped, the effect display format A (stay stage A) is definitely set after the big hit is stopped. (For example, "777") and it is not definite that the effect display format A (stay stage A) is set after the jackpot {or it is determined that the effect display format B (stay stage B) is set. It is equipped with a stop symbol combination β {for example, “222” or “2 ★ 2” (★ is an arbitrary number)}, and the number of types of the stop symbol combination α is smaller than the number of types of the stop symbol combination β It may be configured as follows.

(Fourth Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, so that the probability change game state is entered after the end of the special game. However, the present invention is applied to the game machine. Possible configurations are not limited to this. Therefore, a structure having a different game play from the present embodiment will be referred to as a fourth embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described below in detail.

  First, FIG. 63 is a front view of the game machine according to the fourth embodiment. Differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail. In the fourth embodiment, the second special winning opening C20, the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped by a small hit symbol (the type of symbol will be described later). This is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is open to the upper right of the outlet D36 and above the first big winning opening C10 when opened. As a specific configuration, the second special winning opening C20 is a second special winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second special winning opening electric prize C21d (and a second special winning prize). Mouth solenoid C24), and inside thereof, a V winning opening C22 (V winning in the fourth embodiment) that triggers execution of a special game (in the fourth embodiment, a game in which the first big winning opening C10 is opened). The mouth is the V winning opening C22), and the V winning opening entrance detecting device C22s which is a sensor for detecting the entrance of the game ball into the V winning opening C22, and the second winning opening C20. A distribution prize C23 for allocating whether the game ball is directly discharged to the outside of the second special winning opening C20 or is once guided to the V winning opening C22. Here, the second special winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second special winning opening C20, and the second big winning opening entry information indicating the entry when entering. To generate. And the game ball which entered into the second big winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second big winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d is configured such that the second special winning opening C20 is placed in the normal state where the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win and the open state where the game ball is easy to win the second special winning opening C20. It is made variable (the second special winning opening solenoid C24 is excited and made variable). In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the second special winning opening electric prize C21d is a flat member like the first special winning entrance electric prize C11d, but the first special winning entrance electric prize C11d is variable. Unlike the mode, the mode is changed in the vertical direction with respect to the game board (game area D30). That is, the second special winning opening electric part C21d is almost completely buried in the game board (game area D30) (hereinafter, may be referred to as a retracted state) and transparent from the game board (game area D30). The state of protruding toward the player side (hereinafter referred to as the advancing state) is taken until it comes close to the board D16. Then, the second special winning opening electric part C21d is a box-shaped member C20-1 (a game entered in this box-shaped member, which can receive a game ball protruding from the game board (game area D30) and flowing down the game area D30. The ball serves as a lid for the second special winning opening C20, that is, when the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d is in the retracted state, the box-shaped member C20-1 (extended) While the game ball can enter the second special winning opening C20), when the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d is in the advanced state, the box-shaped member C20-1 (and by extension the second It is configured such that the game ball cannot enter into the special winning opening C20) (the box-shaped member is in a substantially sealed state). Then, whether the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening C20 is directly discharged to the outside of the second special winning opening C20 by the distribution winning object C23 or is once guided to the V winning opening C22. It is configured to be distributed.

  Next, the V lamp V10 is installed around the V winning opening C22 and plays a role of producing (notifying the player that the game ball has entered the V winning opening C22) by lighting.

  The above is the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, but prior to the description of the characteristic parts of the fourth embodiment, the contents of the game developed on this game board will be outlined. First, the game ball shot toward the game area D30 flows down a downflow route (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a left hitting route) formed on the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area), It is roughly divided into two parts: a downflow route formed on the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a right hitting route). Here, the game ball flowing down the left-handed route has an opportunity to enter the first main game starting opening A10 or the first big winning opening C10, while the game ball flowed down the right-handed route is an auxiliary There is an opportunity to enter the game starting opening H10, the second big winning opening C20, the second main game starting opening B10, and the first big winning opening C10. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the game ball that has flowed down the right-handed route is configured to enter the first big winning opening C10 more easily than the game ball that has flowed down on the left-handed route. "Easy to play" and "difficult to enter" are determined, for example, by the size of the number of entered balls when 10000 game balls are shot on each of the right-handed route and the left-handed route).

  Further, on the left-handed route (not shown), a game ball is guided or not guided toward the first main game starting port A10 by a large number of game nails and a windmill. While adopting various flow-down modes, on the right-handed route (not shown), the number of game nails and windmills is small compared to the left-handed route, and the flow-down mode in which the game balls are substantially uniform is provided. take.

  More specifically, regarding the right-handed route, first, a game ball that is shot aiming at the right side of the game area D30 (for example, when the launch strength of the game ball by the launching device is maximum, also called right-handed) , Flying inside the game area D30 along the outer rail D32 and falling by its own weight by colliding with a stopper member (member made of rubber or the like) provided at the upper right end of the game area D30 (reference to the center of the game area) To start. Next, the fallen game ball has a high probability of entering the auxiliary game starting opening H10 immediately below it, and then has a flow path width of more than one game ball and less than two game balls. It is collected in D50 (collected regardless of whether or not it entered the auxiliary game starting port H10). Next, the game ball flowing down along the straightening passage D50 is discharged from the outlet of the straightening passage D50, and is then slightly tilted leftward with respect to the horizontal direction and has a first stage passage D51- After being rolled on each of the first, second-stage passage D51-2, and third-stage passage D51-3, it is discharged toward the outlet D36.

  Here, the first stage passage D51-1 is formed by the second special winning opening electric prize C21d in the advanced state, while the second stage passage D51-2 and the third stage passage D51-3 are formed. , A game ball passage formed of synthetic resin or the like is formed by being fixed in advance to the game board. That is, when the second special winning opening electric prize C21d is in the normal state (advanced state) and the first special winning opening electric prize C11d is in the normal state (closed state), the outlet of the rectifying passage D50. The game ball discharged from the rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 → the game ball discharged from the first stage passage D51-1 rolls on the second stage passage D51-2 → The game ball discharged from the second-stage passage D51-2 rolls on the third-stage passage D51-3 → the game ball released from the third-stage passage D51-3 is discharged toward the outlet D36. , And the substantially uniform flow-down mode.

  In this way, the game ball that has flowed down the right-handed route has a substantially uniform flow-down mode, so if you continuously shoot a game ball toward the right-handed route (one at a 0.6 second interval) When the ball is stably entered into the game starting opening H10 and the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d is in the open state (withdrawal state), the box-shaped member C20-1 (and by extension the second big winning opening) It can be configured to stably enter the inside of C20) and to stably enter the first special winning opening C10 when the first electric winning opening electric accessory C11d is opened. In addition, in the space until the game ball discharged from the second stage passage D51-2 reaches the third stage passage D51-3, the second main game starting port electric role that can take a retracted state and an advanced state The thing B11d is provided, and when the second main game starting port electric auditors' item B11d is in the advanced state, the game ball can be guided toward the second main game starting port B10. However, this point will be described later.

  In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the game ball discharged from the outlet of the rectifying passage D50 strongly collides with the first stage passage D51-1, that is, the second special winning opening electric prize C21d in the advanced state. If so, the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d may be damaged. Therefore, at least at the outlet of the flow control passage D50, a configuration for cutting off the momentum of the game ball that has flowed down (substantially falling) in the flow control passage D50 is important. In the fourth embodiment, as shown in the figure near the outlet of the rectifying passage D50, the passage wall surface of the rectifying passage D50 has a shape projecting toward the inside of the rectifying passage D50. By dropping the ball in a zigzag manner, it is configured to reduce the momentum of the game ball. Incidentally, in the fourth embodiment, the same reasoning is also provided with a configuration for cutting off the momentum (rolling speed) of the game ball rolling on the first stage passage D51-1, but this The points will be described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, a configuration for cutting off the momentum (rolling speed) of the game ball rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1 will be described. First, as described above, the first-stage passage D51-1 is slightly inclined to the horizontal with respect to the horizontal direction and is formed by the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state. The special winning opening electric accessory C21d itself is a flat member. Therefore, the momentum (rolling speed) of the game ball rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1 tends to accelerate as it is, so unless some measure is taken to reduce the momentum of the game ball, Even if the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d in the advanced state is displaced to the retracted state {especially, a series of displacements of the advanced state → the retracted state → the advanced state are instantaneously performed (for example, about 0.1 seconds). When the game is performed}, there is a possibility that the game ball cannot be properly guided to the box-shaped member C20-1 (and by extension the second special winning opening C20). Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, like the flow path shape provided in the vicinity of the outlet of the rectifying passage D50, a game ball rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 is made to move in a zigzag manner. is there.

  More specifically, within the range in which the game ball rolls on the first-stage passage D51-1, a plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 are provided on the game board surface side, and a plurality of them are also provided on the transparent plate D16 side. The protrusions D51-1-2 are provided, and the plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 and the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 are arranged alternately. Here, the plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 may be configured to be fixed directly to the game board surface, but the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 may be directly attached to the transparent plate D16 rear surface. Once fixed, if the transparent plate D16 is opened for the purpose of game machine maintenance or the like, the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 will be exposed to the outside, so maintenance There is a possibility that a person may come into contact with the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 (in the worst case, they may be peeled off) (also, it becomes difficult to reuse the transparent plate D16 as a member of another game machine). . Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, in the fourth embodiment, the wall surface on the transparent plate D16 side of the wall surface of the box-shaped member C20-1 is the second special winning opening electric role in the advanced state. The object C21d is extended upward, and the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 are fixed to the extended wall surface of the box-shaped member C20-1.

  In this way, by providing the plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 and the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 within the range in which the game ball rolls on the first stage passage D51-1, the first stage Since the game ball rolling on the passage D51-1 progresses in a zigzag manner, the momentum (rolling speed) of the game ball rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 tends to decrease. Here, when the game ball is continuously fired toward the right-handed route (one is fired at intervals of about 0.6 seconds), the momentum of the game ball emitted from the exit of the flow-rectifying passage D50 is reduced. Reaching the first-stage passage D51-1, and because the momentum of the game ball rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1 is further decelerated, it is rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1. As a result of the long period, even if the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d (that is, the first stage passage D51-1) is momentarily displaced to the retracted state, the box-shaped member C20-1 (extended). Can successfully guide the game ball to the second big winning opening C20). In addition, the momentum of the game balls rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1 is slowed down, which means that when the game balls are continuously fired toward the right-handed route, the position intervals between those game balls are increased. Means that the game ball rolling on the first-stage passage D51-1 becomes congested. Therefore, it is possible to create a situation in which a plurality of game balls are present on the second special winning opening electric accessory C21d (that is, the first stage passage D51-1), and in this case, the second special winning combination. Even if the mouth electric accessory C21d (that is, the first-stage passage D51-1) is instantaneously displaced to the retracted state, the plurality of boxes are connected to the box-shaped member C20-1 (and thus the second special winning opening C20). It is also possible to guide the individual game balls collectively (the image diagram is shown in the lower part of the figure).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, an operation mode of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d will be described. First, as described above, in the space until the game balls discharged from the second stage passage D51-2 reach the third stage passage D51-3, the second main state that can take a retracted state and an advanced state A game starting port electric auditors product B11d is provided (the meanings of the retracted state and the advancing state are the same as those of the second special winning port electric auditors product C21d, but as will be described below, the second main game start. In the case of the mouth electric accessory B11d, when the advancing state is adopted, the game ball is easily opened into the second main game starting opening B10, and when the retracting state is adopted, the second main game starting opening B10 is played. The ball is in a closed state that is difficult to enter). Here, in the fourth embodiment, due to the special game property described later, the second main game starting opening electric auditors product B11d in the retracted state (closed state) is momentarily displaced to the advanced state (open state). Even if it happens (especially, when a series of displacements in the retracted state → advanced state → retracted state are performed instantaneously (for example, in about 0.1 seconds)}, the second main game starting opening B10 is entered. It is constructed so that you can physically guarantee that you will not play a ball.

  More specifically, the game ball rolling on the second-stage passage D51-2 that is slightly inclined to the left with respect to the horizontal direction once collides with the locking portion D51-2a, and the third-stage passage D51. It begins to fall toward -3 by its own weight. Here, when the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is in the retracted state, it falls and reaches the third stage passage D51-3 (the second stage in FIG. 11). On the other hand, when the second main game starting opening electric role object B11d is in the advancing state, the shape of the second main game starting opening electric role object B11d itself can accept this falling game ball and the second main game. In addition to the shape that extends to reach the starting opening B10, since it is installed so as to be slightly inclined to the horizontal direction, this falling game ball, the second main game starting opening B10 Starts rolling toward (the traveling direction of the game ball is switched from leftward to rightward as shown in the third row of the same figure). When the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d maintains the advanced state until the game ball that has started rolling toward the second main game starting opening B10 reaches the second main game starting opening B10. In the meanwhile, while entering the second main game starting opening B10 as it is, while the game ball started rolling toward the second main game starting opening B10 reaches the second main game starting opening B10 When the 2 main game starting port electric auditors goods B11d is displaced to the retracted state, it will fall toward the third stage passage D51-3 without entering the second main game starting port B10 (the same figure). The following game ball in the fourth row is equivalent).

  In the case of such a configuration, the period required for the game ball started rolling toward the second main game starting opening B10 to reach the second main game starting opening B10 is about 0.2 to 0.3 seconds. By designing such that, even if the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d in the retracted state is momentarily displaced to the advanced state {especially, the retracted state → the advanced state → the retracted state It is possible to physically ensure that the player does not enter the second main game starting opening B10 when the series of displacements are instantaneously (for example, in about 0.1 second)}.

  Next, FIG. 66 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the CPUMC of the main control board M in the fourth embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 3050 (fourth), step 3100 (fourth) and step 1950 (fourth), that is, in step 1700, the CPUMC of the main control board M controls the special game. After executing the processing, in step 3050 (fourth), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes the small hit game control processing described later. Next, in step 3100 (fourth), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a distribution auditor object control process described later. Next, in step 1950 (fourth), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a V winning opening entry determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1997.

  Next, FIG. 67 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 (second variation 3) of FIG. 4 in the fourth embodiment. Regarding the description of the figure, the points of modification from the third modification from the similar second embodiment will be described in detail. First, the change from the second embodiment from the third modification is step 1332 (fourth), that is, in step 1331, the CPUMC of the main control board M enters the second main game starting opening B10 (second). When it is determined that the second main game starting mouth entrance information is received from the main game starting mouth entrance detecting device B11s), in step 1332 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the second main game side It is determined whether or not the number of holding balls is within the upper limit (the upper limit of the second main game holding is one in this example). If Yes in step 1332 (fourth), the process proceeds to step 1333, and if No in step 1332 (fourth), the next process (the process of step 3450) proceeds. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the upper limit number of reservations on the second main game side is one.

  Next, FIG. 68 is a first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. 8 in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart of. Differences from the present embodiment are step 1403 (fourth), step 1441-1 (fourth), step 1441-2 (fourth), and step 1443-1 (fourth), that is, step 1403 (fourth). In the fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. If Yes in step 1403 (fourth), the process proceeds to step 1405, and if No, the process proceeds to step 1426. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, a small hit is provided on the first main game side and the second main game side. Therefore, as a variation start condition, it is added to the condition that the small hit game is not in progress. . Further, in step 1410, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines a stop symbol related to the main game symbol based on the main game side random number and the result of the lottery (refer to the main game table 2), and then step 1441-1 (first In 4), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol based on the main game side random number, the result of the lottery, and the game state (see the main game table 3), and step 1418. Move to. Further, in step 1436, when the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol is not the big hit symbol, in step 1444-2 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control substrate M indicates that the stop symbol is the small hit symbol. Determine if there is. If Yes in step 1444-2 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit flag in step 1444-3 (fourth), and proceeds to step 1550. Even if No in step 1444-2 (fourth), the process proceeds to step 1550.

In addition, in this example, the configuration may be as follows.
(1) The win rate on the second main game side is higher than the win rate on the first main game side. (2) The win rate on the second main game side is the first win. A small hit which is an opening pattern of a big winning opening that is relatively easy to enter the V winning opening is easier to be executed than a small hit on the side (3) A small hit design as a small hit design on the first main game side A and small hitting pattern B are provided, and the winning percentage of the small hitting symbol B is higher than the winning percentage of the small hitting symbol A, and the small hitting symbol A is relatively V winning opening than the small hitting symbol B It is easy to carry out a small hit that is an opening pattern of the big winning opening that is easy to enter

  Next, FIG. 69 is an example of the main game tables 1 and 2 in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, regardless of the game state, the table contents to be referred to are configured to be different only depending on whether it is a symbol variation related to the first main game side or a symbol variation related to the second main game side. There is. Also, the first main game side and the second main game side are configured to be able to win the small hit, and the winning / winning lottery result on the second main game side is a small probability with a high probability (with a probability of 639/1024). Become. The winning probability is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. It should be noted that the random number value and the type of the stop symbol are also merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. {For example, a lost symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols are provided. However, when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the type and / or selection rate of the variation mode of the main game symbol is different from that before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed (limited frequency state). May be configured to migrate}. In the fourth embodiment, the number of execution rounds in the big hit triggered by the stop of the big hit symbol is 6 rounds or 12 rounds, and the number of execution rounds in the big hit triggered by the small hits is the occasion. The total number of rounds is 7 or 13 with one small hit. In addition, as a lighting pattern of a round lamp (not shown) that displays the number of rounds, the above-described four kinds of lighting patterns of the rounds 6, 7, 12, and 13 are provided. In addition, although it is described as 4A, 5A, etc. as a jackpot pattern, it is not limited to one type of 4A and one type of 5A. For example, 4A-1, 4A-2 ... There are multiple types of jackpot designs such as ..., and there are multiple types of jackpot designs such as 5A-1, 5A-2 ... in the jackpot group of 5A. Good. Also, with regard to the distribution of random numbers, maintaining the same ratio, for example, 300 kinds of jackpots belonging to the jackpot group 4A are distributed to 300 random numbers of 0 to 299, and 200 pieces of 300 to 499. The random number may be configured so that 200 kinds of big hits belonging to the big hit group 5A are distributed. Moreover, the said structure is applicable to all the structures which concern on this example.

  Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game according to step 1750 (fourth) of FIG. 16 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1785-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it is after the special game triggered by the entry into the V winning opening C27. In the fourth embodiment, the game ball is inserted into the V winning opening C27 during the execution of the small hit game, so that the big hit is executed after the small hit ends. If Yes in step 1785-1, in step 1785-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the stop symbol is a short-time big-hit symbol (a big-hit symbol that shifts to a time-shortening gaming state after the big-hit is finished, in this example, 4B.・ 5A ・ 5B ・ 7A ・ 7B)) is determined. If Yes in step 1785-2, the process moves to step 1758-5. Further, in the case of No in step 1785-1, in step 1785-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not after the special game triggered by the small hit symbol on the first main game side. . In the case of Yes in step 1785-3, in step 1785-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a time saving small hit symbol (when the big hit is executed triggered by the small hit symbol, it is in a time shortening game state after the big hit ends. It is a small hit symbol to be transferred, and in this example, it is determined whether or not after the special game triggered by 7AK) is completed, and the process proceeds to step 1785-5. Even if No in step 1785-3, the process proceeds to step 1785-5. Next, in step 1785-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol is the first main game symbol (the first main game side big hit symbol or the first main game side small hit symbol). To judge. If Yes in step 1785-5, in step 1785-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets 100 times as the predetermined number A, which is a relatively large number, in the count value of the time saving number counter MP52c, and then step 1785. Move to -8. In the case of No in step 1785-5, in step 1785-7, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c to a predetermined number B which is a relatively small number, and Go to step 1785-8. Next, in step 1785-8 and step 1785-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag and also turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag to proceed to the next process (process of step 1997). Transition. In addition, in the case of No in step 1785-2, in other words, when the stop symbol is "4A" which is not the hour / hour / big hit symbol, or in the case of No in step 1785-4, in other words, it is "2AK which is the hour / short / small hit symbol. Even when the special game triggered by "is finished, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997). As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the game is transferred to the time shortening game state after the end of the big hit, two types of time saving, that is, a predetermined number of times A (100 times) and a predetermined number of times B (1 time), are used as time saving times. It has a number of times, and after the big hit on the first main game side, the predetermined number A, which is a relatively large number, can be shortened. That is, in the non-time shortening game state, the game proceeds by left-handing, the big hit on the first main game side is won (the big hit symbol stops), and the time shortening game state shifts after the big hit (first hit) In the case of), the predetermined number of times A (100 times) is given as the number of time reductions. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, (1) the number of holding upper limits on the second main game side is one, and the small win prize probability on the second main game side (probability of a small win when a win / loss lottery is executed) ) Is 639/1024, (2) When a big hit is executed triggered by a small hit on the side of the second main game, after the big hit, the game shifts to a time shortening game state, (3) first main game When the big hit is executed with the small hit on the side as a trigger, there are cases where it shifts to a time-reduced game state or a non-time-reduced game state after the big hit ends. (4) On the first main game side When the big hit is executed with the stop of the big hit symbol as a trigger, after the big hit ends, there are cases where it shifts to a time-reduced game state and a case where it shifts to a non-time-reduced game state.

In addition, in this example, you may comprise as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration may be applied only partially, or may be applied to configurations not listed below (for example, the number of kinds of small hit symbols is the first main game side and the second main game). Each side has multiple types, etc.).
(1) If there is a ball into the V winning hole during the small hit, the game shifts to a time-reduced game state after the big hit is triggered by the small hit. (2) The small hit symbol is the first main game. There is one type on the side and one type on the second main game side. (3) With the opportunity to enter the V winning opening during the small hit execution as a trigger, the number of execution rounds in the big hit is drawn by lottery. (For example, either 7 or 13 rounds, including the execution round of the small hit)
(4) The number of execution rounds of the big hit when the big hit symbol is stopped is determined based on the big hit symbol, and there are a plurality of types of big hit symbols, a first main game side and a second main game side, respectively. The maximum number of reservations on one main game side is four, and the maximum number of reservations on the second main game side is one. Thus, the small hit symbol is 1 for each of the first main game and the second main game. There are types, the big hit symbols are more than the types of small hit symbols, and it is configured to have a plurality of types for each of the first main game and the second main game, and the V winning opening during the small hits By configuring to determine the number of execution rounds of the subsequent big hits by lottery by entering the ball, for example, after the big hits, it shifts to a time shortening game state, and as the number of time saving 100 times (wins the small hits, the small hits) Short time when it is almost possible to enter the V winning opening ) Is given, the number of big hit execution rounds triggered by the small hit is determined by visually recognizing the small hit design when the small hit is won, and the number of execution rounds of the big hit is relative. If the number is relatively small, the game ball is not intentionally shot toward the special winning opening (V winning opening) during the execution of the small hit, and the small hit related to the big hit, in which the number of execution rounds after the next is relatively large It is possible to prevent the progress of a game different from the original game nature of waiting for (small hit pattern) to be won. In addition, the configuration of the number of times saved after the jackpot may be configured as follows.
(1) After the jackpot related to 5A, which is a jackpot symbol in which the number of execution rounds on the first main gaming side won in the non-time shortened gaming state is 6 rounds, (1-1) the first main gaming symbol and the The total number of fluctuations with the two main game symbols is 100 times, and the time-saving game state ends (1-2). The number of fluctuations only for the second main game symbol is 100 times, and the time-shortening game state ends (1-3). The time reduction game state ends with 5 consecutive small hits that do not enter the prize hole (no intervening small hits that enter the V prize hole) (2) The first main player who wins in the time shortened game state After the big hit related to 5A, which is a big hit pattern in which the number of execution rounds on the game side is 6, (2-1) the total number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is 5 times Shortened game state ends (2-2) The number of fluctuations of only the second main game symbol Time-saving game state ends with (2-3) V-win prize hole does not enter small wins 5 consecutive times (no intervening V-win prize entrance small hits) time-end game condition ends (3) The number of execution rounds on the first main game side won in the non-time-reduced game state is 6 rounds. After the big hit related to 4A, which is a big-hit symbol, shifts to the non-time-reduced game state (4) time. The number of execution rounds on the first main game side won in the shortened game state is 6 after the big hit related to 4A which is a big hit pattern (4-1) 1st main game symbol and 2nd main game symbol The total number of fluctuations of 5 times the time shortened game state ends (4-2) The number of times of fluctuation of only the second main game symbol ends once and the time shortened game state ends (4-3) Enter the V winning opening 5 small wins in a row (with a small hit entering the V winning opening in between The time reduction game state ends with (5) The number of execution rounds on the first main game side won in the non-time reduction game state is 12 after the big hit related to 7A which is a big hit symbol (5 -1) The total number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is 100 times, and the time is shortened. The game state ends (5-2) The number of fluctuations of only the second main game symbol is 100 times and the time is shortened. The game state ends (5-3). The small wins that do not enter the V winning opening are five consecutive times (there are no small hits that enter the V winning opening in between), and the time is shortened (6) hours. After the big hit related to 7A, which is a big hit pattern in which the number of execution rounds on the first main game side won in the shortened game state is 12 rounds, (6-1) the first main game pattern and the second main game pattern The total number of fluctuations in 5 times shortens the game state 6-2) The number of fluctuations of only the second main game symbol is once, and the time is shortened. The game state ends (6-3) V winnings are not entered. 5 small wins in a row (between V winnings. The time saving game state ends with (no intervening small hits) (7) Time saving after the big hits triggered by the 7AK which is the small hit symbol on the first main game side won in the non-time saving game state Not transition to the game state (8) After shortening the big hit triggered by 7AK, which is the small winning symbol on the first main gaming side won in the time shortening gaming state, (8-1) first main gaming symbol and second The total number of fluctuations with the main game symbol is 5 times and the time reduction game state ends (8-2) The second main game symbol only changes 1 time and the time reduction game state ends (8-3) V winning 5 consecutive small hits that do not enter the mouth (there are no intervening small hits that enter the V winning opening) The time reduction game state ends with (9) After the big hit related to 7B which is a big hit symbol in which the number of execution rounds on the second main game side won in the non-time shortened game state is 12 (9-1) The total number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is 5 times, and the time shortened gaming state ends (9-2) The number of times of fluctuation of only the second main game symbol is 1 and the time shortened gaming state is End (9-3) Small winnings that do not enter the V winning opening are consecutive 5 times (no intervening small hits entering the V winning opening) and the time saving game state ends (10) Time saving playing status After the jackpot related to 7B which is a jackpot symbol in which the number of execution rounds on the second primary gaming side won in (12) is (10-1), the total of the first and the second main gaming symbols The number of fluctuations is 5 and the time shortened game state ends (10-2) The number of fluctuations of only the main game symbol is once and the time is shortened. The game state ends (10-3) 5 consecutive small hits that do not enter the V winning opening (with a small hit entering the V winning opening in between). (11) The main game ends after the big hit triggered by 7BK, which is the small win symbol on the second main game side won in the non-time shortened game state. (11-1) The first main The total number of fluctuations of the game symbol and the second main game symbol is 5 times, and the time shortened gaming state ends (11-2) The number of fluctuations of only the second main game symbol is 1, and the time shortened gaming state ends (11-2). -3) The time saving game state ends with 5 consecutive small hits that do not enter the V winning opening (no intervening small hits entering the V winning opening) (12) Win in the time saving playing state After the end of the big hit triggered by 7BK which is a small hit symbol on the second main game side ( 12-1) The total number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is 5 times and the time is shortened. The game state ends (12-2) The number of fluctuations of only the second main game symbol is 1 time. The shortened game state ends (12-3) There are 5 consecutive small hits that do not enter the V prize hole (no intervening small hits that enter the V prize hole). You may comprise.

  Next, FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of step 3050 (fourth) of FIG. 65 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 3052, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit flag is on. If Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the small hit flag. Next, in step 3055, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the opening pattern of the second special winning opening C20 of the round (in this example, for example, in all the small hit symbols, "0.1 seconds open → 0. It is an opening pattern that repeats "closing for 5 seconds" 10 times, and if the game balls continue to be fired toward the second special winning opening C20, a plurality of game balls enter the second special winning opening C20. Set). Next, in step 3056, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit execution flag. Next, in step 3058, the CPU MC of the main control board M opens the second special winning opening C20, starts the small hit game timer MP41t, and proceeds to step 3062.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3052, in step 3060, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. If Yes in step 3060, the process moves to step 3062.

  Next, in step 3062, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a game ball winning (ball winning) in the second special winning opening C20. In the case of Yes in step 3062, in step 3064, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls in the second special winning opening C20. If Yes in step 3064, the process moves to step 3068. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3062 or step 3064, in step 3066, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit game timer MP41t has reached a predetermined time. If Yes in step 3066, the process moves to step 3068.

  Next, in step 3068, the CPU MC of the main control board M stops driving the second winning a prize electric device C21d and closes the second winning a prize port C20. Next, in step 3078, the CPU MC of the main control board M stops and resets the small hit game timer MP41t. Next, in step 3080, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the small hit execution flag, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 3100 (fourth)}. Even if No in step 3060 or step 3066, the process moves to the next process {process of step 3100 (fourth)}.

  Next, FIG. 72 is a flow chart of the distribution combination object control process according to the subroutine of step 3100 in FIG. First, in step 3102, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the distribution combination object operation start permission flag is ON. If Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the distribution auditor operation start permission flag. Next, in step 3106, the distribution combination object control means MN60 starts the distribution combination object operation timer MN60t (increment timer). Next, in step 3108, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the flag for the operation of the distribution accessory. Next, in step 3110, the CPUMC of the main control board M activates the distribution combination object C23 to the second position, and proceeds to step 3112. Even if No in step 3102, the process proceeds to step 3112. Here, in the present embodiment, the distribution combination object C23 is located at the first position (the position where the portion where the game balls are stored is in the upward direction when viewed from the player, as the initial position). In some cases, when a game ball enters the second special winning opening C20, it is stopped at the position where the game ball entered is stored in the distribution winning combination C23). Further, the second position is a position where the portion where the game balls are stored is in the right direction when viewed from the player (when the game balls enter the second special winning opening C20 when the game balls are in the position, It is the position where the game ball that entered the ball is not stored in the distribution winning combination C23).

  Next, in step 3112, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the distribution combination object operating flag is ON. If Yes in step 3112, in step 3114, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the distribution tool operation timer MN60t, and the timer value is the first operation value (the distribution combination object is from the second position to the first position). It is a timer value that operates to the position, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it has reached 2 seconds. In the case of Yes in step 3114, in step 3116, the CPU MC of the main control board M activates the distribution combination object C23 to the first position, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 1950 (fourth)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3114, in step 3118, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the distribution tool operation timer MN60t, and the timer value is the second operation value (the distribution combination is from the first position). It is a timer value that operates in the second position, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it has reached 4 seconds. In the case of Yes in step 3118, in step 3120, the CPU MC of the main control board M activates the distribution combination C23 to the second position, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 1950 (fourth)}. In addition, at the timing of the process of step 3120, when the game ball is stored in the distribution winning combination C23, the game ball will enter the V winning opening C22 triggered by the process.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3118, in step 3122, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the distribution combination object operation timer MN60t, and the timer value is the third operation value (the distribution combination object is from the second position). It is a timer value that operates in the first position, and in this example, it is determined whether or not 6 seconds) have been reached. If Yes in step 3122, in step 3124, the CPU MC of the main control board M operates the distribution combination object C23 to the first position. Next, in step 3126, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the flag for the operation of the sorting combination object. Next, in step 3128, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the distribution auditor operation timer MN60t to zero, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 3150). Even if No in step 3112 or step 3122, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 1950 (fourth)}.

  Here, the upper right part of the figure is an image diagram of the operation of the sorting component. The initial position of the distribution combination object C23 is the first position, and at the same time when the small hit game is started, it operates to the second position. Based on the distribution combination object operation timer value, “second position → first position → Second position → initial position (first position) ”. It should be noted that, substantially, the distribution combination object operation timer value becomes the first operation value and becomes the first position → the game ball enters the second special winning opening C20 → the game ball reaches the distribution combination object C23 -> Game balls are stored in the distribution prize C23-> the distribution prize operation timer value becomes the second operation value and becomes the second position-> the stored game balls enter the V winning opening C22, A big hit (special game) will be triggered by performing a series of operations.

  Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the V winning opening entry determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1950 (fourth) of FIG. 66 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1952, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a condition device operation reservation flag (a flag that is turned on in step 1960 described later, that is, a game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during the V winning opening valid period. It is determined whether or not the flag that turns on when a ball is turned off. If Yes in step 1952, in step 1954, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered the V winning opening C27. If Yes in step 1954, in step 1956, the CPU MC of the main control board M is within the V winning opening valid period (the period from the start timing of the small hit game to the end timing of the small hit game). To judge. In addition, a discharge waiting time may be provided as a time for waiting until the gaming ball that has entered the second special winning opening C20 for a small hit is discharged to the outside of the second special winning opening C20. In this case, the V winning opening valid period may be from the start of the small hit game to the end of the discharge standby time. If Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the CPU MC of the main control board M transmits a V winning detection command (a command for executing a V winning detection effect, which will be described later) to the sub-main control section SM side. Is set in the command transmitting buffer MT10 of (1) (transmitted to the sub-main control section SM side by the control command transmitting process of step 1999). Next, in step 1960, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the conditional device operation reservation flag, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1997).

  On the other hand, if No in step 1952, in step 1962, the CPUMC of the main control board M has finished the V winning opening effective period (the period from the start timing of the small hit game to the end timing of the small hit game). Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1962, in step 1964, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the conditional device operation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997). Even if No in step 1954, step 1956, or step 1962, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997). Further, in the case of No in step 1956, in other words, in the case where the risk of unauthorized entry such as entry of a game ball into the V winning opening C27 increases even though the small hit game is not executed, It is preferable that the error processing is appropriately executed. In addition, the number of rounds of the special game related to the entry into the V winning opening C27 is "7R" or "15R", and the series of "small hit game → special game relating to the entry into the V winning opening C27" When the flow of is summed up, it is "8R" or "16R" with the round number "1R" relating to the small hit game and the round number "7R" or "15R" relating to the special game.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76, a control process executed on the sub-main control section SM side according to the fourth embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 74 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 10A is a process on the side of the sub-main control unit SM which is executed after resetting when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Differences from the present embodiment are step 2001 (fourth), step 2003 (fourth), and step 2450 (fourth). That is, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, in step 2001 (fourth), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S resets and starts the power-on timer SM24t. The power-on timer SM24t is provided for grasping the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25. Next, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes an initial process based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, when RAM clear information is received → sub-side). When the RAM is initialized and various information commands are received, the production related information at the time of power interruption is reset in the sub RAM). Next, in step 2003 (fourth), the CPUSC of the sub control board S restores the number of holdings (for example, the drawing holding counter value) based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side). In addition, the effect under execution, the information related to the special symbol, etc. are not restored, and the "preparing" screen is displayed until the start of the next change. After that, the process shifts to the loop process of repeatedly executing (b) which is the iterative process routine of the CPUSC of the sub control board S. The difference from the present embodiment in (b) is that the stay stage determination processing in step 2450 (fourth) and step 2600 is deleted, that is, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is deleted. However, after executing the above-mentioned decorative symbol display control processing, in step 2450 (fourth), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes V prize detection effect display control processing, which will be described later, and shifts to processing in step 2500. .

  Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of a V winning detection effect display control process according to the subroutine of step 2450 (fourth) in FIG. 74 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 2456, the CPU SC of the sub control board S notifies the player that the game ball has entered the V winning detection command (the V winning opening C27) from the main side (main control board M side). That is, a command for executing the V winning detection effect) is received. If Yes in step 2456, in step 2458, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command relating to the V winning detection effect (transmitted to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). , And shifts to the next process (process of step 2500). On the other hand, if No in step 2456, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2500). The V winning detection effect is an effect that informs the player that a game ball has entered the V winning opening C27 and then a special game will be executed. Therefore, the effect content is an effect that celebrates the player. It is desirable that the contents and the contents of the effect that informs the player that the profit is high are used. For example, the effect is to display "V" on the effect display device SG in the full display area SG10.

  Next, FIG. 76 is a flowchart of the special game effect execution process according to the subroutine of step 2550 (fourth) in FIG. 23 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 2585-1, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets a command for sequentially displaying the number of rounds and the number of winning prizes by numbers. Next, in step 2585-2, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out the information regarding holding (random numbers for winning / discarding lots, random numbers for determining stop symbols, etc.). Next, in step 2585-3, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not there is a hold scheduled to win the small hit in the hold. If Yes in step 2585-3, in step 2585-4, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a small hit hold notification lottery to win with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/4). Next, in step 2585-5, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the executed small hitting hold notification lottery has been won. If Yes in step 2585-5, in step 2585-6, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S notifies the small hit hold notification effect (the effect of notifying that there is a hold to win the small hit in the hold). ) Is set (transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999), and the process proceeds to step 2585-7. Even if No in Step 2585-3 or Step 2585-5, the process proceeds to Step 2585-7. It should be noted that, by executing the small hit hold notification effect, it will notify that there is a hold that is a small hit in the hold, but a big hit when the big hit is executed triggered by the small hit The number of rounds related to is configured not to be notified, that is, it is configured not to notify which is the small hit symbol related to the hold that is the target of the small hit holding notification effect. Incidentally, the execution timing of the small hit holding notification effect may be decided to be executed in one of the maximum rounds in the big hit to be executed or may be uniquely decided by the number of execution rounds of the big hit ( For example, when the number of execution rounds is 16R, it is 12R, when the number of execution rounds is 8R, it is 4R, etc.).

  Next, at step 2585-7, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S causes the delimiter round start timing (the start timing of a round that is a branch of whether or not the number of execution rounds of the big hit is 16 rounds, in this example, It is determined whether or not the start timing of the eighth round) has been reached. In this example, since 8R and 16R exist as the number of execution rounds (including small hits), the start timing of the eighth round is the break round start timing. If Yes in step 2585-7, in step 2585-8, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the jackpot being executed is the maximum number of rounds (the maximum number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot is the jackpot. In the example, it is determined whether or not 16R is a big hit to be executed). If Yes in step 2585-8, in step 2585-9, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S performs the round-up success effect (the running round is not the final round of the special game, but the special game continues to be executed after the next round). This is an effect for notifying that it is done, and for example, a command for executing “+ 8RGET !!” is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2520). Further, in the case of No in step 2585-8, in other words, it is a big hit in which the number of rounds to be executed is relatively small, and in the present example, a big hit in which the number of rounds to be executed is “8”. In step 2585-10, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a round-up failure effect (a notification that the round being executed is the final round of the special game, for example, "sorry ..." is displayed. ) Is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2520). Even if No in step 2585-7, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2520). As described above, in the fourth embodiment, as the effects executed during the special game, a small hit hold notification effect for notifying whether or not there is a hold that is a small hit in the hold, and a big hit being executed. It is configured to be able to execute two effects, that is, a round-up success effect (failure effect) that notifies that the number of execution rounds is relatively large. In the fourth embodiment, since the number of execution rounds of the special game is only 8R and 16R, the jackpot does not end in the 8R, that is, the 9R is definitely executed It is definite that the number of execution rounds of the special game is 16R, but the number of execution rounds may be increased, and the number of types of rounds may be increased. You may comprise so that it may be performed multiple times during one special game. Specifically, five rounds 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R, 16R are provided as the number of execution rounds, and special games other than the maximum number of rounds can be finished (fourth round, sixth round, eighth round, tenth round). It may be configured to execute an effect that fuels whether or not the special game continues (for example, a battle effect is executed, and if it is not defeated, it is continued). The round-up effect may be executed in a round before the start timing of the division round. In addition to the above-mentioned small hit holding notification effect and round-up effect, there is an effect that suggests the number of execution rounds of a big hit when there is a small hit hold in the hold, or a small hit hold notification. It may be configured to be able to execute one effect that combines the effect and the round-up effect, or the effect may be performed in a predetermined round in the jackpot.

  With the above-described configuration, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, a plurality of types of large-hit execution rounds that are executed with the small hit on the second main game side as a trigger are provided, and the big hit continues. A small hit that notifies that there is a big hit, which is a big hit, and also makes it possible to execute a round-up effect that is a big hit with a relatively large number of executed rounds By making it possible to execute the pending notification effect during the big hit, it is possible to enhance the fun of the big hit.

The following configuration may be applied to this example.
(1) The variation time of the first main game symbol relating to the loss in the time shortening game state when the time saving number is 100 times, the first main game symbol relating to the loss in the time reducing game state when the time saving number is 1 The variation time of is also a relatively short time (for example, 1 second, and the notice effect is not executed), and the first main related to the big hit or the small hit in the time shortening game state when the number of times saved is 100 times. The variation time of the game symbol is also a relatively long time (for example, 30 seconds, and the variation time of the first main game symbol relating to the big hit or the small hit in the time shortening game state in the case where the number of times saved is one. As the notice effect, success / failure effect A is executed and succeeds), and the above tendency does not depend on the number of holdings on the first main game side (whether lost, big hit or small hit),
(2) Time reduction time when the number of times saved is 100 times The variation time of the second main game symbol relating to the loss in the game state is relatively short (for example, 1 second, and the notice effect is not executed). Yes, the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol relating to the big hit or the small hit in the time shortening game state when the number of times saved is 100 times is relatively long (for example, 30 seconds, and it is appropriate as a notice effect) Inclination effect A is executed and succeeds), and the variation time of the second main game symbol related to the loss in the time shortening game state when the number of time saving is 1 is relatively long (for example, 60 seconds). And, as the notice effect, the success / failure effect A is executed and fails, and the effect suggesting that the second main game side should be held is executed, and the second main game side holds the second main game side. Occurred when the maximum number of holdings has occurred The completion time is executed), and the variation time of the second main game symbol relating to the big hit or the small hit in the time shortening game state when the number of time saving is 100 times is a relatively long time (for example, 30 seconds, And, as the notice effect, the success / failure effect A is executed and succeeds), and the above tendency does not depend on the number of holdings on the second main game side (whether lost, big hit or small hit),
(3) The variation time of the second main game symbol relating to the loss in the non-time shortening game state is relatively long (for example, 45 seconds, and the success / failure effect B is executed as the notice effect and fails. ), The variation time of the second main game symbol relating to the big hit or the small hit in the non-time shortening game state is a relatively long time (for example, 45 seconds, and as an effect B / F) Yes, the above tendency does not depend on the number of holdings on the second main game side (both lost, big hit and small hit),
It should be noted that the winning and rejecting effect A and the winning and rejecting effect B are different in production mode (for example, the winning and rejecting effect A is a battle effect and the winning and rejecting effect B is a mission effect). In addition, as a variation time of the first main game symbol in the non-time shortened game state, in the case of a symbol variation related to a loss, four types of 3 seconds, 10 seconds, 30 seconds and 60 seconds, a symbol related to a big hit or a small hit. In the case of fluctuation, there are three types of 15 seconds, 35 seconds, and 65 seconds. The variation time related to the loss is more easily selected as the shorter time value out of the four types, and the variation time related to the big hit or the small hit is out of the three types. The longer the time value is, the easier it is to select. Regarding the variation time related to the loss, when the number of holdings on the first main game side is 0 to 1, three types other than 3 seconds are selected as the variation time, and the first main game side When the number of holdings is two or three, all four types are selected, and regarding the variation time related to the big hit or the small hit, the three types can be selected regardless of the number of holdings on the first main game side. Good.

Incidentally, in the fourth embodiment, having only one hour reduction counter, the counter value is subtracted by the fluctuation of the first main game symbol and the fluctuation of the second main game symbol, that is, the first main game symbol Although the time shortened game state is configured to end when the total number of fluctuations with the second main game symbol reaches a predetermined value, the present invention is not limited to this. It has two counters with β, and the time saving counter α subtracts the counter value with the fluctuation of the first main game symbol and the fluctuation of the second main gaming symbol, and the time saving counter β is on the second main gaming diagram side. The counter value may be subtracted only by the change, and the time reduction game state may be ended when either the count value of the hour / hour count counter α or the hour / hour count counter β becomes 0. That is, satisfying either the total number of changes of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol reaches a predetermined value, or the number of changes of only the second main game symbol reaches a specific value. The time-saving game state may be configured to end by. The number of times saved may be referred to as the number of terminations, and the number of terminations may be configured to have a number of first terminations and a number of second terminations as the number of terminations. When the number of one end is the number of end, the small hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the small hit is executed, and when the big hit is executed by entering the V winning opening during the small hit, the second end number Is configured to be the number of endings,
(1) Let X be the probability of winning a jackpot (big hit symbol) before the symbol fluctuation of the first terminal count is executed,
If the probability of winning the big hit (big hit symbol) before the symbol variation of the second terminal count is executed is Y, "X≤Y",
(2) Let X be the probability of being able to win a small hit before the symbol fluctuation of the first terminal count is executed,
When the probability of being able to win the small hit before the symbol variation of the second terminal count is executed is Y, “X ≦ Y”,
(3) Let X be the probability of winning a small hit that makes it relatively easy to enter the V winning opening before the symbol variation of the first terminal count is executed.
When the probability of winning a small hit, which makes it relatively easy to enter the V winning opening before the symbol variation of the second terminal count is executed, is set to "X≤Y". You may.
Further, in the above-mentioned configuration, the symbol variation may be only the symbol variation on the first main game side, and the big hit and the small hit may be compared only with the big hit and the small hit on the first main game side, and the symbol variation may be compared. X and Y may be compared with only the symbol variation on the second main game side, and the big hit and the small hit are only the big hit and the small hit on the second main game side.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the big hit (big hit symbol) on the first main game side is won in the non-time shortening game state, the ratio of shifting to the time shortening game state after the big hit is 60%. The maximum number of holdings on the second main game side is four, and the small winning percentage on the second main game side (probability of winning a small winning on one symbol change) is configured to be 20%. Good, that is, the small winning percentage on the second main gaming side is less than the percentage of shifting to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit when the big winning on the first main gaming side is won in the non-time shortening gaming state. It may be configured to be, the small winning percentage of the second main game side, if you win the big hit of the first main game side in the non-time reduction game state, shift to the time reduction game state after the big hit ends You may comprise so that it may become more than the ratio. In addition, the number of endings after the big hit that was won in the time shortened game state or after the big hit triggered by the small hit is the first end number, and after the big hit that was won in the non-time shortened game state or the small hit The final count after the end of the big hit may be configured to be the second final count, or may be applied by appropriately combining the above-described configurations related to the time saving count.

(Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, the special game is executed when the game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during the small hit game, and the upper limit number of the second main game reserve balls is set to "1". However, the present invention is not limited to this. Regarding the case where the upper limit number of the second main game holding balls is set to a value larger than “1”, as a first modification from the fourth embodiment, only the modifications from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail below.

  Next, FIG. 77 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 (second variation 3) in FIG. 65 in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. In the figure, the points of change from the third modification from the second embodiment will be described in detail. The change from the fourth embodiment is step 1332 (fourth modification 1), that is, in step 1331, the CPU MC of the main control board M enters the second main game starting opening B10 (second main game starting opening). When it is determined that the second main game starting opening ball entry information has been received from the entry detection device B11s), in step 1332 (fourth variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the second main game side hold ball. Is within the upper limit (in this example, the upper limit of the hold on the second main game side is two). If Yes in step 1332 (fourth variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1333, and if No in step 1332 (fourth variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1333.

  Next, FIG. 78 is an example of the main game tables 1 and 2 in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. First, in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, the probability of winning the small hit on the second main game side is lower than that in the fourth embodiment (411/1024 probability). Further, as a small hit symbol on the first main game side, it is easier to win “2AK” than it is in the fourth embodiment, and it is difficult to win “7AK”. Further, when the big hit is executed triggered by the small hit on the second main game side, the number of execution rounds of the big hit is only 13R (the total number of execution rounds when the small hit is 1R). There is. Here, in the modified example 1 from the fourth embodiment, when the big hit symbol on the first main game side is stopped and the big hit is executed, the big hit symbol that shifts to the time shortening game state after the big hit is "5A・ 7A ”. Therefore, when the big hit symbol on the first main game side is stopped, the ratio of shifting to the time reduction game state after the big hit is "524/1024". On the other hand, when the big hit is executed triggered by the small hit on the first main game side, the small hit pattern that will shift to the time shortening game state after the big hit is "7AK", and the small hit on the first main game side. The ratio of shifting to the time shortening game state after the big hit ends with a hit is "824/1024", and on the first main game side, the small hit symbol is smaller than the big hit symbol being stopped and the big hit being executed. If the big hit is executed with the small hit related to the small hit pattern as a trigger, the proportion of shifting to the time shortening game state after the end of the big hit is relatively high. Incidentally, the number of execution rounds at the time of big hit execution triggered by the stop of the big hit symbol on the second main game side may be all 12 rounds (whether it is 4B, 5B, or 7B).

  With the above-described configuration, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment, similarly to the fourth embodiment, the fact that there is a hold that is a small hit exists in the hold. By making the small hit holding notification effect executable during the big hit, it is possible to enhance the fun of the big hit, and at the first main game side, it is smaller than the big hit executed by the stop of the big hit symbol. Since the big hit is structured so that the transition rate to the time shortened game state after the big hit is higher upon hitting, for example, the big hit symbol on the first main game side is stopped in the non-time shortened game state. Even if there is a small hit on the first main game side in the hold during the big hit being executed, the small hit holding notification effect is executed, so that the player can obtain a high profit. Naruko Recognize, interest of the game becomes more enhanced it.

(Modification 2 from the fourth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, the special game is executed when the game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during the small hit game, and the upper limit number of the second main game reserve balls is set to "1". However, the present invention is not limited to this. Regarding the case where the upper limit number of the second main game holding balls is set to a value larger than “1”, as a second modified example from the fourth embodiment, only the modified points from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 79 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 (fourth) of FIG. 16 in the second modification from the fourth embodiment. The change from the fourth embodiment is step 1785-7 (fourth modification 2), that is, after the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1785-5 that the stop symbol is not the first main game symbol. In step 1785-7 (fourth modification 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the count value of the time saving counter MP52c to a predetermined number C (two times in this example), and proceeds to step 1785-8. To do. In the second modification from the fourth embodiment, the upper limit number of holdings on the second main game side is two, which is the same value as the predetermined number C.

  Next, FIG. 80 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2300 of FIG. 74 in the second modification from the fourth embodiment. Changes from the fourth embodiment are step 2320 (fourth variation 2) and step 2650 (fourth variation 2), that is, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the symbol content determination permission flag. After turning off, in step 2320 (fourth variation 2), the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current game state is the normal game state (non-time-reduced game state). In the case of Yes in step 2320 (fourth variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S proceeds to step 2306. In addition, in the case of No in step 2320 (fourth variation 2), in step 2650 (fourth variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the later-described time saving medium effect content determination processing, and proceeds to step 2308. To do.

  Next, FIG. 81 is a flowchart of the time saving effect production content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2650 (fourth variation 2) of FIG. 80 in the second modification from the fourth embodiment. First, in step 2654, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol related to the symbol variation based on the information regarding the stop symbol of the main game symbol. Next, in step 2656, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the symbol variation is a short-term variation (in this example, a symbol variation with a variation time of 10 seconds). Here, in the modified example 2 from the fourth embodiment, as the variation time of the main game symbol in the time reduction game state, a short time variation which is a variation time of 10 seconds and a medium time variation which is a variation time of 30 seconds. And three types of variation time, that is, a variation time of 60 seconds and a long-term variation, can be selected. The configuration of the variable time in the time-reduced game state may be changed, for example, only one type of 10 seconds may be used, or the average value of the variable time may be short (for example, 7 seconds).

  In the case of Yes in step 2656, in step 2658, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the variation mode of the decorative symbol relating to the symbol variation as follows: the first half: “5 seconds variation → temporary stop”, the second half: “5 seconds variation → stop” It is decided to be a pseudo-repeating twice. Here, in the modified example 2 from the fourth embodiment, when the variation of the decorative symbol which is the variation for a short time is executed, the symbol variation which is actually executed once in 10 seconds is changed to the pseudo variation of 5 seconds. By executing 2 times (the stop symbol in the latter half of the symbol fluctuation is the fixed stop symbol), the effect is shown to the player as if the symbol fluctuation of the fluctuation time of 5 seconds was executed twice. The method is used (see the image of time saving medium at the bottom of the figure). Next, in step 2660, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, as the effect content related to the symbol variation, the first half: "effect content that suggests the variation time of the symbol variation related to the latter half of the variation" and the second half: "Next The content of the effect that suggests the variation time of the symbol variation after the variation ”is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2308). The variation time of the symbol variation relating to the latter half of the variation is the variation time of the latter half of the variation, or the variation time of the symbol variation after the next variation. In this way, at the time of executing the short-time fluctuation in the case of the time shortening game state, the result of the win / fail related to the currently running fluctuation state (which symbol fluctuation, and which of the first half and the second half) The effect that suggests is not executed, that is, the effect that suggests the change time of the symbol fluctuation after the present (if it is the first half of the present time, also includes the latter half of the symbol fluctuation) (for example, whether or not reach is reached) This will be performed.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of No in step 2656, in step 2662, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation is a medium time variation (a symbol variation with a variation time of 30 seconds). To do. In the case of Yes in step 2662, in step 2664, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the variation mode of the decorative symbol relating to the symbol variation as follows: first half: “5 seconds variation → temporary stop”, second half: “(5 seconds variation → It is determined that the pseudo continuous post-development failure occurs, which is "stop (fixed stop)" after executing "temporary stop" multiple times. In this way, when the symbol fluctuation of the medium time fluctuation in the case of the time shortening game state is executed, after performing the same variation mode as the symbol fluctuation of the short time fluctuation described above, the symbol of the short time fluctuation The special symbol (temporary stop symbol that will be executed after the pseudo-variation) is temporarily stopped at the stop timing related to the fluctuation, and after that the pseudo-variation is repeated multiple times and the lost symbol is definitely stopped without reaching. It is configured to have such a variation mode. Next, in step 2666, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, as the effect content related to the symbol variation, the first half: "effect content that suggests the variation time of the symbol variation related to the latter half of the variation" and the second half: "the relevant The content of the effect that suggests the result of the change is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2308). In addition, in the case of No in step 2662, in other words, when the symbol fluctuation is a long-term fluctuation (symbol fluctuation of fluctuation time of 60 seconds), in step 2668, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, the symbol concerned. The variation mode of the decorative pattern relating to the variation is as follows: the first half: "5 second variation → temporary stop", the second half: "(5 second variation → temporary stop) is executed a plurality of times and then the reach variation is executed (fixed stop)" It will be decided that the pseudo succession will be successful. In this way, when the symbol fluctuation of the medium time fluctuation in the case of the time shortening game state is executed, after performing the same variation mode as the symbol fluctuation of the short time fluctuation described above, the symbol of the short time fluctuation The special symbol (temporary stop symbol that will be executed after the pseudo-variation) is temporarily stopped at the stop timing related to the fluctuation, and after that the pseudo-variation is repeated multiple times and the lost symbol is definitely stopped without reaching. It is configured to have such a variation mode. Next, in step 2670, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, as the effect contents relating to the symbol variation, the first half: "effect content that suggests the variation time of the symbol variation related to the latter half of the relevant variation" and the second half: "the relevant The content of the effect that suggests the result of the change is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2308). In this way, when the symbol variation of the medium time variation or the long variation time in the case of the time shortening game state is executed, the symbol variation after the present as in the short time variation in the first half (currently in the first half) If there is, the production that suggests the variation time of the symbol variation (including the latter half of the symbol variation) (for example, the production that fuels whether or not the reach is reached) will be executed, but in the latter half, the relevant variation It is configured to execute an effect that suggests a result (for example, an effect that suggests a jackpot expectation degree of the symbol variation). In this way, during symbol fluctuations in short fluctuations, and in the first half of symbol fluctuations in medium fluctuations or long fluctuations, symbol fluctuations after the present (if the current first half includes the latter half of the symbol fluctuations) The effect that suggests the change time of the, that is, the pre-reading effect is configured to be executed every change, in the latter half of the symbol change in medium fluctuation or long fluctuation, the effect that suggests the result of the fluctuation, that is, pre-reading A production that is not a production will be executed. In addition, in the present example, the "contents for suggesting the result of success or failure of the variation" is executed in the latter half of the variation in the medium-time variation and the long-term variation. The period for executing "contents" is not limited to this, and for example, the timing when the short fluctuation time ends, that is, the timing after 10 seconds after the fluctuation start in the symbol fluctuation of the medium fluctuation time or the long fluctuation time It may be configured to execute the "effect content that suggests the winning or failing result". In addition, "the contents of the performance that suggests the variation time of the symbol variation related to the latter half of the variation" executed in the first half of the symbol variation of the short variation time is configured to be executed every time the pseudo variation is executed. There is no need to do so, and it may be configured such that there is a case where "the effect contents that suggest the variation time of the symbol variation relating to the latter half of the variation" is executed and a case where it is not executed depending on the pseudo variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to always perform an effect targeting symbol fluctuations (a symbol fluctuation for a long time, a symbol fluctuation for which reach effect is executed) with a relatively high jackpot expectation, and a plurality of notices It becomes possible to prevent a situation in which it becomes difficult to determine which design variation suggesting the degree of expectation is being performed due to the combination of productions and the like. In the present embodiment, when a symbol variation other than short variation is executed during the time shortening game state, “pseudo variation (5 seconds) → pseudo variation (5 seconds) → pseudo variation is executed four times ( (5 seconds × 4 times) → determined stop in the case of medium fluctuation, reach in the case of long fluctuation ”, but is not limited to this,“ pseudo fluctuation (5 seconds) → pseudo fluctuation (5 Second) → Reach → Pseudo fluctuations that reach is temporarily stopped 4 times (5 seconds × 4 times) ”, such as symbol fluctuations other than short fluctuations. It may be configured such that a pseudo change (temporary stop) is performed once. In the case of such a configuration, the larger the number of pseudo fluctuations (temporary stop) after reaching, the higher the expectation degree of the big hit of the symbol fluctuations may be. Further, the super reach may be executed after the pseudo fluctuations are executed plural times after the reach.

  With the above configuration, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the fourth embodiment, the number of upper limit holdings on the second main gaming side is plural (two), and on the second main gaming side. By configuring the number of shortening times when the time is reduced to the time shortening game state after the big hit is finished, the small hit is again won in the time shortening game state when the time shortening game state is changed after the big hit is finished ( It is possible to increase the possibility that the symbol variation related to the hold that has occurred in the time-reduced game state can be performed (including the case of being executed in the non-time-reduced game state). In addition, the number of times saved when the time is shortened to the gaming state after the jackpot on the second main game side is only two, but by configuring the pseudo variation to be executed a plurality of times, in one symbol variation It is possible to make it appear as if the symbol variation is being executed multiple times, and the player is able to shorten the time, which makes the player feel as if the winning / drawing lottery is being executed multiple times (for example, 10 times) in the game state, and the time is shortened. You can feel that you can easily win the jackpot in the gaming state.

  In the modified example 2 from the fourth embodiment, after the big hit on the second main game side (both big hit triggered by stop of big hit symbol and big hit triggered by small hit) Although it is configured to move to the time-reduced game state, it is not limited to this, and there are provided a case of transition to the non-time-reduced game state and a case of transition to the time-reduced game state after the big hit on the second main game side. It may be configured as follows, and by adjusting the ratio of shifting to the time-reduced game state after the big hit on the second main game side, it is possible to adjust the probability of winning a small hit or a big hit in the time-reduced game state. For example, depending on the gaming state in which the small hit on the second main gaming side is won, the proportion of shifting to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit is triggered by the small hit may be configured to be different.

It should be noted that, including the modified example 2 from the fourth embodiment, the configuration applicable to the gaming machine in which the big hit is executed by the game ball entering the V winning opening during the small hit is enumerated below. To do.
(1) Percentage of shifting to the time-reduced game state after completion of the big hit triggered by the small hit on the second main game side won in the time-reduced game state and the second main game side won in the non-time-reduced game state It is possible to make a difference with the rate of shifting to the time shortening game state after the big hit ends with a small hit, shortening the time after the big hit ends with the small hit on the second main game side won in the time shortening game state Even if it is configured such that the rate of shifting to the time shortening gaming state after the completion of the big hit triggered by the small hit of the second main gaming side won in the non-time shortening gaming state is higher than the rate of shifting to the gaming state. Good. With such a configuration, it is unilaterally disadvantageous even if there is less chance that the second main game wins the small hit after the time reduction game state is finished, which is easier to shift to the time reduction game state. It can be a game that cannot be played.
(2) Percentage of the second main gaming side won in the non-time-reduced gaming state and the ratio of transitioning to the time-reduced gaming state after the big hit ends with the small hit on the second main gaming side won in the time shortened gaming state It is possible to make a difference with the rate of shifting to the time shortening game state after the big hit ends with a small hit, shortening the time after the big hit ends with the small hit on the second main game side won in the time shortening game state Even if it is configured such that the rate of shifting to the time shortening gaming state after the completion of the big hit triggered by the small hit on the second main gaming side won in the non-time shortening gaming state is lower than the rate of shifting to the gaming state. Good. With such a configuration, it is advantageous to win the small hit at an early stage, such that if the small hit on the second main game side is simply won in the time shortened game state, it is easy to shift to the time shortened game state. It can be playable.
(3) The probability of being able to win a big hit with a small hit as an opportunity within the time shortening game state, and after the time shortening game state ends, and with the remaining hold on the second main game side. When designing the probability of being able to win the big hit triggered by the small hit to a certain degree close to the probability, the probability of being able to win the big hit triggered by the small hit in the time saving game state is more After the time shortening game state is over, and when the probability is higher than the probability that the big hit can be won by the small hit in the remaining holding of the second main game side, the It is preferable to set “the number of times <the upper limit number of holdings on the second main game side”, and the probability of being able to win the big hit triggered by the small hit in the time shortening game state is higher in the time shortening game state. After the end and the second Lord When it is set to be lower than the probability of being able to win the big hit triggered by the remaining small hit on the hold side on the technique side, it is possible to set “the number of shortened times> the upper limit number of hold on the second main game side”. It is suitable.

(Modification 3 from the fourth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, a special game is configured to be executed when a game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during a small hit game, and a configuration such as the upper limit number of holdings on the second main game side is configured. Was described in detail. Here, an example of a configuration related to the effect on the sub-control board S side that can be executed by the gaming machine having such a configuration will be described below as a third modification from the fourth embodiment, which is the modification from the fourth embodiment. Only the points will be described in detail.

  Next, FIG. 82 is a flowchart of the electric auditors product drive determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1200 of FIG. 65 in the third modification from the fourth embodiment. First, the changes from the fourth embodiment are step 1237-1 (fourth variation 3), step 1237-2 (fourth variation 3), and step 1241 (fourth variation 3), that is, step In 1236, after the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second main game starting opening electric auditors product B11d, in step 1237-1 (fourth variation 3), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the main game short time flag. It is determined whether or not is on. In the case of Yes in step 1237-1 (fourth variation 3), in step 1237-2 (fourth variation 3), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the electric accessory release start command (the second main game starting port electric role) A command to the effect that the opening of the object B11d has started, and a command to the sub-control board S side) is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1238. To do. On the other hand, if No in step 1237-1 (fourth variation 3), the process moves to the next process (process of step 1300). Further, in step 1240, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second main game starting opening electric auditors' item B11d, and then in step 1241 (fourth variation 3), the CPUMC of the main control board M is an electric auditors object. An opening end command (a command to the effect that the opening of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d has been completed, a command to the sub control board S side) is set, and the routine proceeds to step 1242. Incidentally, in the modification 3 from the fourth embodiment, the opening period from the start of the opening of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d to the end of the opening is 5 seconds, and the specific second The opening mode of the main game starting port electric accessory B11d is “1.0 second open → 1.0 second close → 1.0 second open → 1.0 second close → 1.0 second open → close”. . In the modified example 3 from the fourth embodiment, the upper limit number of holdings on the second main game side is one, and the number of time saving is 1 when shifting to the time shortening game state after the big hit on the second main game side. Has become. Incidentally, the opening mode of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d is not limited to this, and in order to further secure the easiness of entering the ball, “1.0 second open → 6.0 second close → 1. Open for 0 seconds → Close for 6.0 seconds → Release for 1.0 seconds → Close for 6.0 seconds → Release for 1.0 seconds → Close for 6.0 seconds → Open for 1.0 seconds → Close, etc. The open mode may be such that the closed period is longer than the closed period.

  Next, FIG. 83 is an example of a configuration diagram of the main game table 3 in Modification 3 from the fourth embodiment. First, the change point from the fourth embodiment is that the selection tendency of the variation time of the main game symbol in the time reduction game state is changed, and in the modification example 3 from the fourth embodiment, in the time reduction game state. The variation time of the second main game symbol is relatively longer than that of the fourth embodiment. Specifically, both the hit time and the loss time are configured to be a long time variation of 30 seconds. , The variation time of the first main game symbol related to the loss is configured to be a short time variation of 1 second. Further, in the second main game symbol, regardless of whether or not the game is lost or shortened in time, the variation time is 30 seconds, that is, the variation time is all long, so the time reduction game Even when the second main game symbol changes in the state, after that, when the second main game symbol changes due to the hold digestion of the second main game side in the non-time shortening game state, as a long time variation time, It is configured so that the time to execute the performance can be secured. With such a configuration, it is possible to show the player carefully the effect related to the condominium by changing the important variable time of the second main game symbol, which is important in the condominium, for a long time. In addition, when it is configured to have the case of 100 times and the case of 1 time as the number of time saving, the variation time of the second main game symbol at the time of losing in the time shortening game state of one time saving is 30 seconds The fluctuation time of the second main game symbol at the time of losing in the time shortening game state in the case of 100 time saving may be configured to be 1 second (in the case of 100 time shortening, a small hit during the time reducing game state) Because it is easy to win, there is no problem even if the variation time is short).

  Next, FIG. 84 is a flowchart of the V winning detection effect display control process according to the subroutine of step 2450 (fourth) of FIG. 74 in the third modification from the fourth embodiment. The changes from the fourth embodiment are step 2460 (fourth variation 3) to step 2465 (fourth variation 3), that is, in step 2460 (fourth variation 3), the CPUSC of the sub control board S: It is determined whether or not the right hitting instruction flag (a flag which is turned on when the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d starts opening in the time shortening game state) is off. If Yes in step 2460 (fourth variation 3), in step 2461 (fourth variation 3), the CPUMC of the sub control board S instructs the electric accessory release start command from the main control board M side {step 1237-2 ( It is determined whether or not the command set in the fourth variation 3) and transmitted to the sub-control board S side is received. If Yes in step 2461 (fourth variation 3), in step 2462 (fourth variation 3), the CPUMC of the sub-control board S turns on the right-handing instruction flag, and proceeds to step 2463 (fourth variation 3). . Even if No in step 2460 (fourth variation 3), the process proceeds to step 2463 (fourth variation 3). Next, in step 2463 (fourth variation 3), the CPUMC of the sub-control board S has a predetermined time before the symbol variation stop timing of the symbol variation in the time reduction game state (for example, 5 seconds before the symbol variation stop). Timing) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2463 (fourth variation 3), in step 2464 (fourth variation 3), the CPUMC of the sub-control board S issues a right-handed execution instruction effect (shooting of a game ball to the second main game starting opening B10). Is a production that urges the player to play, for example, a command related to the production of displaying "Right hit right" on the production display device SG is set (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side). Then, the process proceeds to step 2466 (fourth variation 3). In addition, in the case of No in step 2463 (fourth variation 3), in step 2465 (fourth variation 3), the CPUMC of the sub control board S prompts the player to perform a right-handed prohibition instruction effect (stop the firing of the game ball). It is an effect, and for example, a command related to the effect of displaying "Don't shoot now" on the effect display device SG is set (transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). ), And then proceeds to step 2466 (fourth variation 3).

  Next, in step 2466 (fourth variation 3), the CPU MC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an electric accessory release end command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2466 (fourth variation 3), in step 2467 (fourth variation 3), the CPUMC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is in the time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 2467 (fourth variation 3), in step 2468 (fourth variation 3), the CPUMC of the sub-control board S performs the right-handling execution instruction effect or the right-handling prohibition instruction effect. The command for erasing the display related to is set. Next, in step 2469 (fourth variation 3), the CPUMC of the sub control substrate S turns off the right-handing instruction flag, and proceeds to step 2456. Even if No in step 2461 (fourth variation 3), step 2466 (fourth variation 3), or step 2467 (fourth variation 3), the process proceeds to step 2456.

  With the above configuration, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the modified example 3 from the fourth embodiment, in the time-reduced gaming state, in the situation where the second main gaming side is considered to be holding, it is right. The hit prohibition instruction effect is executed, and it is considered that the second main game side may not be held, that is, the variation time of the second main game symbol in the time shortening game state is a long time variation of 30 seconds. Therefore, because there is a risk that the auxiliary game side will not be held during the change time, the right-handed execution instruction effect is executed at a timing 5 seconds before the change stop of the second main game symbol for the long time. By configuring, the holding of the auxiliary game side will occur, and by the occurrence of the holding of the auxiliary game side, the second main game starting port electric auditors product B11d will be opened, so in the time saving game state. Even after the variation of the second main game symbol is finished and the non-time shortened game state is reached, the second main game start port electric auditors item B11d is continuously opened, and the second main game side is held. It can be configured so that the time for re-occurring is secured.

(Modification 4 from the fourth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, a special game is configured to be executed when a game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during a small hit game, and a configuration such as the upper limit number of holdings on the second main game side is configured. Was described in detail. Here, an example of another configuration applicable to the gaming machine having such a configuration will be described in detail below as a modified example 4 from the fourth embodiment, and only the changed points from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the electric auditors product drive determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1200 of FIG. 65 in the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment. The change from the fourth embodiment is the opening mode of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d, that is, when the game state is the time shortening game state (the auxiliary game time shortening flag is ON), Since the hit symbol "D1" is stopped as a stop symbol for the auxiliary game symbol, the opening mode of the second main game start port electric auditors product B11d is "1.0 second open → 1.0 second close → 2.0 second open “→ Closed”, and the opening period from the start of the opening of the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d to the end of the opening is 4 seconds.

  Next, FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display processing relating to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 8 in the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment. . The changes from the fourth embodiment are step 1447-1 (fourth variation 4) and step 1450 (fourth variation 4), that is, in step 1410, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the main game side. Based on the random number, the result of the lottery, after determining the stop symbol for the main game symbol (see the main game table 2), in step 1447-1 (4th variation 4), the CPUMC of the main control board M, the limited frequency flag In Modification 4 from the fourth embodiment, since there is only one type of limited frequency state, the flag that is turned on in the limited frequency state is the limited frequency flag) is determined to be off To do. In the case of Yes in step 1447-1 (fourth modification 4), the CPUMC of the main control board M proceeds to step 1444-1 (fourth). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1447-1 (fourth variation 4), in step 1450 (fourth variation 4), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a limited frequency variation mode determination process, which will be described later, and then executes step 1418. Move to.

  Next, FIG. 87 is an example of a configuration diagram of the main game table 3 in Modification 4 from the fourth embodiment. In the modified example 4 from the fourth embodiment, in the time shortening game state, the variation time of the main game symbol at the time of losing is configured to be determined as one type of only 5 seconds. Further, in the time shortening game state, the variation time at the time of hitting is configured to be determined from two types of 10 seconds and 60 seconds. Here, the variation time of the second main game symbol at the time of losing in the time shortening game state is 5 seconds, which is longer than 4 seconds which is the opening period of the second main game starting port electric auditors product B11d described above. ing. Further, the shortest variation time as the variation time of the first main game symbol at the time of losing in the time shortening game state is 10 seconds, which is the opening period of the above-mentioned second main game starting port electric accessory B11d, which is 4 seconds. Has been longer than. The variation time of the main game symbol in Modification 4 from the fourth embodiment may be the same as the configuration of Modification 3 from the fourth embodiment described above. Further, also in the following embodiments, the configuration of the variation time of the main game symbol may be the same as the configuration of Modification 3 from the fourth embodiment described above.

  Next, FIG. 88 is a flowchart of the limited frequency variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 (fourth variation 4) of FIG. 86 in the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1470, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol based on the main game side random number and the result of the lottery (see the limited frequency table). Next, in step 1471, the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c, and proceeds to step 1472. Next, in step 1472, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c is 0. If Yes in step 1472, in step 1473, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the limited frequency flag and shifts to the next process (process of step 1418). Even if No in step 1472, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1418).

  Next, FIG. 89 is an example of a configuration diagram of a limited frequency table in Modification 4 from the fourth embodiment. In the modification example 4 from the fourth embodiment, when the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined with reference to the limited frequency table, the variation time of the second main game symbol at the time of loss is relatively short. It is configured so that only one type of one second is determined.

  Next, FIG. 90 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to step 1750 (fourth) of FIG. 16 in the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment. The changes from the fourth embodiment are step 1786-1 (fourth modification 4) and step 1786-2 (fourth modification 4), that is, in step 1785-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M After setting a predetermined number A (100 times in this example) to the count value of the hour / hour counter MP52c, in step 1786-1 (fourth modification 4), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the counter of the limited frequency counter MN52c. The value is set a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example). Next, in step 1786-2 (fourth modification 4), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency flag, and proceeds to step 1785-8. In this way, in the modification example 4 from the fourth embodiment, when the time reduction game state is entered after the big hit related to the first main game side, the limited frequency state is entered.

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine in the modified example 4 from the fourth embodiment, the variation time of the second main gaming symbol at the time of losing in the time shortening gaming state, the second main gaming starting port electric By configuring so as to be longer than the opening period of the accessory B11d, "after the big hit on the second main game side, it shifts to a time shortening game state, and the second main game side holds 0 → 2 main game starting port electric accessory B11d is opened → 0.5 second after 1 second main game hold occurs → 2nd main game side hold is digested and the second main game symbol starts fluctuating → 3. After 5 seconds, the opening of the second main game starting port electric auditors' item B11d is completed. → After 0.5 seconds, the second main game starting port electric auditors object B11d is opened again. After 1 second, the fluctuation of the second main gaming symbol ends. Then the time saving game state ends → 1 second later, the second main game hold is 1 Occurrence "and so on until the change of the second main game symbol is completed by shifting to the time shortening game state, the second main game starting opening of the second electric game accessory B11d starts after the end of the big hit By doing so, even when the number of times saved is one, the second main game symbol can be changed three times, and the expectation of the continuous game after the big hit can be increased. In addition, the variation time of the first main game symbol at the time of losing in the time shortening game state is configured so as to be shorter than the opening period of the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d, thereby the second main game. Unlike the structure of the symbol, if the time shift game state after the big hit on the second main game side is transitioned, even if the first main game symbol is changed, by the end of the variation of the first main game symbol It is not possible to open the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d again, and the player intentionally fluctuates the first main game symbol and causes the second main game side to be held. It can be configured so that no profit against the flow is obtained. In addition, when the time shortening game state is transitioned after the big hit related to the first main game side, the variation time of the second main game symbol is 100 times the number of time saving, and the transition to the limited frequency state. It is a relatively short time of 1 second. If the variation time of the second main game symbol is long when the number of shortening times is 100 times, it is almost certain that it is possible to win the small hit on the second main game side in the time reduction game state, but it is the second. It takes time to win the small hit on the main game side, and the tempo of the game becomes worse, but with this configuration, when the number of shortening times is 100 times, the second main The variation time of the game symbol can be shortened, and the game progress can be performed at a good tempo according to the game situation.

  In the modified example 4 from the fourth embodiment, in the non-time-reduced game state, the second main game side wins the small hit, and there is a ball entering the V winning opening during the execution of the small hit. When the time reduction game state after the end of the jackpot to be executed, the first variation of the time reduction game state (the first symbol variation after the jackpot is finished), the symbol related to the deviation of the first main game symbol The variation time may be relatively long in the case of the symbol variation related to the loss of the second main game symbol rather than the variation.

(Modification 5 from the fourth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, a special game is configured to be executed when a game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during a small hit game, and a configuration such as the upper limit number of holdings on the second main game side is configured. Was described in detail. Here, an example of the configuration related to the effect on the sub-control board S side that can be executed by the gaming machine having such a configuration will be described below as a modification example 5 from the fourth embodiment, which is a modification from the fourth embodiment. Only the points will be described in detail.

  Next, FIG. 91 is an example of a configuration diagram of the main game table 1 and the main game table 2 in Modification Example 5 from the fourth embodiment. In the modified example 5 from the fourth embodiment, the small winning symbol on the second main gaming side has "3BK" and "7BK", and when the small winning is won on the second main gaming side. Is configured so that it is easy to win “3BK” (950/1024). Here, the number of execution rounds of the big hit triggered by the small hit on the second main game side is 16 rounds (small hits) regardless of whether the small hit pattern used as the opportunity is "3BK" or "7BK". The total number of execution rounds is 1 round.), But whether the number of time saved after the big hit was "3BK" or "7BK" was a big hit. Are configured to differ.

  Next, FIG. 92 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to step 1750 (fourth) of FIG. 16 in the fifth modification from the fourth embodiment. First, the changes from the fourth embodiment are steps 1785-5 (fourth modification 5) to step 1786-5 (fourth modification 5), that is, in step 1785-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M is changed. However, the stop symbol is after determining that it is a time-saving and big-hit symbol (a big-hit symbol that shifts to a time shortening game state after the big-hit is finished, in this example, it is "4B / 5A / 5B / 7A / 7B"), or In step 1785-4, if the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that it is after the special game triggered by the time saving small hit symbol (7AK in this example), step 1785-5 (fourth variation 5 ), The CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol is the first main game symbol. If Yes in step 1785-5 (fourth variation 5), in step 1786-1 (fourth variation 5), is the CPUMC of the main control board M after the jackpot that is won in the non-time-reduced gaming state? Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1786-1 (fourth variation 5), in step 1786-2 (fourth variation 5), the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the count value of the time saving counter MP52c to the predetermined number A (in this example). , 100 times) and proceeds to step 1785-8. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1786-1 (fourth variation 5), at step 1786-3 (fourth variation 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the count value of the time saving counter MP52c to the predetermined number B (this In the example, once) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1785-8. In addition, in the case of No in step 1785-5 (fourth variation 5), in other words, if the stop symbol is the second main game symbol, in step 1786-4 (fourth variation 5), CPUMC of the main control board M Is the second main game long time short and small hit symbol (after the execution of the special game, the time shortened game state and relatively long time shortened times (100 times in this example) will be given, It is a small hit symbol on the side of the second main game that becomes a trigger for transition to the special game, and in this example, it is determined whether or not after the special game triggered by "7BK"). If Yes in step 1786-4 (fourth variation 5), in step 1786-5 (fourth variation 5), the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the count value of the time reduction counter MP52c to the predetermined number A (in this example, A). , 100 times) and proceeds to step 1785-8. In this way, in the modified example 5 from the fourth embodiment, after the big hit on the first main game side, the big hit or the non-time shortened game state is triggered by the small hit won in the non-time shortened game state. In the case where the big hit is won in, and the time shortening game state is entered after the big hit ends (at the time of the first big hit on the first main game side), the number of time saving is 100 times. Also, on the second main game side, the second main game long time short small hit design (in this example, "7BK") after the end of the big hit executed 100 times, the number of times saved is 100, in other cases (big hit) After the big hit ends with the stop of the design and after the big hit ends with the small hit), the number of time saving is one. In other words, the second main game long, short and small hit pattern (in this example, "7BK") is the most profitable small hit pattern. In addition, the big hit with a big hit or a small hit triggered by the stop of the big hit symbol on the first main game side, and the big hit with a big hit or a small hit triggered by the stop of the big hit symbol on the second main game side Comparing with, the first main game side has a relatively larger number of time saving after the big hit than the second main game side, but the first main game side has the second main game side. The expected value (number of execution rounds) of the number of game balls acquired in the big hit is smaller than that.

  Next, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of special game effect execution processing according to the subroutine of step 2550 (fourth variation 5) of FIG. 23 in the fifth modification from the fourth embodiment. First, in step 2586-1, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for sequentially displaying the number of rounds and the number of winning prizes by numbers (transmitted to the sub-sub controller SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). Be done). Next, in step 2586-2, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the big hit that is being executed is the second main game long / short / small hit pattern (the second main game side is a small hit pattern, and the small hit is triggered. It is the highest profit small jackpot pattern that is given a shorter and shorter number of times which is a relatively long time after the completion of the jackpot, and in this example, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is triggered by 7BK). If Yes in step 2586-2, in step 2586-3, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a long-time / short-time imparting effect (an effect that informs that a time saving number of a relatively long time is applied, Set a command to execute a performance for blessing the person) and move to the next process (process of step 2520). In addition, in the case of No in step 2586-2, in step 2586-4, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a normal effect (an effect that does not notify that a relatively short time is saved). Set the command for executing the special game effect at the time), and shifts to the next process (process of step 2520). As described above, in the modified example 5 from the fourth embodiment, the big hit that is triggered by the second main game long / short short hit design (7BK in this example), which is the highest profit small hit design for the player. During execution, it is configured to perform a long-time shortening effect to celebrate the player.

  With the above-described configuration, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the modified example 5 from the fourth embodiment, there are two types of shortening times, one time and 100 times, when the time shortening game state is entered after the big hit ends. It is configured so that it can be given to the player, and the number of hour-shortening is 100 times after the big-hit that is triggered by the second main game long time short-time small-winning design (7BK in this example) which is the highest-profit small-winning design. Configured as In addition, the second main game long and short short hit design is configured to be selected by "74/1024" when the second main game wins the small hit, and is not often selected even during the long camp. Since it is configured as described above, if the second main game long / short-time small hit design is won, and the big hit is executed with the small hit design as a trigger, the long-time and short-time addition effect to bless the player is provided. The person is configured to feel a sense of accomplishment.

  In addition, in the modified example 5 from the fourth embodiment, the player is congratulated by executing the long-time shortening imparting effect during the big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and (1) the second main The long-time and short-time winning production is executed at the big hit start demonstration time (or the big hit end demo time) triggered by the game long-time short-small hit design, (2) the plan to win the second main game long-time short small hit design is held. Notify that there is a hold that is scheduled to win the second main game long, short and small hit pattern in the hold in the effect during the change in the situation where it is in the hold (notify as prefetch effect) , (3) 2nd main game long time short and small hit during the symbol change after the big hit when triggered (when the number of times saved and shortened is 1 or 100 times, it should be executed at the first symbol change after the big hit ends. Is desirable), the number of times saved is 100 times Notify that there is, (4) during the symbol variation related to the second main game long time short small hit design, the fact that the number of time saving after the big hit is 100 times triggered by the second main game long time short small hit design May be notified.

(Modification 6 from the fourth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, a special game is configured to be executed when a game ball enters the V winning opening C27 during a small hit game, and a configuration such as the upper limit number of holdings on the second main game side is configured. Was described in detail. Here, an example of the configuration related to the effect on the sub-control board S side that can be executed by the gaming machine having such a configuration will be described below as a modification example 6 from the fourth embodiment, which is a modification from the fourth embodiment. Only the points will be described in detail.

  First, FIG. 94 is an example of a configuration diagram of the main game table 1 and the main game table 2 in Modification 6 from the fourth embodiment. In the modified example 6 from the fourth embodiment, it is easier to win the small hit on the first main game side than in the fourth embodiment. With this configuration, the details will be described later, but when the small hit on the first main game side is won in the non-time shortening game state, the game ball enters the V winning opening C27. Achieves the desired game playability. It should be noted that, even when the small hit on the second main game side is won, it may be possible to execute an effect of instructing to aim the game ball into the V winning opening C27.

  Next, FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of step 3050 (fourth) of FIG. 65 in the sixth modification from the fourth embodiment. The changes from the fourth embodiment are step 3082-1 (fourth modification 6) to step 3082-6 (fourth modification 6), that is, in step 3055, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that round. The opening pattern of the second special winning opening C20 (in this example, for example, in the case of 2AK, "0.2 seconds open → close", the game ball is difficult to enter the second special winning opening C20, Even if the player enters the second big winning opening C20, it does not enter the V winning opening C27, and in all other small hit symbols, "2 seconds open → 4 seconds closed → 2 seconds open → closed" , If the game balls continue to be fired toward the second special winning opening C20, a plurality of game balls are set in the second special winning opening C20), and then step 3082-1 In (4th variation 6), the CPUMC of the main control board M is Turn on (an on flag when a Koatari start demo time) per start Demofuragu. Next, in step 3082-2 (fourth variation 6), the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time (10 seconds in this example) to the small hit start demo time timer KKt and starts the operation. Move to -3 (4th change 6). Next, in step 3082-3 (fourth variation 6), the CPUMC of the main control board M, the first main game long opening small hit symbol (the second main winning opening C20 of the first main game side is long open) It is a small hit pattern, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit related to 7AK. If Yes in step 3082-3 (4th variation 6), in step 3082-4 (4th variation 6), the CPUMC of the main control board M sends a small hit start demo start command (a command to the sub-control board side). Yes, a command indicating that the small hit start demo time has started) is set, and the process proceeds to step 3082-5 (fourth variation 6). Even if No in step 3082-3 (fourth modification 6) or if the CPU MC of the main control board M determines in step 3060 that the small hit execution flag is off, step 3082-5 (fourth modification). Change to 6). Next, in step 3082-5 (fourth variation 6), the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the timer value of the small hit start demonstration time timer KKt is 0 or not. If Yes in step 3082-5 (fourth variation 6), in step 3082-6 (fourth variation 6), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit start demo flag, and proceeds to step 3056. In addition, in the case of No in step 3082-5 (fourth modification 6), the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 3100 (fourth)). As described above, in the modified example 6 from the fourth embodiment, as a small hit symbol on the first main game side, a small hit symbol (2AK) in which it is difficult to enter the second big winning opening C20 when the small hit is executed. ) And a small hitting pattern (7AK) that makes it easy to enter the second big winning opening C20.

  Next, FIG. 96 is a flowchart of the V winning detection effect display control process according to the subroutine of step 2450 (fourth) of FIG. 74 in the sixth modification from the fourth embodiment. First, the changes from the fourth embodiment are steps 2466-1 (fourth modification 6) to step 2466-10 (fourth modification 6), that is, step 2466-1 (fourth modification 6), The CPUMC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the firing instruction effect flag (a flag that is turned on when the firing instruction effect timer HSt is timing) is off. If Yes in step 2466-1 (4th variation 6), in step 2466-2 (4th variation 6), the CPUMC of the sub control board S receives a small hit start demonstration start command from the main control board M side. Or not. In the case of Yes in step 2466-2 (fourth modification 6), the CPUMC of the sub-control board S, in step 2466-3 (fourth modification 6), displays a right-handing preparation display (for example, "voice on the effect display device SG. Set the command to execute "display right." Next, in step 2466-4 (fourth modification 6), the CPUMC of the sub control board S sets a predetermined time (15 seconds in this example) to the firing instruction effect timer (decrement timer) and starts. Here, the predetermined time set in the launch instruction effect timer HSt is a period from the start timing of the small hit start demonstration time to one second before the second opening timing of the small hit except "2AK". "Small hit start demonstration time (10 seconds) + second big winning opening C20 first opening time (2 seconds) + small win from second big winning opening C20 first opening end timing The closing time (1 second) = 15 seconds until the timing 3 seconds before the second opening of the second special winning opening C20 is started.

  Next, in step 2466-5 (fourth variation 6), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S turns on the small hit demonstration effect flag, and proceeds to step 2466-6 (fourth variation 6). Even if No in step 2466-1 (fourth modification 6), the process proceeds to step 2466-6 (fourth modification 6). Next, in step 2466-6 (fourth modification 6), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines that the timer value of the firing instruction effect timer HSt is the first effect execution value (the first firing instruction effect is to be executed. Is 6 seconds in this example). If Yes in step 2466-6 (fourth modification 6), in step 2466-7 (fourth modification 6), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a command for executing the firing instruction effect, and then executes step 2466-8. Transition to (4th variation 6). Here, when the launch instruction effect is executed, the sound “Go” is output from the speaker D24, and “GO” is displayed on the effect display device SG. That is, the above-mentioned right-handing preparation display is only the display on the effect display device SG, while the firing instruction effect is configured to execute the display on the effect display device SG and the voice output on the speaker D24. In addition, the game ball shot at the same timing as the execution of the launch instruction reaches the second special winning opening C20 at a timing before the second special winning opening C20 is opened. It is configured not to enter the C20 (if the game balls are continuously shot from the timing when the launch instruction effect is executed, the second and subsequent game balls can enter the second big winning opening C20) That is, rather than the time from the timing when the launch instruction effect is executed to the time when the second special winning opening C20 starts to be opened, the game ball that is launched at the same time as the timing when the launch instruction effect is executed becomes the second special winning opening C20. The flow path to the second special winning opening C20 is designed so that it takes a shorter time to reach it. Even if No in step 2466-6 (fourth variation 6), the process proceeds to step 2466-8 (fourth variation 6). Next, in step 2466-8 (fourth modification 6), the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines that the timer value of the firing instruction effect HSt timer is the second effect execution value (the second firing instruction effect is to be executed). It is a timer value, which is 0 second in this example). If Yes in step 2466-8 (fourth variation 6), in step 2466-9 (fourth variation 6) the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets a command for executing the firing instruction effect. Next, in step 2466-10 (fourth variation 6), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the firing instruction effect flag, and proceeds to step 2456. In addition, also in the case of No in step 2466-2 (fourth modification 6) or step 2466-8 (fourth modification 6), the process shifts to step 2456. As described above, in the sixth modified example from the fourth embodiment, when the small hit symbol other than “2AK” is won, the right-handing preparation effect and the launch instruction effect can be executed. The instruction effect is configured so that it can be executed twice in one small win. In this example, the right hitting preparation effect and the launch instruction effect can be executed in all the small hits other than "2AK", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit on the first main game side is possible. It may be configured so that it is executed only when the winning is won (or it is executed only when the small hit on the second main gaming side is won), only in the non-time shortening gaming state (only in the time shortening gaming state). ) It may be configured to execute. In the modified example 6 from the fourth embodiment, even if the game ball is shot toward the second special winning opening C20, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second special winning opening C20. "2AK" is provided as a small hit pattern that will result in the small hit being the opening mode, and when the "2AK" is won, the right-handing preparation effect and the launch instruction effect are not executed. It is configured. With this configuration, even if a game ball is fired, it is not necessary to fire a game ball for a small hit, in which the number of balls held is reduced without entering the second special winning opening C20, which is user-friendly. It can be a game machine.

  With the above configuration, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth modification from the fourth embodiment, when the small hit is won on the first main gaming side in the non-time shortened gaming state, the game is directed to the second big winning opening C20. By configuring so as to be able to execute an effect (right-handed preparation effect and launch instruction effect) instructing to shoot a game ball, in a situation where the game is left-handed in the non-time shortened game state, 1 Even if the main game side wins a small hit, by notifying to the effect that it will switch to right hitting and the appropriate launch timing for entering the second big winning opening C20, there will be no disadvantage and smooth It is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that can proceed to the game.

  The right-handing preparation effect and the launch instruction effect may be executed at a timing other than during the opening of the second special winning opening C20 during the small hit, for example, for the small hit. It may be configured to be executed during the symbol variation, during the small hit start demonstration time, and during the closing of the second special winning opening C20 during the small hit execution. It should be noted that the above-described configuration in which a big hit is executed by entering the V winning opening during the small hit (the fourth embodiment to the sixth modification from the fourth embodiment) may be appropriately combined. Absent.

(Fifth Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, so that the probability change game state is entered after the end of the special game. However, the present invention is applied to the game machine. Possible configurations are not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration having a different game play from that of the present embodiment is referred to as a fifth embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  In the fifth embodiment, as illustrated in the present embodiment, the game ball enters the specific area C22 provided in the special winning opening during the big hit to shift to the probability varying game state after the big hit ends. It is configured to do.

  Next, FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} of FIG. 8 in the fifth embodiment. In the figure, the differences from the similar modified example 4 of the fourth embodiment will be described in detail. The difference from the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment is that the structure related to the small hit is deleted because the small hit is not provided. Note that the other description has the same configuration as in the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment, and therefore the description is omitted.

  Next, FIG. 98 is an example of the main game tables 1 to 3 in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, there is only one type of "7B" big hit symbols on the second main game side, and the number of execution rounds of big hits related to "7B" is "16R". The long open big hit (big hit that makes it easy to enter the specific area C22) is "3A, 5A, 7A, 7B", and the short open big hit (big hit that makes it difficult to enter the specific area C22) is "2A. That is, since the second main game side only has a long open big hit, the ratio of long open big hit in the big hit (sum of long open big hit and short open big hit) on the second main game side is It is higher than the ratio of long open big hit in the big hit (sum of long open big hit and short open big hit) of 1 main game side.

  Next, FIG. 99 is a flowchart of the limited frequency variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 (fourth variation 4) of FIG. 97 in the fifth embodiment. Since the processing of the figure has the same configuration as the limited frequency variation mode determination processing of step 1450 (fourth variation 4) in the modification 4 from the fourth embodiment, description thereof will be omitted, but in the fifth embodiment. Has one limited frequency state.

  Next, FIG. 100 is an example of a limited frequency table according to the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, there is one type of limited frequency state, and the limited frequency table is configured so that it can be referred to in the time reduction game state. Further, when compared with the main game table 3 which is referred to in the time shortening game state, the average value of the fluctuation time is relatively higher when the limited frequency table is referred to than when the main game table 3 is referred to. It's been a short time. That is, the selection tendency of the variable time is different between the case of referring to the limited frequency table and the case of referring to the main game table 3.

  Next, FIG. 101 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 (fifth) of FIG. 97 in the fifth embodiment. The process of the figure has the same configuration as the specific game end determination process of step 1550 in the second embodiment, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, FIG. 102 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 (fifth) of FIG. 16 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 1787-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability variation shift reservation flag is on. If Yes in step 1787-1, in step 1787-2, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability variation shift reservation flag. Next, in step 1787-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 (the special game is won in the non-stochastic variation game state and then the special game is continuously performed in the probability variation game state. 1 is added to the counter value of the counter which measures the number of times of winning. Next, in step 1787-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 reaches a specified value (in this example, the game state after the end of the special game is reached by the non-stochastic variation game). This is the counter value to be set, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 4). If Yes in step 1787-4, in step 1787-5, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 to zero. On the other hand, if No in step 1787-1, the process proceeds to step 1787-5.

  Next, in step 1787-6, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c to a predetermined number (100 in this example). Next, in step 1787-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it is after the jackpot which is won in the non-time reduction game state. If Yes in step 1787-7, in steps 1787-8 and 1787-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c to a predetermined value (100 in this example), and Turn on the limited frequency flag. Next, in step 1788-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an evening stage command (command to the sub control board S side), and proceeds to step 1788-7. Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1787-7, in step 1788-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a space stage command (command to the side of the sub control board S), and proceeds to step 1788-7.

  If No in step 1787-4, in step 1788-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability variation flag. Next, in step 1788-4 and step 1788-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c to a predetermined number (100 in this example) and the counter of the time saving counter MP52c. The value is set a predetermined number of times (100 in this example). Next, in step 1788-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a space stage command (command to the sub control board S side), and proceeds to step 1788-7. Next, in step 1788-7 and step 1788-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag and turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997). Transition. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the number of times a special game is won in the non-stochastic variation game state and subsequently the special game is continuously won in the probability variation game state, that is, the first win is one, After that, when the special game is won in the probability variation game state, the number of times when it is measured as two times or three times becomes a predetermined number (four times in this example), and the non-probability variation occurs after the special game ends. It is configured to shift to a gaming state (sometimes referred to as a limiter machine). Also, after the jackpot that was won in the non-time shortened gaming state, when the non-stochastic variation gaming state is entered, the limited frequency state is entered, and the "evening stage" is set as the stay stage. It is configured. Also, in the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state, the "space stage" is set as the stay stage, and when the jackpot is won in the time shortening game state and the non-stochastic variation game state and time shortening game state are entered Is configured so that the same "space stage" is set as the stay stage. That is, in the non-time shortened gaming state, the big hit is won, and after the big hit, the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortened gaming state, and the probability variation gaming state and the time shortened gaming state, the stay stage (Trend of production) and selection tendency of the variation time are configured to be different. In addition, in the case of winning the big hit in the time shortening game state and shifting to the non-probability variation game state and the time shortening game state after the big hit ends, and in the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state, the stay stage ( The production tendency) and the variation time selection tendency are the same. In addition, when the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 reaches the specified value (reaches the limiter count) and shifts to the non-stochastic variation game state after the end of the big hit, the non-stochastic variation game state and the time shortening game state It is configured so that (there is always a time-saving game state). Also, when the big hit on the first main game side is won in the time shortening game state and the non-probability fluctuation game state and the time shortening game state are entered after the big hit, the "space stage" is set as the stay stage. Therefore, the same stay stage as the stay stage in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state is set. It should be noted that the performance tendency to be executed differs depending on whether the stay stage is the “space stage” and the stay stage is the “evening stage”. That is, there are effects that occur only in the "space stage", effects that occur only in the "evening stage", and effects that occur in both the "space stage" and the "evening stage".

  Next, FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 (fifth) of FIG. 19 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2639, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, the stay stage switching timing {the stay stage switching timing is, for example, the timing when the special game ends (is won), the timing when the gaming state shifts, (the same Whether the variation mode determination table is switched (even in the gaming state) or the number of times of variation may reach a predetermined number (even in the same gaming state) may be determined. If Yes in step 2639, in step 2640, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the space stage command from the main control board M side has been received. If Yes in step 2640, in step 2641, the CPUSC of the sub control substrate S sets the “space stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999). Further, in the case of No in step 2640, in step 2642, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an evening stage command from the main control board M side has been received. If Yes in step 2642, in step 2643, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the “evening stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999). In addition, in the case of No in step 2642, in step 2644, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the state has shifted to the non-time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 2644, in step 2645, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the “empty stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999). Even if No in step 2639 or step 2644, the process moves to the next process (process in step 2999).

  With the above configuration, in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment, the number of big hits won in the probability variation game state becomes a predetermined number, so that the non-probability variation game state is entered after the big hit ends. If you make a certain number of times and shift to a non-stochastic variation game state and a time shortening game state after the big hit ends, or you accidentally win the big hit on the first main game side in the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state. Even if the player wins and shifts to the non-stochastic variation game state and the time reduction game state after the end of the big hit, selection of the same stay stage and the same variation time as in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state By being configured to have a tendency, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine in which the player can proceed with the game without feeling discomfort. Kill.

(Sixth Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, so that the probability change game state is entered after the end of the special game. However, the present invention is applied to the game machine. Possible configurations are not limited to this. Therefore, a structure having a different game play from the present embodiment will be referred to as a sixth embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Incidentally, in the sixth embodiment, it is not necessary to use a ball-determining machine, such as the fifth embodiment, in which the probability variation game state is entered after the big hit ends by entering the specific area C22 during the big hit, for example, The gaming state after the big hit may be determined depending on the type of big hit symbol. Further, in such a configuration, the transition rate to the probability variation game state after the big hit end on the first main game side and the transition rate to the probability variation game state after the big hit end on the second main game side Are the same (for example, 95% in each case), and the tendency of the number of execution rounds is different.

  First, FIG. 104 is an example of a first (second) main game table in the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, as compared with the present embodiment, the jackpot probability in the non-probability variation game state of the first main game side and the second main game side is high, and the jackpot probability in the probability variation game state is low. Has become. That is, the difference in the jackpot probability between the non-probability variation game state and the probability variation game state is reduced. Also, in the case of a big hit on the second main game side, "7B" which is a big hit symbol that shifts to the probability fluctuation game state after the big hit ends is a big hit symbol which shifts to the non-stochastic fluctuation game state after the big hit ends. 2B ”is easier to win. Incidentally, in the case of a big hit on the second main game side, the big hit symbol that can be selected may be only "7B".

  Next, FIG. 105 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination processing relating to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 4 in the sixth embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 1630 (sixth), that is, in step 1606, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c to zero, and then step 1630 (sixth). In 6), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a game state command at the time of winning (a command relating to the game state when the special game is won and a command to the sub control board S side), and shifts to step 1612. .

  Next, FIG. 106 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 (sixth) of FIG. 16 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 1790-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the stop symbol related to the current main game symbol is a probability variation big hit symbol (a big hit symbol that can be shifted to the probability variation game state after the end of the special game, in this example, 7A, 7B). If Yes in step 1790-1, in step 1790-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 (which is the same counter as in the fifth embodiment described above). Then, the process proceeds to step 1790-3. Incidentally, the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, like the fifth embodiment described above, becomes a non-stochastic fluctuation gaming state after the big hit ends because the number of big hits won in the probability fluctuation gaming state becomes a predetermined number. It is configured to shift (sometimes referred to as a limiter machine).

  Next, in step 1790-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 is a prescribed value (5 in this example). If Yes in step 1790-3, in step 1790-4, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 to zero, and proceeds to step 1790-5. Next, in step 1790-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the count value of the hour / hour counter MP52c to a predetermined number A (the number of hour / hour is not substantially definite to continue until the next big hit, and this example Then, set 100). Next, in step 1790-6 and step 1790-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag and the auxiliary game time saving flag, and proceeds to step 1791-4. Further, in the case of No in step 1790-3, in step 1790-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it is after the jackpot which is won in the time reduction game state. In the case of No in step 1790-8, the process shifts to step 1790-5, and the main game probability variation flag remains off. On the other hand, if Yes in step 1790-8, in step 1790-9, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability variation flag. Next, in step 1790-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined number of times B in the hour / hour counter MP52c (the number of hour / hour is substantially determinate to continue until the next big hit, and in this example, 65536). Note that you may set ∞ times). Next, in step 1791-1 and step 1791-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag and turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag, and then proceeds to step 1791-4. On the other hand, if No in step 1790-1, in other words, if the stop symbol is 2A, 2B, in step 1791-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 to zero, Go to step 1791-4. Next, in step 1791-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a probability variation continuous counter value command (a command relating to the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 and a command to the sub-control board S side), The process proceeds to step 1997. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, after the big hit related to 7A or 7B, the time shortening game state is entered, but the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 is a specified value (in this example, If 5) is reached, that is, the limiter is reached, 100 times is set as the shortened number of times, while if the limiter is not reached, the number of shortened times is continued until the next big hit. It is configured so that 65536 times, which is a substantially deterministic number, is set. Note that ∞ times may be set. In addition, after the big hit which is won in the non-time shortening game state, that is, after the first hit, the non-stochastic variation game state and the time shortening game state are set, and the time saving number is set to 100 times.

The game state transition of the sixth embodiment may be configured as follows.
After the big hit on the first main game side in the non-probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state, the probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state may be shifted. For example, after the jackpot that is won in the non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state, after non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state, non-probability variation game state and time reduction game state, probability variation game state and The non-time shortened gaming state, and the probability variation gaming state and the time shortened gaming state may be configured to be able to shift to all four gaming states. Also, a part of the big hit (may be referred to as a probability variation big hit) that shifts to the probability changing game state after the big hit in the non-stochastic fluctuation game state and the non-time shortening game state, or the non-stochastic fluctuation game state and the non-time shortening game. Non-probability variation after the jackpot in the state transition to the gaming state may be configured so that only some or all of the jackpots transition to the time-reduced gaming state (the big jackpot ends in the jackpot won in the non-time-reduced gaming state) Playability of whether it is possible to shift to the time shortening game state later). If configured in this way, the probability variation jackpot is won in the non-probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state or the probability variation game state and non-time reduction game state, and it shifts to the time reduction game state after the termination of the big hit. In this case, the number of time saving is not limited to the next big hit prize (for example, 65536 times, and ∞ times may be set), and may be 100 times (may be 100 times or 100 times at a predetermined ratio). It may be awarded or may be awarded until the next big hit except 100 times). In addition, when the probability variation big hit is won in the probability variation game state and time shortening game state or the non-probability variation game state and time shortening game state, and the time shortening game state is entered after the big hit, the number of time saving is the next big hit prize. May be up to. Also, if you win the big hit in the probability variation game state and time reduction game state or the non-probability variation game state and time reduction game state, after the big hit, the probability variation game state and time reduction game state (before reaching the limiter It may be configured to shift to a probability variation big hit) or a non-stochastic variation game state and a time reduction game state (all jackpots after reaching the limiter or non-probability variation jackpot before reaching the limiter).

  Next, FIG. 107 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control section SM side) in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2600 (sixth) and step 2700 (sixth), that is, after the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the special game-related display control process in step 2500, the step At 2600 (sixth), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a stay stage determination process described later. Next, in step 2700 (sixth), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a gaming state display control process at the time of winning, which will be described later, and shifts to the process of step 2999.

  Next, FIG. 108 is a flowchart of the special game effect execution process according to the subroutine of step 2550 (sixth) of FIG. 23 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 2590-1, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S sets a command for sequentially displaying the number of rounds and the number of winning prizes as numbers. Next, in step 2590-2, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, the big jackpot being executed is the second main gaming probability variation big jackpot (the big jackpot pattern on the second main gaming side that can shift to the probability variation gaming state after the big jackpot is finished. In this example, it is determined whether or not 5B / 7B). If Yes in step 2590-2, in step 2590-3, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is a big hit in the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state. If Yes in step 2590-3, in step 2590-4, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes the time reduction pullback effect execution lottery to win with a predetermined probability (1/5 in this example). Next, in step 2590-5, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the executed time saving pullback effect execution lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2590-5, in step 2590-6, the CPUSC of the sub control board S wins the jackpot in the time reduction pullback effect (the non-probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state, and the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot ends. Moreover, it is an effect for notifying that the time shortening game state is to be entered, and a command for executing an effect for notifying that the limiter count has been reset is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2520). Reaching the limiter number means that the probability variation continuous counter value reaches the specified value, and resetting the limiter number means resetting the probability variation continuous counter value to zero. The player visually recognizes the time reduction pullback effect and recognizes that the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 has been reset, that is, the number of jackpots until reaching the limiter has been reset, and has a feeling of expectation for further consecutive jackpots. be able to. In addition, in the case of No in step 2590-3 or step 2590-5, in step 2590-7, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the big hit being executed is the big hit that was won in the time reduction game state. judge. If Yes in step 2590-7, in step 2590-8, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the number of consecutive probability variation (the count value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2) based on the received probability variation continuous counter value command. To do. Next, in step 2590-9, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the read probability variation continuous count value is a limiter unreached value {count value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c that will shift to the non-stochastic variation game state after the end of the big hit. Is a value that does not reach the specified value (5 times in this example) even after the end of the big hit during execution, and in this example, it is determined whether it is 3) or less. In this processing, when the special game that is being executed ends and the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 reaches the specified value, whether or not there is a transition to the non-stochastic variation game state and the time reduction game state. Is being determined. If Yes in step 2590-9, in step 2590-10, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S executes the condominium production execution lottery to win with a predetermined probability (1/5 in this example). Next, in step 2591-1, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the executed condominium effect execution lottery has been won. If Yes in step 2591-1, in step 2592-2, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S is an effect that informs that the game is to be shifted to a probability variation game state and a time shortening game state after the big hit ends, A command for executing an effect for notifying that the big hit is a probability variation big hit before reaching the limiter number of times) is set, and the process shifts to the next process (process of step 2520). In addition, in the case of No in step 2590-7, step 2590-9 or step 2591-1, in step 2592-3, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is in the normal effect (whether or not to shift to the probability variation game state after the special game ends. It is an effect that does not inform whether or not it is set, and a command for executing an effect during the special game in the normal time is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2520). In this way, in the sixth embodiment, as a big hit production, a time-shortening pull-back production and a big jackpot end are productions that notify the fact that the probability variation game state is transitioned to after the big hit ends and the probability variation consecutive number is reset. It is configured so as to be able to execute a long-term resort effect that informs later that it will shift to the probability variation game state. It should be noted that there is no effect to inform that the game will shift to the non-stochastic variation game state after the end of the big hit, and even if the player shifts to the non-stochastic variation game state and the time shortening game state after the end of the big hit, the player is in the middle of a big hit. It is configured so that it cannot be judged in the production of (because it is a game property to enjoy predicting the current game state at the stay stage after the big hit).

  Next, FIG. 109 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 (sixth) of FIG. 107 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 2646-1, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is the switching timing of the stay stage {the stay stage switching timing is, for example, the timing at which the special game ends (is elected), the game state is shifted. Timing, timing when the variation mode determination table is switched (even in the same gaming state), timing (even in the same gaming state) when the number of times of variation reaches a predetermined number, etc.} To determine. Incidentally, in the sixth embodiment, in the time-saving game state, the stay stage can be switched for each symbol variation. If Yes in step 2646-1, in step 2646-2, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the non-probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 2646-2, in step 2646-3, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the probability variation game state. If Yes in step 2646-3, in step 2646-4, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the number of consecutive probable variations (count value of the probable variation continuous counter MP51c-2) based on the received probability continuous counter value command. To do. Next, in step 2646-5, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the probability variation continuous count is the next end value (the count value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 has reached the specified value due to the next big hit winning, and the next big hit). It is a value that will be transferred to the non-stochastic variation game state after the end, and in this example, it is determined whether or not 4). If Yes in step 2646-5, the process moves to step 2646-6. On the other hand, if No in step 2646-3, the process moves to step 2646-6. Next, in step 2646-6, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the stay stage determination table A to determine and set the stay stage, and proceeds to the next process {step 2700 (sixth)}. In addition, in the case of No in step 2646-5, in step 2646-7, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the number of consecutive probable variations is the end value one by one (the counter value of the probable variation continuous counter MP51c-2 is the specified value due to the next big hit winning). It is a value that reaches the non-probability variation game state after the end of the next big hit, and in this example, it is determined whether or not 3). If Yes in step 2646-7, in step 2646-8, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the stay stage determination table B to determine and set the stay stage, and the next process {step 2700 (sixth) } To move. In addition, in the case of No in step 2646-7, in step 2646-9, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the stay stage determination table C to determine and set the stay stage, and the next process {step 2700 (first 6)}. In addition, in the case of No in step 2646-2, in step 2646-10, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the “empty stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to the next process {step 2700 (sixth)}. . As described above, in the sixth embodiment, in the time-saving game state, the stay stage determination table to be referred to when determining the stay stage is different depending on how many subsequent jackpots reach the limiter by winning. The table is referred to when there is a large number of jackpots that can be won before reaching the limiter (advantageous for the player), in order from the "stay stage determination table C → stay stage determination table B → stay". Stage decision table A ".

Next, FIG. 110 is an example of a stay stage determination table according to the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, in the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state and the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state, a lottery can be executed to determine whether or not to change the stay stage for each symbol variation. As described above, the number of jackpots that can be won before reaching the limiter is large, that is, when the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 has a small counter value, the "stay stage determination table C → Stay stage decision table B → Stay stage decision table A ”. The "space stage" is most easily selected when referring to the stay stage determination table C, the "night stage" is most easily selected when referring to the stay stage determination table B, and the "evening stage" is stay stage determination. Since it is easiest to select when referring to Table A, the count value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 for each stay stage is small, and the degree of expectation is “space stage → night stage → evening stage” in descending order. . If "no transition" is selected, the stay stage is not changed. The stay stage may be configured as follows.
(1) The "Space Stage" is a stay stage in which it is definite that the player stays in the probability variation game state and the time shortening game state, and after the time saving pullback production and the condominium production are executed as the production during the symbol variation The executed big hit may be configured to shift to the "space stage" after the big hit ends.
(2) It is preferable that the staying stage is basically set after the big hit ends, but if it is a probability fluctuation game state that continues until the next big hit and a time shortening game state, 100 from the end of the last big hit. After completion of the symbol change of the number of times, even if the user stays in the “evening stage” or the “night stage”, it may be configured to always shift to the “space stage”.

  Next, FIG. 111 is a flowchart of the winning game state display control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (sixth) of FIG. 107 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 2702, the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a winning game state command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stores information on the gaming state and the big hit symbol at the time of big hit winning based on the received command, and shifts to step 2706. On the other hand, if No in step 2702, the process moves to step 2706. Next, in step 2706, the CPU SC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the game has been executed for a predetermined period. Here, if the game is not executed, (1) game to various winning openings (first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening, large winning opening C10, etc.) To various entrances (first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening, big winning opening C10, out opening D80, auxiliary game starting opening H10, etc.) where there is no ball There is no entry of the game ball, (3) the game ball is not fired (the player is not touching the firing handle D44, the game ball is not flowing down into the game area D30, etc.), In this case, it may be determined that the game is not being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2706, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is a standby demo screen (a screen displayed on the effect display device SG when the game is not progressing for a predetermined period, for example, character introduction or story introduction). A moving image is displayed) is set, and the process moves to step 2710. The display of the standby demo screen ends when the execution of the game is restarted. In addition, the execution of the game is restarted, (1) game balls to various winning openings (first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening, large winning opening C10, etc.) To the various entrances (first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening, big winning opening C10, out opening D80, auxiliary game starting opening H10, etc.) In the case of detecting the ball entering the game ball, (3) detecting the launch of the game ball (the player touches the launch handle D44, the game ball is flowing down to the game area D30, etc.) May be determined to have been restarted. On the other hand, if No in step 2706, the process moves to step 2710.

  Next, in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the standby demo screen is being displayed. If Yes in step 2710, in step 2712 the CPU SC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a predetermined operation (for example, long press operation) of the sub input button SB has been performed. In the case of Yes in step 2712, in step 2714, the CPU SC of the sub control board S sets a command for displaying information on the gaming state and the big hit symbol at the time of winning the big hit on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to step 2999. Even if No in step 2710 or step 2712, the process proceeds to step 2999. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the player can operate the sub input button SB while the standby demo screen is displayed to display the information on the gaming state and the jackpot pattern at the time of winning the jackpot on the effect display device SG. Has become.

  With the above configuration, in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment, the number of big hits won in the probability variation game state becomes a predetermined number, so that the non-probability variation game state is entered after the big hit ends. It is possible to suggest whether or not the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 is large depending on the staying stage, that is, the number of jackpots that can be won before reaching the limiter, and the player makes a sub-input while the standby demo screen is displayed. By operating the button SB, it is possible to display information regarding the gaming state and the jackpot pattern at the time of winning the big hit on the effect display device SG, and whether or not the big hit is won in the non-probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. By visually observing such information, the remaining number of big hits before reaching the limiter can be estimated, which makes the game more interesting. And thus. In addition, by performing a specific operation of the sub-input button while the symbol is changing (for example, pressing and holding for a predetermined time outside the valid button operation period for performing the button operation that triggers the production during the symbol change). The current game state (for example, the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state or the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state) may be notified, or the remaining limiter count may be notified. In addition, when you hit the big jackpot (during big hit start demonstration time, round execution, big hit end demo time), you can perform a specific operation (for example, long press for a predetermined time or more) The gaming state (whether the probability variation game state and the time reduction game state or the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state) at the time of winning may be notified.

  In the Pachinko gaming machine according to this example, when the jackpot is won in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the number of times shortened is given after the jackpot is finished. When the jackpot in the time-reduced gaming state is won, the jackpot is awarded after the jackpot is finished. It may be configured such that the number of hours saved is relatively large. In such a case, depending on whether or not the jackpot is won in the time reduction game state, even in the same jackpot pattern (for example, "7A"), in the time reduction game state after the jackpot is over. The variation tendency may be configured to be different from the tendency of selection (the limitation frequency table to be referred to is different, the transition state of the limitation frequency state, etc.) and the effect tendency. In addition, when the transition mode of the limited frequency state is different, for example, after the jackpot that is won in the non-time-reduced gaming state, "the limited frequency table A refers to 20 variations → the limited frequency table B refers to 79 variations → the limited frequency The table C may be referred to as “1 variation reference”, and may be configured as “100 variation reference to the limited frequency table D” after the jackpot that is won in the time reduction game state. Further, in such a case, if a group A is provided as a group of big hit symbols and the big hit symbol of group A is won in the non-time reduction game state, the non-time reduction game state shifts after the big hit ends. However, when the big hit symbol of group A is won in the time shortening game state, after the big hit, the game shifts to the time shortening game state, and there are a plurality of types of time saving times to be given. Good. In addition, after the big hit that is won in the non-time-reducing game state, the number of time saving is set to 20 times, and the “variable frequency table A is referred to as 5 variations → the limited frequency table B is referred to as 4 variations → the limited frequency table C is referred as 1 variation. After the jackpot that is won in the time shortening game state, the number of time saving is set to 100 times, and "the limited frequency table D is changed 100 times (or the limited frequency table D is changed 99 times-> the limited frequency table E is changed one time". Reference) ”.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to this example is configured as the ST machine described above, and is configured so that there are cases where it shifts to the probability variation game state and cases where it shifts to the non-stochastic variation game state after the end of the big hit. The probability of being able to win the big hit before the state ends may be 65% or less. Further, in the probability variation game state, when the big hit on the second main game side is won, it may be configured to always shift to the probability variation game state after the big hit ends. In addition, it may be configured as the above-mentioned ball-making machine, and in such a configuration, the number of shortening times after finishing the big hit in the short opening big hit is smaller than the number of shortening times after finishing the big hit in the long opening big hit. You may. In addition, the stay stage in the probability variation game state is common after the big hit in the long open big hit and after the big hit in the short open big hit until the number of times shortened after the big hit in the short open big hit has passed. If a stay stage (for example, a battle stage that is a staging mode in which a player fights with an enemy character) is set, and then, after a big hit ends in a long open big hit, a different stay stage (for example, a short fluctuating time during a big hit or a loss) It may be configured to shift to). In addition, after the long open big hit, the number of times saved and shortened is 100, and the first half 30 times is the big hit instant notification mode (a mode in which the variation time is relatively short regardless of whether or not the result is right or wrong). While the number of times becomes the battle effect mode, after the short open big hit, the number of time saving is 50 times, and all 50 times may be the battle effect mode.

Further, the pachinko game machine according to this example may be configured as follows. The configurations listed below may be appropriately combined with each other, or only one may be applied.
(A1) The upper limit number of holdings on the second main game side is 1 or more. (A2) The small winning percentage on the second main game side is high probability (1020/1024 etc.)
(A3) Even if you win the big hit triggered by the small hit on the second main game side, it may not move to the time shortening game state after the big hit ends. (A4) Hold on the second main game side after the big hit ends The probability that you can win the big hit by the end of the symbol fluctuation that has been exhausted is 65% or less (after the big hit when the big hit pattern on the first main game side that was won in the non-time shortened gaming state is the end, or (It may be configured so that the number of shortening times can be 100 times after the big hit ends with a small hit)
(A5) Even if a game ball enters the special winning opening during a small hit, it may or may not enter the V winning opening depending on the operation of the distribution member in the special winning opening. May be. Also, by changing the above configuration,
(B1) The upper limit number of holdings on the second main game side is 2 or more. (B2) The number of shortening times given after the big hit ends is a plurality of times, and the number of shortening times is the same as the upper limit number of holdings on the second main game side. is there

Further, the pachinko game machine according to this example may be configured as follows.
(C1) In addition to the number of times saved when both the first main game symbol has changed and the case where the second main game symbol has changed, there is a number of times saved that counts only the variations of the first main game symbol. (C2) In addition to the number of times saved when both the first main game symbol changes and the case where the second main game symbol changes, there is a number of times saved that counts only the changes in the second main game symbol. (C3) The hold of the first main game side is given priority over the hold of the second main game side (C4) The hold of the second main game side is given priority over the hold of the first main game side (C5) When the lost symbol is stopped due to the time-saving final fluctuation that causes the time-saving game state to end, the variable fixed time associated with the lost symbol is in the non-time-reduced game state (C6) first main game Time reduction after the big hit on the side Game state transition rate Design the jackpot loop rate in the time shortened gaming state from the proportion that can be won in the big jackpot by the end of the time shortened gaming state (designed to be 65% or less), and the number of hours saved by the jackpot pattern or the small jackpot pattern May be configured to be different

The following signals may be output as the external terminal output signals as described above with reference to FIG. In addition, it is suitable to be applied to the case where the big hit is executed after the small hit ends by entering the V winning opening during the small hit mentioned above.
Signal type: Big hit system signal overview: Special game or small hit game is being executed, or the game state is a signal 1 signal that outputs that the game state is a time shortening game state (that is, a state advantageous to the player) Configuration: [output timing] condition device operation flag off → timing 0.504 seconds after turning on [output period] condition device operation flag on → timing when main game shortened flag is off when off, or main game shortened flag on → Outputting ON signal until the timing when the condition device operation flag is off when it is off Duplication of the output period: [possibility of duplication] None Remarks: When the condition device operation flag is turned on → off, and it shifts to the non-time shortening game state Also, it is turned on until all the fluctuations related to the hold on the second main game side existing at the transition timing are completed, that is, the time shortening game state. It may be output over the time reduction gaming state. Further, in the above, if the small hit is won by the symbol fluctuation related to the last one holding on the second main game side, and the big hit triggered by the small hit is executed, the time after the big hit ends When it shifts to the shortened game state, it continuously turns on, while when it shifts to the non-time shortened game state after the end of the big hit, it turns on. In addition, after the big hit with the small hit which is elected with the design fluctuation of the 2nd main game side as the opportunity, it is possible to move to either the non-time reduction game state and the time reduction game state. Well, if configured in this way, a big hit triggered by a small hit is executed in a time shortened game state and a situation where the second main game side has a hold, and a non-time shortened game state after the big hit ends. Therefore, when the big hit is triggered by the small hit again due to the fluctuation of the second main game symbol related to the remaining hold on the second main game side, after the big hit ends (the big hit end timing is timing A When the gaming state of () is a time shortening gaming state, the signal is continuously output even after the timing A, while the jackpot is finished (the jackpot end timing is set as the timing A). In the case where the gaming state is the non-time shortened gaming state, if the number of holdings on the second main gaming side is 0 after the jackpot is over, the signal may be output at timing A. it can. Also, when the second main game side in the non-time-reducing game state has won the small hit in the last remaining hold and does not enter the V winning opening during the small hit, the small hit Ends (= when the small hitting end demo time ends), the output of the time saving / shortening signal ends. Further, in addition to the signal concerned, it may be configured to output a big hit type signal. When the big hit signals A, B, and C are provided, (1) the big hit signal A indicates that the small hit is in the middle and the big hit is in the middle. Output in both, (2) big hit signal B is output during big hit but not during small hit, (3) big hit signal C is a small hit during the non-time shortening game state, and winning It may be configured such that it is output in all big hits regardless of the gaming state.

  Also, as an external terminal output signal different from the above signal, the jackpot signal is configured to be output, and when the jackpot pattern is stopped and the jackpot is started, the jackpot signal is output from the start of the jackpot start demo time, Even if the player hits the V winning opening even during the small hit, the big hit signal may be output from the timing of entering the V winning opening.

Further, the pachinko game machine according to this example may be configured as follows. In addition, it is suitable to be applied to the case where the big hit is executed after the small hit ends by entering the V winning opening during the small hit mentioned above.
(D1) In the time-reduced game state, the look-ahead effect is executed when the ball enters the second main game start opening. Specifically, in the time-reduced game state, a small hit occurs in the already held hold. A pre-reading effect is executed to suggest or inform whether or not the hold is present, triggered by the occurrence of the newly-held second main game side hold (ball entry into the second main game starting opening).
(D2) When a small hit on the first main game side (a small hit that makes it difficult to enter the V winning opening as compared to the small hit on the second main game side) in the time shortening game state, the small hit After the big hit ends with a hit, it shifts to a time-saving game state (the production during the big hit may be a production mode such as a battle-loss production that ends the condominium)
(D3) In the non-time shortening game state, the big hit when the big hit symbol is stopped or the big hit triggered by the small hit is won, and after the big hit, the time shortening game state is entered, and the number of time saving is 100 times. If there is, during the symbol change on the second main game side in the time shortening game state, do not execute the look-ahead effect that suggests that there may be a small hit hold within the hold

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to this example is configured such that a big hit is executed after the small hit ends by entering the V winning opening during the small hit mentioned above, and the big hit symbol on the second main game side is stopped. During the big hit triggered by the opportunity, it is possible to execute an effect that is in the same effect mode as the effect that informs that there is a game in the V winning opening, which is executed when a game ball enters the V winning opening. It may be configured (the effect during the change related to the small hit symbol and the effect of the change related to the large hit symbol may be common).

Further, the pachinko game machine according to this example may be configured as follows. Incidentally, it is suitable to be applied to a case in which it is configured to shift to the probability variation game state after the big hit ends by entering a specific area during the big hit mentioned above.
(E1) The ratio of the long open big hit in the big hit on the second main game side is higher than the ratio of the long open big hit in the big hit on the first main game side (the short open big hit also exists on the second main game side) are doing)
(E2) The probability variation game state does not end with the number of symbol variations (E3) The limiter machine described above (E4) Limiter (a big variation in the probability variation game state that will shift to the non-stochastic variation game state after the big hit ends. The number of shortened times given after the jackpot is relatively greater after the jackpot that reaches the limiter than after the jackpot that has not reached the predetermined number of consecutive winnings). Further, it may be configured such that the number of shortening times after the big hit when the big hit in the time shortening game state is larger than the number of shortening times after the big hit in the non-time shortening game state (E5). In the non-probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state, the first main game side wins the big hit. The number of times saved and shortened after the jackpot on the main game side is relatively large (E6) There are a plurality of types of times and shortened times that can be awarded after the jackpot is over (for example, non-stochastic variation game state and non-time shortened game). (The difference between the number of short cuts after the short open big hit on the first main game side won in the state and the number of short cuts after the big hit when the player does not enter a specific area in the long open big hit is different.)

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present example, the limited frequency transition (determination of the timing at which the limited frequency state shifts) is determined by a random number and is not determined depending on the stop symbol {random number for limited frequency determination (broadly speaking For example, it has a variation pattern table reference state determination random number) and determines a table or a limited frequency transition pattern to be referred to when determining a variation mode after a big hit, according to a lottery result using the random number}. As an example, by executing a random number lottery related to the limited frequency transition after the big hit ends (or by executing a random number lottery related to the limited frequency transition during a change related to the big hit symbol), determine the variation pattern selection state after the big hit ends. Alternatively, a limited frequency transition pattern may be determined thereafter. As a random number range, 0 to 299 are “limited frequency A50 times → limited frequency B49 times → limited frequency C1 times” in 1024, and 300 to 599 are “random frequency ranges. Limited frequency A20 times → limited frequency B79 times → limited frequency C1 times ", 600 to 899 are" limited frequency B99 times → limited frequency C1 times ", 900 to 1023 are" limited frequency D100 times ", and so on. Good.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concept based on the further configuration shown in the above embodiments is added to these concepts, not to mention the combination and separation (conceptualization) of these listed concepts. May be.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (1),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a second large winning a prize mouth C20) which can take a closed state and an open state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
And a sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), the first identification information is stopped. A first identification information display control means for controlling to display,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the second identification information is stopped. Second identification information display control means for controlling to display,
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, there is a predetermined number of balls entering a variable winning a prize port (for example, the second special winning a prize port C20) or a predetermined number. Special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game in which a variable winning opening (for example, the second special winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for a player until the period has elapsed,
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information will be stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the stop in which the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group The probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode has a high-probability lottery state in which the probability is higher than the predetermined probability, and if there is a ball in a specific area during execution of the special game, execution of the special game While the high probability lottery state can be set after the end of the game, a game state transition control that controls the state to be a low probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game if there is no entry into the specific area during the execution of the special game Means and
And a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side.
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) is provided with effect display content control means capable of displaying an effect,
The second identification is more than the ease of entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) during the execution of the special game executed by the stop display of the first identification information belonging to the predetermined group. The information is displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group so that it is easier to enter a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) during the execution of the special game. Cage,
As an effect displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG), a specific area entrance effect for notifying that a specific area (for example, C22) has been entered Has been done,
It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured not to display the specific area entrance effect when the first specific area (for example, the specific area C22) is entered during execution of the special game.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (2),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a second large winning a prize mouth C20) which can take a closed state and an open state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
A performance display unit capable of displaying a performance (for example, a performance display device SG,
And a sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), the first identification information is stopped. A first identification information display control means for controlling to display,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the second identification information is stopped. Second identification information display control means for controlling to display,
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, there is a predetermined number of balls entering a variable winning a prize port (for example, the second special winning a prize port C20) or a predetermined number. Special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game in which a variable winning opening (for example, the second special winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for a player until the period has elapsed,
And a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side.
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information will be stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the stop in which the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group There is a high-probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability, and there was a ball entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) during the execution of the special game. In this case, after the execution of the special game, a high-probability lottery state can be set. On the other hand, if there is no entry into the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) during the execution of the special game, after the execution of the special game. It is possible to control in a low probability lottery state in
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) than the normal playing state, and a high probability lottery state after execution of the special game and When controlling so that it can be set to the specific game state and in the high-probability lottery state and the specific game state, from the start of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display as one unit, after the execution of the special game is completed It is configured to be in a low-probability lottery state and a specific game state after the first unit has been counted a predetermined number of times after counting.
When the high probability lottery state and the specific game state change to the low probability lottery state and the specific game state, counting from the time when the one unit is performed a predetermined number of times, the low probability after the one unit is performed the specific number of times It is configured to be in a lottery state and a normal game state,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) is provided with effect display content control means capable of displaying an effect,
In the low-probability lottery state and the normal game state, the stop identification information of the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed as a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, the special game is executed, and specified during execution of the special game. When there is a ball in the area, it is configured to be in the high probability lottery state and the normal game state after the execution of the special game,
In the high-probability lottery state and the normal game state, the stop identification information of the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed as a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, the special game is executed, and specified during execution of the special game. When there is a ball entering a region (for example, the specific region C22), it is configured such that it can be in a high probability lottery state and a specific game state after the end of execution of the special game,
In the high-probability lottery state and the normal game state, the stop identification information of the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed as a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, the special game is executed, and specified during execution of the special game. If there is no entry into the area (for example, the specific area C22), it is configured to be in the low probability lottery state and the specific game state after the execution of the special game,
In the high-probability lottery state and the normal game state, the stop identification information of the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed as a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, the special game is executed, and specified during execution of the special game. When there is a ball entering a region (for example, the specific region C22) and the state is a high-probability lottery state and a specific game state after the execution of the special game, an effect display format after the special game is finished, and a high-probability lottery In the state and the normal game state, the stop identification information of the first identification information or the second identification information is stop-displayed as a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, the special game is executed, and a specific area (for example, during execution of the special game) , There is no entry into the specific area C22), and the production display format after the special game is finished when the special probability is in the low probability lottery state and the specific game state after the execution of the special game. Is a pachinko machine, characterized in that it is configured to be identical.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (3),
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a second large winning a prize mouth C20) which can take a closed state and an open state,
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the entrance into the starting port (eg, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10),
On the basis of the random number acquired by the random number acquiring means, the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means for controlling
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that belongs to a predetermined group, a variable number of winnings is entered until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening (for example, the second special winning opening C20) or a predetermined period elapses. And a special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game in which the mouth (for example, the second special winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player,
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the predetermined group is more than the predetermined probability. Also has a high-probability lottery state with a high probability,
After the execution of the special game, it has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) than the normal playing state. In the high probability lottery state and the specific game state, if it is in the high probability lottery state and the specific game state, the unit from the start of the variation display of the identification information to the stop display is calculated after the end of the special game. Then, after the one unit is played a predetermined number of times, it is configured to be in a low probability lottery state and a specific game state,
When the high probability lottery state and the specific game state change to the low probability lottery state and the specific game state, counting from the time when the one unit is performed a predetermined number of times, the low probability after the one unit is performed the specific number of times It is configured to be in a lottery state and a normal game state,
Outputs first information, second information different from the first information, and third information different from the first information and the second information as external output information to be output from the pachinko game machine to the outside. Is configured to be possible,
The first information is configured to be output when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group in the normal gaming state,
Even when the first information is output in the high-probability lottery state and the specific game state, the first information can be continuously output even when the low-probability lottery state and the specific game state are output. In the probability lottery state and the normal game state, the first information is configured not to be output,
The second information is configured to be output when the identification information is stopped and displayed,
The time when the second signal is output when the second information is output when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the high-probability lottery state and the specific game state, and the low-probability lottery state and the specific game state The time when the second signal is output when the second information is output when the identification information is stopped and displayed is the same time,
The selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information in the high-probability lottery state and the specific game state is different from the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information in the low-probability lottery state and the specific game state. It is a pachinko machine featuring.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (4),
The starting ball (eg, the second main game starting port B10) is located at a position where the game ball flowing down the first region side is easier to enter than the game ball flowing down the second region side. ,
A variable winning opening that allows the game ball flowing down the first area side to be in a closed state and an open state arranged at a position where it is easier to enter the ball than a game ball flowing down the second area side (for example, , The second prize hole C20),
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
And a sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the entrance into the starting port (eg, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10),
On the basis of the random number acquired by the random number acquiring means, the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means for controlling
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that belongs to a predetermined group, a variable number of winnings is entered until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening (for example, the second special winning opening C20) or a predetermined period has elapsed. Special game control means capable of executing a special game in which a unit game that allows the mouth (for example, the second special winning opening C20) to be in an advantageous state for the player is executed a plurality of times,
Having a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and in the case of the specific game state, the unit from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display has become the specific game state. Required from the time of counting until the one unit is performed a predetermined number of times, the game state control means that can be controlled so as not to be in the normal game state and the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) side to display effects And a game information transmitting means for transmitting the game information to the sub game section (for example, the sub control board S) side,
A first fluctuation pattern table as a table to be referred when determining the fluctuation display time of the identification information in the specific game state, and a second fluctuation pattern table in which the first fluctuation pattern table has a different tendency of selecting the fluctuation display time of the identification information. And a first fluctuation pattern table and a second fluctuation pattern table, at least a third fluctuation pattern table in which the selection tendency of the fluctuation display time of the identification information is different, the first fluctuation pattern in the specific period in the specific gaming state A first variation state that refers to the table, a second variation state that is shifted from the first variation state that refers to the second variation pattern table after the end of the specific period in the specific game state, and a specific game state to a normal game state After the transition, the third variation state that is transitioned from the second variation state that refers to the third variation pattern table And it has also,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) is provided with effect display content control means capable of displaying an effect,
When in the specific game state, a notification image can be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) as an effect for informing the first area to shoot a game ball, and the notification is performed. The image has a first notification image occupying a predetermined display area, and a second notification image occupying a display area smaller than the first notification image,
The first notification image is displayed when it is in the specific game state and the predetermined display condition is satisfied, while the second notification image does not satisfy the predetermined display condition when it is the specific game state. Is also displayed,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied in the first fluctuation state and the second fluctuation state is displayed at the next fluctuation display of the identification information, both the first notification image and the second notification image are the first fluctuations. While it is possible to output from the state to the second variation state, in the second variation state and in the situation of becoming the third variation state at the next variation display of the identification information, the first notification image and the second notification image Is a pachinko game machine characterized in that neither of the above is output from the second fluctuation state to the third fluctuation state.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (5),
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a second large winning a prize mouth C20) which can take a closed state and an open state,
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the entrance into the starting port (eg, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10),
On the basis of the random number acquired by the random number acquiring means, the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means for controlling
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that belongs to a predetermined group, a variable number of winnings is entered until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening (for example, the second special winning opening C20) or a predetermined period has elapsed. Special game control means capable of executing a special game in which a unit game that allows the mouth (for example, the second special winning opening C20) to be in an advantageous state for the player is executed a plurality of times,
Having a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and in the case of the specific game state, the unit from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display has become the specific game state. Required from the time of counting until the one unit is performed a predetermined number of times, the game state control means that can be controlled so as not to be in the normal game state and the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) side to display effects And a game information transmitting means for transmitting the game information to the sub game section (for example, the sub control board S) side,
A first fluctuation pattern table as a table to be referred when determining the fluctuation display time of the identification information in the specific game state, and a second fluctuation pattern table in which the first fluctuation pattern table has a different tendency of selecting the fluctuation display time of the identification information. And a first fluctuation pattern table and a second fluctuation pattern table, at least a third fluctuation pattern table in which the selection tendency of the fluctuation display time of the identification information is different, the first fluctuation pattern in the specific period in the specific gaming state A first variation state that refers to the table, a second variation state that is shifted from the first variation state that refers to the second variation pattern table after the end of the specific period in the specific game state, and a specific game state to a normal game state After the transition, the third variation state that is transitioned from the second variation state that refers to the third variation pattern table And it has also,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) is provided with effect display content control means capable of displaying an effect,
In the first variation state, the specific effect is not executed until the one unit is performed a certain number of times after the first variation state, and the first variation state, and the first variation It is configured such that the specific effect can be executed after the one unit has been performed a certain number of times from the time when the state becomes the state,
It is configured so that a specific effect can be executed in the case of the second variation state,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the specific effect is not executed in the third variation state.

Pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (6),
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a second large winning a prize mouth C20) which can take a closed state and an open state,
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
And a sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the entrance into the starting port (eg, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10),
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition unit, a random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the acceptance / rejection determination permission condition is satisfied,
When the win / fail judgment permission condition is satisfied, a win / fail judgment means for executing the win / no judgment based on the random number,
Identification information display content deciding means for deciding stop identification information of the identification information based on the result of the hit / miss judgment by the hit / miss judgment means;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means, after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g), the identification information is stopped. Identification information display control means for controlling the stop display of the identification information,
The result of the hit determination by the hit determination means is a win, and the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed in the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g). After that, special game control means for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
Having a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and in the case of the specific game state, the unit from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display has become the specific game state. Required from the time of counting until the one unit is performed a predetermined number of times, the game state control means that can be controlled so as not to be in the normal game state and the sub-game section (for example, the sub-control board S) side to display effects And a game information transmitting means for transmitting the game information to the sub game section (for example, the sub control board S) side,
A first fluctuation pattern table as a table to be referred when determining the fluctuation display time of the identification information in the specific game state, and a second fluctuation pattern table in which the first fluctuation pattern table has a different tendency of selecting the fluctuation display time of the identification information. And a first fluctuation pattern table and a second fluctuation pattern table, at least a third fluctuation pattern table in which the selection tendency of the fluctuation display time of the identification information is different, the first fluctuation pattern in the specific period in the specific gaming state A first variation state that refers to the table, a second variation state that is shifted from the first variation state that refers to the second variation pattern table after the end of the specific period in the specific game state, and a specific game state to a normal game state After the transition, the third variation state that is transitioned from the second variation state that refers to the third variation pattern table And it has also,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) is provided with effect display content control means capable of displaying an effect,
In the first variation state, the specific effect is not executed until the one unit is performed a certain number of times after the first variation state, and the first variation state, and the first variation It is configured such that the specific effect can be executed after the one unit has been performed a certain number of times from the time when the state becomes the state,
It is configured so that a specific effect can be executed in the case of the second variation state,
It is configured so that the specific effect is not executed in the third variation state,
In the case of the first fluctuation state, the number of holdings at the time when the acceptance / rejection determination permission condition is satisfied is the first holding number and the number of holdings at the time when the acceptance / rejection determination permission condition is satisfied is the first holding number. When the number of second holdings is larger than the number, the average value of the fluctuation display time of the identification information when the result of the win / loss determination by the win / loss determination means when the win / loss determination permission condition is satisfied becomes non-win While the average value difference for a predetermined time occurs,
In the case of the second fluctuation state, when the number of holdings at the time of satisfying the acceptance / rejection determination permission condition is the first number of holdings and when the number of holdings at the time of satisfying the acceptance / rejection determination permission condition is the second It is configured so that the selection tendency of the variable display time of the identification information is the same when the number of holdings is the same as when the result of the win / loss determination by the win / loss determination means when the win / loss determination permission condition is satisfied is non-winning. Cage,
In the case of the third fluctuation state, when the number of holdings at the time of satisfying the acceptance / rejection determination permission condition is the first number of holdings and when the number of holdings at the time of satisfying the acceptance / rejection determination permission condition is the second It is configured so that the selection tendency of the variable display time of the identification information is the same when the number of holdings is the same as when the result of the win / loss determination by the win / loss determination means when the win / loss determination permission condition is satisfied is non-winning. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (7),
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a second large winning a prize mouth C20) which can take a closed state and an open state,
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the entrance into the starting port (eg, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10),
When the random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means, the obtained random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means for controlling the holding to occur,
When the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and a stop display mode of the identification information and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the win / fail judgment result. A game content determining means for determining
According to the determination by the game content determination means, the identification information is displayed in a variable manner on the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g) and then the identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means to control,
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that belongs to a predetermined group, a variable number of winnings is entered until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening (for example, the second special winning opening C20) or a predetermined period elapses. And a special game control means capable of executing a special game in which a unit game that can bring a mouth (for example, the second special winning opening C20) into an advantageous state for the player is executed a plurality of times,
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the predetermined group is more than the predetermined probability. Also has a high-probability lottery state with a high probability,
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) than the normal playing state,
After the execution of the special game, it is controlled so that it can be in either a high probability lottery state or a low probability lottery state,
When the high probability lottery state and the specific game state occur after the execution of the special game, the unit from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is counted as one unit after the end of the execution of the special game. After being played once, it is configured to be in a low probability lottery state and a normal game state,
When the low probability lottery state and the specific game state are entered after the execution of the special game, the unit from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is counted as one unit after the end of the execution of the special game. After being played twice, it is configured to be in a low probability lottery state and a normal game state,
When the first number is X and the second number is Y,
Y ≦ X
Is configured to
The production display format in the high-probability lottery state and the specific game state and the production display format in the low-probability lottery state and the specific game state can be the same.
The probability of being in a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game is A%,
In the case of a high probability lottery state after the execution of the special game, the period from the end of the execution of the special game to the first number of times the unit is counted from the end of the execution of the special game In the above, the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is B%,
When the low probability lottery state and the specific game state are reached after the execution of the special game, the one unit is the second number of times counted from the end of the execution of the special game to the end of the execution of the special game. When the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is C% in the period until it is displayed,
(A / 100) × (B / 100) <(A / 100) × (B / 100) + {(100−A) / 100} × (C / 100) <(A / 100)
And, and
(A / 100) × (B / 100) <(A / 100) × (B / 100) + {(100−A) / 100} × (C / 100) <(B / 100)
It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured as follows.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (8),
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a second large winning a prize mouth C20) which can take a closed state and an open state,
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the entrance into the starting port (eg, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10),
When the random number is obtained by the random number obtaining means, the obtained random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and a random number temporary storage means for controlling the holding to occur,
When the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a win / fail judgment is performed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and a stop display mode of the identification information and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the win / fail judgment result. A game content determining means for determining
According to the determination by the game content determination means, the identification information is displayed in a variable manner on the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g) and then the identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means to control,
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that belongs to a predetermined group, a variable number of winnings is entered until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening (for example, the second special winning opening C20) or a predetermined period elapses. And a special game control means capable of executing a special game in which a unit game that can bring a mouth (for example, the second special winning opening C20) into an advantageous state for the player is executed a plurality of times,
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the predetermined group is more than the predetermined probability. Also has a high-probability lottery state with a high probability,
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) than the normal playing state,
After the execution of the special game, it is controlled so that it can be in either a high probability lottery state or a low probability lottery state,
When the high probability lottery state and the specific game state occur after the execution of the special game, the unit from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is counted as one unit after the end of the execution of the special game. After being played once, it is configured to be in a low probability lottery state and a normal game state,
When the low probability lottery state and the specific game state are entered after the execution of the special game, the unit from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display is counted as one unit after the end of the execution of the special game. After being played twice, it is configured to be in a low probability lottery state and a normal game state,
When the first number is X and the second number is Y,
Y ≦ X
Is configured to
As an effect display format, at least an effect display format A and an effect display format B which is an effect display format different from the effect display format A are provided,
When the high probability lottery state and the specific game state are set after the execution of the special game, the effect display format can be set to either effect display format A or effect display format B, while after the execution of the special game. In the case of a low probability lottery state and a specific game state, the effect display format A is not set as the effect display format, but the effect display format B can be set.
The probability of being in a high-probability lottery state after the execution of the special game is A%,
In the case of a high probability lottery state after the execution of the special game, the period from the end of the execution of the special game to the first number of times the unit is counted from the end of the execution of the special game In the above, the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is B%,
When the low probability lottery state and the specific game state are reached after the execution of the special game, the one unit is the second number of times counted from the end of the execution of the special game to the end of the execution of the special game. When the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is C% in the period until it is displayed,
(A / 100) × (B / 100) <(A / 100) × (B / 100) + {(100−A) / 100} × (C / 100) <(A / 100)
And, and
(A / 100) × (B / 100) <(A / 100) × (B / 100) + {(100−A) / 100} × (C / 100) <(B / 100)
It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured as follows.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (9),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into the open state and the closed state, and is open. When the state is displaced, the game ball can enter the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the second starting port (For example, a variable member (eg, second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball in the second main game starting port B10 as compared to the state where the game ball cannot enter or is open. ,
A variable winning a prize opening (for example, a second large winning a prize mouth C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, second big winning opening C20) can enter
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, and the first suspension is controlled to occur. First random number temporary storage means,
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, according to the determination content based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol) First identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display portion A21g),
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, and the second suspension is controlled to occur. Second random number temporary storage means,
In the case where the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) Second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display section B21g),
A first special game control means for executing a first special game which may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode,
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable winning opening (eg, the second special winning opening C20) can be changed from the closed state to the open state. Winning mouth opening game control means,
When the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is a ball in the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C27), a second special game in which a unit game that can be in an advantageous state for the player is executed a plurality of times. A second special game control means for executing,
And a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side.
The variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) has a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) as a gaming state related to the ease of opening the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state. Has a specific game state that is likely to be in an open state, and is controlled so that it can be set to the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game. If it is the specific game state, the first identification information or From the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, one unit is set, and after the completion of the execution of the first special game or the second special game, the unit is counted as the normal game state until the one unit is performed a predetermined number of times. Is configured not to
As the predetermined number of terminations, at least a first number of terminations and a second number of terminations that is a number different from the first number of terminations are included,
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The variable winning opening opening game is executed by the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific mode, and the second special game executed when there is a ball in the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C27). After the end of, is configured to be in a specific game state,
After the end of the first special game executed by the stop display of the first identification information in a predetermined manner, it is configured to be in either the normal game state or the specific game state,
In the normal game state, when the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, and the special game state is reached after the end of the first special game, it is calculated after the end of the execution of the first special game and It is configured to be in a normal game state after one unit has been played the first final times,
In the normal game state, the variable winning opening opening game is executed by the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific mode, and is executed when there is a ball in a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). When the special game state is entered after the end of the second special game, the unit is counted from the end of execution of the second special game and the normal game state is set after the one unit has been played the second final number of times. It is a pachinko machine characterized by being played.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (10),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into the open state and the closed state, and is open. When the state is displaced, the game ball can enter the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the second starting port (For example, a variable member (eg, second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball in the second main game starting port B10 as compared to the state where the game ball cannot enter or is open. ,
A variable winning a prize opening (for example, a second large winning a prize mouth C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, second big winning opening C20) can enter
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, and the first suspension is controlled to occur. First random number temporary storage means,
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, according to the determination content based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol) First identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display portion A21g),
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, and the second suspension is controlled to occur. Second random number temporary storage means,
In the case where the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) Second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display section B21g),
A first special game control means for executing a first special game which may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode,
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable winning opening (eg, the second special winning opening C20) can be changed from the closed state to the open state. Winning mouth opening game control means,
When the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is a ball in the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C27), a second special game in which a unit game that can be in an advantageous state for the player is executed a plurality of times. A second special game control means for executing,
And a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side.
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d), there are a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be in the open state than in the normal game state. , The first special game or the second special game is controlled to be in the specific game state after completion of execution, and in the specific game state, from the start of variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display As a unit, it is configured not to be in the normal game state until the one final unit is played a predetermined number of times after the completion of the execution of the first special game or the second special game,
As the predetermined number of terminations, at least a first number of terminations and a second number of terminations that is a number different from the first number of terminations are included,
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number of two or more is reached,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The variable winning opening opening game is executed by the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific mode, and the second special game executed when there is a ball in the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C27). After the end of, is configured to be in a specific game state,
After the end of the first special game executed by the stop display of the first identification information in a predetermined manner, it is configured to be in either the normal game state or the specific game state,
In the normal game state, when the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, and the special game state is reached after the end of the first special game, it is calculated after the end of the execution of the first special game and It is configured to be in a normal game state after one unit has been played the first final times,
In the normal game state, the variable winning opening opening game is executed by the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific mode, and is executed when there is a ball in a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). When the special game state is entered after the end of the second special game, the unit is counted from the end of execution of the second special game and the normal game state is set after the one unit has been played the second final number of times. Has been done,
In the normal game state, when the stop identification information of the first identification information is stopped and displayed as a predetermined mode and the special game is executed, the probability that the special game state is reached after the execution of the special game is 1 is the second identification information. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured to have a higher probability of being stopped and displayed in a specific mode when it is displayed in a variable manner.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (11),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced into the open state and the closed state, and is open. When the state is displaced, the game ball can enter the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, A variable member (for example, a second main game starting port electric accessory) in which the game ball is difficult to enter in the two starting ports (for example, the second main game starting port B10) as compared to the state where the game ball cannot enter or is open. B11d),
A variable winning a prize opening (for example, a second large winning a prize mouth C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, second big winning opening C20) can enter
A first main game identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first main game identification information,
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second main game identification information,
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
And a sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the first main game identification information is satisfied, so that the first hold occurs. A first random number temporary storage means for controlling,
When the variable display start condition of the first main game identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the first main game identification information display unit (for example, the first First main game identification information display control means for controlling the first main game identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first main game identification information is variably displayed on the 1 main game symbol display portion A21g),
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the second main game identification information is satisfied, and the second hold is generated. Second random number temporary storage means for controlling,
When the variable display start condition of the second main game identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the second main game identification information display unit (for example, the second Second main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the second main game identification information after variably displaying the second main game identification information on the 2 main game symbol display portion B21g),
First special game control means for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode,
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable winning opening (eg, the second big winning opening C20) can be changed from the closed state to the open state. Variable winning opening opening game control means for executing,
When the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is a ball in the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C27), a second special game in which a unit game that can be in an advantageous state for the player is executed a plurality of times. A second special game control means for executing,
And a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side.
The variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) has a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) as a gaming state related to the ease of opening the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state. Has a specific game state that is likely to be in an open state, and is controlled so that it can be in the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game, and if it is the specific game state, the first main game identification From the start of the variable display of the information or the second main game identification information to the stop display is taken as one unit, and counting from after the end of the execution of the first special game or the second special game until the one unit has been performed a predetermined number of final times It is configured not to be in a normal game state,
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the information about the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content capable of displaying the sub game identification information on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG). Control means,
Within the period in which the first main game identification information is variably displayed on the first main game identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g) or the second main game identification information is the second main game identification. After the sub game identification information is variably displayed on the effect display unit (eg, effect display device SG) within the period that is variably displayed on the information display unit (eg, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). In provisionally, the operation for temporarily displaying the stop is defined as a pseudo variable unit, and after the pseudo variable unit is executed once or a plurality of times, it is provided with an auxiliary game identification information display control means for controlling the stop display to be confirmed.
Sub game identification information is configured to be able to execute a pseudo variable unit from the start of variable display to the stop display,
The probability that the pseudo variable unit is executed when the first main game identification information is variably displayed in the normal game state is the pseudo variable unit when the second main game identification information is variably displayed in the normal game state. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured to have a lower probability than being executed.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (12),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) that is attached to the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) and is displaceable in the open state and the closed state, and is opened. When it is displaced to the state, the game ball can enter the second starting port or is easier to enter compared to the closed state, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the ball or is opened to the second starting port. A variable member (for example, a second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to be difficult to enter by comparison,
A variable winning a prize opening (for example, a second large winning a prize mouth C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, second big winning opening C20) can enter
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
The production display unit (for example, the sub-control board S) is provided with a sub game unit (for example, the sub-control board S) that controls the production display.
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, and the first suspension is controlled to occur. First random number temporary storage means,
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, according to the determination content based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol) First identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display portion A21g),
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, and the second suspension is controlled to occur. Second random number temporary storage means,
In the case where the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) Second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display section B21g),
A first special game control means for executing a first special game which may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode,
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable winning opening (eg, the second special winning opening C20) can be changed from the closed state to the open state. Winning mouth opening game control means,
When the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is a ball in the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C27), a second special game in which a unit game that can be in an advantageous state for the player is executed a plurality of times. A second special game control means for executing,
And a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side.
From the closed state of the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) within the displacement driving period that is a period in which the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) can be displaced. After displacing to the open state, it is configured to be able to execute an easy-entering ball game in which the operation of displacing to the closed state is performed one or more times,
The variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) has a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) as a gaming state related to the ease of opening the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state. Has a specific game state that is likely to be in an open state, and is controlled so that it can be set to the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game. If it is the specific game state, the first identification information or From the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, one unit is set, and after the completion of the execution of the first special game or the second special game, the unit is counted as the normal game state until the one unit is performed a predetermined number of times. Is configured not to
As the predetermined number of terminations, at least a first number of terminations and a second number of terminations that is a number different from the first number of terminations are included,
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The variable winning opening opening game is executed by the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific mode, and the second special game executed when there is a ball in the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C27). After the end of, is configured to be in a specific game state,
After the end of the first special game executed by the stop display of the first identification information in a predetermined manner, it is configured to be in either the normal game state or the specific game state,
In the normal game state, when the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, and the special game state is reached after the end of the first special game, it is calculated after the end of the execution of the first special game and It is configured to be in a normal game state after one unit has been played the first final times,
In the normal game state, the variable winning opening opening game is executed by the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific mode, and is executed when there is a ball in a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). When the special game state is entered after the end of the second special game, the unit is counted from the end of execution of the second special game and the normal game state is set after the one unit has been played the second final number of times. Has been done,
In the normal game state, the variable winning opening opening game is executed by the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific mode, and is executed when there is a ball in a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). When the specific game state is reached after the end of the second special game, the second identification information is variably displayed in the specific game state, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is not the predetermined mode and the specific mode. In the case of the variable display time of the second identification information in the case, the variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) when the easy-ball game is executed once in the specific game state is in the open state. It is configured to be longer than the period,
In the normal gaming state, when the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, and when the special gaming state is reached after the end of the first special game, the second identification information is variably displayed in the specific gaming state. The variable display time of the second identification information when the stop display mode of the second identification information is not the predetermined mode and the specific mode is a variable member when the easy-ball game is executed once in the specific game state. (For example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d) is configured to be shorter than the period in which it is in the open state,
The variable winning opening opening game is executed by the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific mode in the normal gaming state, and a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) is displayed during the execution of the variable winning opening opening game. When the specific game state is entered after the end of the second special game executed when there is a ball, the first identification information is displayed as a variable display of the first first identification information or the second identification information in the specific game state. Variably displayed, than the variable display time of the first identification information when the stop display mode of the first identification information is a stop display mode different from the predetermined mode and the specific mode, the first in the specific game state The second identification information is variably displayed as a variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is different from the predetermined mode and the specific mode. It is pachinko machines, characterized in that towards the variable display time of the second identification information is configured to be long in the case of the embodiment.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (13),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) that is attached to the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) and is displaceable in the open state and the closed state, and is opened. When the state is displaced, the game ball can enter the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter as compared to the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the second starting port A variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball as compared to the state where the game ball cannot enter or is open,
A variable winning a prize opening (for example, a second large winning a prize mouth C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) into which a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening can enter,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, and the first suspension is controlled to occur. First random number temporary storage means,
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, according to the determination content based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol) First identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display portion A21g),
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, and the second suspension is controlled to occur. Second random number temporary storage means,
In the case where the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) Second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display section B21g),
A first special game control means for executing a first special game which may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode,
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable winning opening (eg, the second special winning opening C20) can be changed from the closed state to the open state. Winning mouth opening game control means,
When the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is a ball in the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C27), a second special game in which a unit game that can be in an advantageous state for the player is executed a plurality of times. A second special game control means for executing,
And a game information transmitting means for transmitting to the sub-game unit the game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit side,
From the closed state of the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) within the displacement driving period that is a period in which the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) can be displaced. After displacing to the open state, it is configured to be able to execute an easy-entering ball game in which the operation of displacing to the closed state is performed one or more times,
The variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) has a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) as a gaming state related to the ease of opening the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state. Has a specific game state that is likely to be in an open state, and is controlled so that it can be set to the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game. If it is the specific game state, the first identification information or From the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, one unit is set, and after the completion of the execution of the first special game or the second special game, the unit is counted as the normal game state until the one unit is performed a predetermined number of times. Is configured not to
As the predetermined number of terminations, at least a first number of terminations and a second number of terminations that is a number different from the first number of terminations are included,
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The variable winning opening opening game is executed by the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific mode, and the second special game executed when there is a ball in the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C27). After the end of, is configured to be in a specific game state,
After the end of the first special game executed by the stop display of the first identification information in a predetermined manner, it is configured to be in either the normal game state or the specific game state,
In the normal game state, when the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, and the special game state is reached after the end of the first special game, it is calculated after the end of the execution of the first special game and It is configured to be in a normal game state after one unit has been played the first final times,
In the normal game state, the second prize information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, so that the variable winning opening opening game is executed and the second special game executed when there is a ball in a specific area is specified after the end. When the game state is entered, it is configured to be in the normal game state after the first unit has been played the second final number of times after the completion of execution of the second special game,
In the normal game state, the variable winning opening opening game is executed by the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific mode, and is executed when there is a ball in a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). When the specific game state is reached after the end of the second special game, the second identification information is variably displayed in the specific game state, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is the predetermined mode and the specific mode. The variable display time of the second identification information in the case of different stop display modes is a variable member when the easy-ball game is executed once in the specific game state (for example, the second main game starting port electric auditorium product B11d). ) Is configured to be longer than the open period,
In the normal gaming state, when the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, and when the special gaming state is reached after the end of the first special game, the second identification information is variably displayed in the specific gaming state. The variable display time of the second identification information in the case where the stop display mode of the second identification information is a stop display mode different from the predetermined mode and the specific mode, the easy-entering-ball game is executed once in the specific game state. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) in the case of being played can be configured to be shorter than a period in which it is in an open state.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (14),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member (for example, a second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is attached to the second starting port and that can be displaced into the open state and the closed state, and when it is displaced into the open state, the second starting port (for example, , The second main game starting opening B10) is easier to enter the game ball as compared to the state in which the game ball can enter or is closed, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is configured to make it difficult to enter the game ball as compared to the state where the game ball cannot enter or is open,
A variable winning a prize opening (for example, a second large winning a prize mouth C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) into which a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening can enter,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, and the first suspension is controlled to occur. First random number temporary storage means,
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, according to the determination content based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol) First identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display portion A21g),
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, and the second suspension is controlled to occur. Second random number temporary storage means,
In the case where the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) Second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display section B21g),
A first special game control means for executing a first special game which may be advantageous to the player after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined mode,
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, the variable winning opening (eg, the second special winning opening C20) can be changed from the closed state to the open state. Winning mouth opening game control means,
When the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is a ball in the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C27), a second special game in which a unit game that can be in an advantageous state for the player is executed a plurality of times. A second special game control means for executing,
And a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side.
The variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) has a variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) as a gaming state related to the ease of opening the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state. Has a specific game state that is likely to be in an open state, and is controlled so that it can be set to the specific game state after the execution of the first special game or the second special game. If it is the specific game state, the first identification information or From the start of the variable display of the second identification information to the stop display, one unit is set, and after the completion of the execution of the first special game or the second special game, the unit is counted as the normal game state until the one unit is performed a predetermined number of times. Is configured not to
As the predetermined number of terminations, at least a first number of terminations and a second number of terminations that is a number different from the first number of terminations are included,
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number is reached,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The variable winning opening opening game is executed by the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific mode, and the second special game executed when there is a ball in the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C27). After the end of, is configured to be in a specific game state,
After the end of the first special game executed by the stop display of the first identification information in a predetermined manner, it is configured to be in either the normal game state or the specific game state,
In the normal game state, when the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, and the special game state is reached after the end of the first special game, it is calculated after the end of the execution of the first special game and It is configured to be in a normal game state after one unit has been played the first final times,
In the specific game state, the variable winning opening opening game is executed by the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific mode, and is executed when there is a ball entering a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). In the case of entering the specific game state after the end of the second special game, and in the normal game state after the one unit has been played the first final number of times counted from the end of execution of the second special game, It is configured to be able to execute a specific effect during execution of the second special game or before execution of the second special game,
In the specific game state, the variable winning opening opening game is executed by the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific mode, and is executed when there is a ball entering a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27). In the case of entering the specific game state after the end of the second special game, and in the normal game state after the one unit has been played the second final number of times after the end of execution of the second special game, A pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured not to execute a specific effect during execution of a second special game or before execution of the second special game.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (15),
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable member (for example, the second main game starting port electric accessory B11d) that is attached to the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10) and can be displaced in the open state and the closed state. ), When the game ball is displaced to the open state, the game ball can enter the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state. Yes, when the game ball is displaced to the closed state, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10) incapable of entering or open state. A variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d),
The game ball flowing down the first area side is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter the ball than the game ball flowing down the second area side. A variable winning opening that can take an open state and a closed state (for example, Second prize hole C20),
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) into which a game ball that has entered the variable winning opening can enter,
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
A speaker capable of outputting sound (for example, speaker D24),
And a sub game unit (for example, sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) and voice output to the speaker (for example, speaker D24),
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10),
On the basis of the random number acquired by the random number acquiring means, the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means for controlling
First special game control means for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner,
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, a variable winning opening opening game control means for executing a variable winning opening opening game capable of changing the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) from a closed state to an open state. ,
When the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is a ball in the specific area (for example, the V winning opening C27), a second special game in which a unit game that can be in an advantageous state for the player is executed a plurality of times. A second special game control means for executing,
And a game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game section (for example, sub-control board S) side.
The variable member (for example, the second main game starting opening electric accessory B11d) has a gaming state relating to the ease of opening, and the variable member (for example, the second main gaming starting opening electric accessory B11d) is more than the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state. Has a specific game state that is likely to be in an open state, and controls so that the specific game state can be set after the execution of the first special game or the second special game,
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
As a variable winning opening opening game, a variable winning opening opening game A in which the possibility of entering a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) has a predetermined probability, and entering a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) At least a variable winning opening opening game B having a possibility that the probability is lower than the predetermined probability,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode in the normal game state, a variable winning a prize launch effect for instructing to shoot a game ball toward the variable winning a prize hole (for example, the second special winning a prize hole C20) is executed. Is configured to obtain
The variable winning a prize launch production is a production mode in which after a specific display is displayed on the production display unit (for example, the production display device SG), a specific sound is output from the speaker (for example, the speaker D24).
When the game ball is shot toward the second area side, the shot game ball flows down the second area and can enter the variable winning port (for example, the second big winning port C20), but from the speaker. When the game ball is launched toward the second area side at the timing when the specific voice is started, the launched game ball flows down the second area and the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening). At the timing of reaching C20), the variable winning opening (for example, the second special winning opening C20) is closed, or the variable winning opening (for example, the second special winning opening C20) is closed. The probability of being present is configured to be higher than the probability that the variable winning opening (for example, the second special winning opening C20) is open,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode in the normal game state, and when the variable winning opening opening game A is executed, the variable winning opening is opened after the identification information starts variably displaying. The variable winning opening firing effect is configured to be executed in a period until the game A is finished executing,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode in the normal game state, and when the variable winning opening opening game B is executed, the variable winning opening is opened after the identification information starts variably displaying. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the variable winning a prize mouth firing effect is configured not to be executed until the game B ends.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (16),
A first starting opening (for example, a first main game starting opening A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a second large winning a prize mouth C20) which can take a closed state and an open state,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying the first identification information (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g),
A second identification information display section capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
And a sub-game unit (for example, a sub-control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
First random number acquisition means for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering a first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10),
Based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), the first identification information is stopped. A first identification information display control means for controlling to display,
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10),
Based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, second identification information display control means for controlling to secondly display the second identification information after variably displaying the second identification information on the second identification information display part When,
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, there is a predetermined number of balls entering a variable winning a prize port (for example, the second special winning a prize port C20) or a predetermined number. Special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game in which a variable winning opening (for example, the second special winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for a player until the period has elapsed,
A low-probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information will be stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group is a predetermined probability, and the stop in which the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group There is a high-probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability, and there was a ball entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) during the execution of the special game. In this case, after the execution of the special game, a high-probability lottery state can be set. On the other hand, when the special area (for example, the specific area C22) is not entered during the execution of the special game, In the game state transition control means for controlling to be in a low probability lottery state,
The sub game section side (for example, the sub control board S) is provided with game information transmitting means for transmitting the game information necessary for effect display to the sub game section (for example, the sub control board S) side,
As a game state relating to the ease of entering the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10), the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) is more than the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state. Has a specific game state that makes it easy to enter the ball, and controls so that it can be in the specific game state after the execution of the special game. If it is in the specific game state, the fluctuation of the first identification information or the second identification information From the display start to the stop display is one unit, it is configured to be in the normal game state after the particular unit has been played a predetermined number of times after the end of execution of the special game,
It is possible to measure the number of consecutive times that the high probability lottery state has been reached after the execution of the special game, and the low probability lottery state and the specific game state after the execution of the special game executed after the number of consecutive times has reached a certain number Is configured to
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) is provided with effect display content control means capable of displaying an effect,
The second identification is more than the ease of entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) during the execution of the special game executed by the stop display of the first identification information belonging to the predetermined group. The information is displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group so that it is easier to enter a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) during the execution of the special game. Cage,
In the normal game state, the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, and a special area (for example, a specific area C22) is displayed during execution of a special game. Selection of the variable display time of the first identification information or the second identification information in the low probability lottery state and the specific game state when there is no ball entered and the low probability lottery state and the specific game state are set after the execution of the special game A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) during execution of a special game executed by the tendency and the first identification information or the second identification information being stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group in the normal game state. ), And the high probability lottery state and the specific game state after the execution of the special game, the first identification information or the second knowledge in the high probability lottery state and the specific game state. And selection tendencies of the variation display time information, is configured to differ,
In the normal game state, the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, and a special area (for example, a specific area C22) is displayed during execution of a special game. There is no ball entered, and the production tendency in the low probability lottery state and the specific game state in the case of the low probability lottery state and the specific game state after the execution of the special game, and the first identification information or the first in the normal game state (Ii) There is a ball in a specific area (for example, a specific area C22) during the execution of the special game executed by the stop display of the identification information belonging to a predetermined group, and the execution of the special game ends. Pachinko play characterized by being configured to be different from the production tendency in the high probability lottery state and the specific game state when the high probability lottery state and the specific game state are subsequently set It is a machine.

Pachinko game machine according to this concept (17),
A starting port into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game starting port A10, a second main game starting port B10),
A variable winning a prize mouth (for example, a second large winning a prize mouth C20) which can take a closed state and an open state,
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g),
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying effects,
It is provided with a sub game part (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game section (for example, the main control board M),
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the entrance into the starting port (eg, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10),
On the basis of the random number acquired by the random number acquiring means, the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means for controlling
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode that belongs to a predetermined group, a variable number of winnings is entered until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning opening (for example, the second special winning opening C20) or a predetermined period has elapsed. Special game control means capable of executing a special game in which a unit game that allows the mouth (for example, the second special winning opening C20) to be in an advantageous state for the player is executed a plurality of times,
The sub game section side (for example, the sub control board S) is provided with game information transmitting means for transmitting the game information necessary for effect display to the sub game section (for example, the sub control board S) side,
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode that belongs to the predetermined group is more than the predetermined probability. Also has a high-probability lottery state with a high probability,
As a game state relating to the ease of entering the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10), it is easier to enter the starting opening than the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state. It has a game state and is configured to control so that it can be in a specific game state after the end of execution of the special game,
It is possible to measure the number of consecutive times that the high probability lottery state has been reached after the execution of the special game, and the low probability lottery state and the specific game state after the execution of the special game executed after the number of consecutive times has reached a certain number Is configured to
The sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) is
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M) side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) is provided with effect display content control means capable of displaying an effect,
In the normal game state, if the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, and if the specific game state is entered after the execution of the special game that is executed, the identification information is stopped from the variable display start. It is configured to be one unit up to the display, and to be in the normal game state after the particular unit has been played a predetermined number of times after the end of execution of the special game,
As an effect display format, at least an effect display format A and an effect display format B which is an effect display format different from the effect display format A are provided,
A high probability lottery state is more likely to be expected when the effect display format B is set in the specific game state than when the effect display format A is set in the specific game state. It is a pachinko machine characterized by being played.

M main control board,
MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol variation management timer, MP11t-C 1st and 2nd main gaming symbol variation management timer MP11t-C1 1st main gaming timer, MP11t-C2 2nd main gaming timer MP22t-B 2nd main game Starting mouth electric accessory release timer, MP33c prize ball counter MP34t special game timer, MP51c probability variation counter MP52c time reduction counter, MN52c limited frequency counter MP41t small hitting game timer, MP41t-2 discharge standby timer A first main game peripheral Equipment A10 1st main game starting opening (1st main game starting opening A), A11s 1st main game starting entrance ball detection device A20 1st main game symbol display device, A21g 1st main game symbol display section A21h 1st main Game symbol hold display section, B 2nd main game peripheral device B10 2nd main game starting opening, B11s 2nd main Technique start mouth entrance detection device B11d second main game start mouth electric accessory, B20 second main game symbol display device B21g second main game symbol display portion, B21h second main game symbol hold display portion C 1st and 2nd Main game common peripheral device, C10 1st prize winning opening C11s 1st prize winning prize winning detection device, C11d 1st prize winning mouth electric accessory C20 2nd prize winning prize, C21s 2nd prize winning prize winning detection device C21d 2nd Special winning opening electric prize, C22 specific area C23 second winning opening outlet, C23s second winning opening discharge detecting device C24 upper shielding member, C25 lower shielding member C27 V winning opening, C27s V winning opening detecting device C20-1 Box-shaped member H Auxiliary game peripheral equipment, H10 Auxiliary game start opening H11s Auxiliary game start entrance ball detection device, H20 Auxiliary game symbol display device H21g Auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h auxiliary Technical symbol reservation display unit S sub-control board, SM effect display control unit (sub-main control board)
SM21t Figure variation time management timer, SM26c Lookahead production execution counter SM23c Stay stage management counter, SM23c2 Number of consecutive games counter SM24t Power-on timer, SH10t Variation fixed time timer SS Production display means (sub-sub control unit), SG production display device, SG10 Display area SG11 Decorative pattern display area, SG12 first hold display section SG13 second hold display section, SB sub input button SBs sub input button input detection device, KH prize ball payout control board KE prize ball payout device, MT10 buffer for command transmission MP51c-2 Probability change continuous counter, MN52c-1 Limited frequency A counter MN52c-2 Limited frequency B counter

Claims (1)

A starting opening that allows game balls to enter,
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information,
A main game unit that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display section that can display effects,
It is provided with a sub game part that controls the effect display on the effect display part,
The main game department is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting opening,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition unit, a random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the acceptance / rejection determination permission condition is satisfied,
In the case where the acceptance / rejection determination permission condition for a certain hold is satisfied, a win / fail determination means for performing a win / fail determination based on the random number related to the certain hold,
Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be displayed in a stopped state after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display part based on the result of the acceptance determination by the acceptance determination means,
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, the variable winning a prize hole may be in an advantageous state for the player until a predetermined number of balls enter the variable winning a prize hole or a predetermined period elapses. Special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game a plurality of times,
Having a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and in the case of the specific game state, the unit from the start of the variable display of the identification information to the stop display has become the specific game state. A gaming state control means that can be controlled so as not to be in a normal gaming state until the one unit is performed a predetermined number of times from the time of calculation,
And a game information transmitting means for transmitting to the sub-game unit the game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit side,
A first fluctuation pattern table as a table to be referred when determining the fluctuation display time of the identification information, a second fluctuation pattern table in which the first fluctuation pattern table is different in the selection tendency of the fluctuation display time of the identification information, A first variation state that has at least a third variation pattern table in which the variation display times of the identification information differ from the variation pattern table and the second variation pattern table, and refers to the first variation pattern table; It has at least a second variation state that refers to the variation pattern table and a third variation state that refers to the third variation pattern table, and the first variation state is a variation state in a specific period of the specific game state, The second variation state is a variation state in the specific game state, and is shifted from the first variation state when the specific period ends. A dynamic state, the third variation state is variable state is migrated from it and a second change state variation state in the normal game state,
The sub game department,
Game information receiving means for receiving the game information transmitted from the main game section side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means capable of displaying the effect on the effect display unit,
When the number of remaining times of the one unit in the specific game state becomes a certain number of times less than the predetermined number of times, it is suggested that the number of remaining times of the one unit in the specific game state is less than or equal to the certain number of times in the specific game state thereafter. It is possible to execute the remaining number suggestion effect, which is the effect
While having at least a first period and a second period that is a period later than the first period as a period that is the first fluctuation state, while the remaining number suggestion production is not executed in the first period in the first fluctuation state. In the second period in the first fluctuation state, the remaining number suggestive effect is configured to be executed,
When the second variation state, the remaining number suggestion effect is configured to be executed,
If the third variation state, the remaining number suggestion effect is configured not to be executed,
In the case of the first fluctuation state, the number of holdings at the time when the acceptance / rejection determination permission condition is satisfied is the first holding number and the number of holdings at the time when the acceptance / rejection determination permission condition is satisfied is the first holding number. When the number of second holdings is larger than the number, the average value of the fluctuation display time of the identification information when the result of the win / loss determination by the win / loss determination means when the win / loss determination permission condition is satisfied becomes non-win While the average value difference for a predetermined time occurs,
In the case of the second fluctuation state, when the number of holdings at the time of satisfying the acceptance / rejection determination permission condition is the first number of holdings and when the number of holdings at the time of satisfying the acceptance / rejection determination permission condition is the second It is configured so that the selection tendency of the variable display time of the identification information is the same when the number of holdings is the same as when the result of the win / loss determination by the win / loss determination means when the win / loss determination permission condition is satisfied is non-winning. Cage,
In both the first period in the first fluctuation state and the second period in the first fluctuation state, it is configured to refer to the first fluctuation pattern table,
The number of candidates related to the variable display time of the identification information that can be selected when the result of the win / fail judgment by the win / win determination means is the non-winning state is the second fluctuation state and the win / fail by the win / fail determination means. It is configured to be larger than the number of candidates related to the variable display time of the identification information that can be selected when the determination result is non-winning,
The number of candidates relating to the variable display time of the identification information that can be selected when the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination unit is in the first fluctuation state is the second fluctuation state and the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination unit. If the result of the above is a win, it is configured to be larger than the number of candidates related to the variable display time of the identification information that can be selected,
The variation of the identification information that is most likely to be taken when the number of holdings at the time when the winning / disapproval determination permission condition is satisfied in the first variation state is the second number of holdings and the result of the determination of win / loss by the win / loss determination means is non-win Rather than the display time, it is most taken when the number of holdings at the time of satisfying the win / loss judgment permission condition in the second variation state is the second number of holdings and the result of the win / fail judgment by the win / loss determination means is non-win. The variation display time of easy identification information is configured to be longer,
A pachinko game machine characterized in that a specific background effect executed by the effect display unit in the second variation state is configured not to be executed in the first variation state.

Images